Dell Configuration Guide for the S6100–ON System 9.10(0.
Notes, cautions, and warnings NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your product. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem. WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death. Copyright © 2017 Dell Inc. or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Dell, EMC, and other trademarks are trademarks of Dell Inc. or its subsidiaries.
Contents 1 About this Guide...........................................................................................................................................32 Audience............................................................................................................................................................................32 Conventions.....................................................................................................................................................
Management............................................................................................................................................... 56 Configuring Privilege Levels........................................................................................................................................... 56 Creating a Custom Privilege Level...........................................................................................................................
Restoring Factory Default Environment Variables..................................................................................................77 Reloading the system...................................................................................................................................................... 79 5 802.1X.........................................................................................................................................................
IP Fragments ACL Examples....................................................................................................................................113 Layer 4 ACL Rules Examples................................................................................................................................... 113 Configure a Standard IP ACL.........................................................................................................................................
Establish a Session................................................................................................................................................... 165 Route Reflectors.............................................................................................................................................................166 BGP Attributes......................................................................................................................................................
Filtering BGP Routes Using Route Maps..............................................................................................................203 Filtering BGP Routes Using AS-PATH Information..............................................................................................203 Configuring BGP Route Reflectors........................................................................................................................204 Aggregating Routes...........................................
Configuring Priority-Based Flow Control.....................................................................................................................241 Configuring Lossless Queues................................................................................................................................. 242 Configuring PFC in a DCB Map................................................................................................................................... 243 PFC Configuration Notes....
Configure a Method of Hostname Resolution...................................................................................................... 277 Using DNS for Address Resolution........................................................................................................................ 277 Using NetBIOS WINS for Address Resolution......................................................................................................278 Creating Manual Binding Entries.............................
Configure the FC-MAP Value................................................................................................................................ 306 Configure a Port for a Bridge-to-Bridge Link.......................................................................................................306 Configure a Port for a Bridge-to-FCF Link...........................................................................................................306 Impact on Other Software Features.................
Sample Configuration and Topology............................................................................................................................330 17 GARP VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP).............................................................................................. 332 Important Points to Remember....................................................................................................................................332 Configure GVRP.................................
Basic Interface Configuration.......................................................................................................................................355 Advanced Interface Configuration...............................................................................................................................355 Interface Types...............................................................................................................................................................
Split 40G Ports on a 16X40G QSFP+ Module............................................................................................................379 Splitting 100G Ports...................................................................................................................................................... 380 Link Dampening..............................................................................................................................................................
Configuration Tasks for ICMP...................................................................................................................................... 406 Enabling ICMP Unreachable Messages...................................................................................................................... 406 UDP Helper.....................................................................................................................................................................
22 iSCSI Optimization................................................................................................................................... 431 iSCSI Optimization Overview........................................................................................................................................ 431 Monitoring iSCSI Traffic Flows...............................................................................................................................
LACP Configuration Tasks............................................................................................................................................466 Creating a LAG.........................................................................................................................................................466 Configuring the LAG Interfaces as Dynamic........................................................................................................
LLDP Compatibility..................................................................................................................................................500 CONFIGURATION versus INTERFACE Configurations............................................................................................ 500 Enabling LLDP................................................................................................................................................................
MSDP with Anycast RP................................................................................................................................................532 Configuring Anycast RP................................................................................................................................................533 Reducing Source-Active Message Flooding.........................................................................................................
32 Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3).................................................................................... 571 Protocol Overview..........................................................................................................................................................571 Autonomous System (AS) Areas............................................................................................................................ 571 Area Types..................................
34 PIM Sparse-Mode (PIM-SM).................................................................................................................. 622 Implementation Information..........................................................................................................................................622 Protocol Overview.........................................................................................................................................................
Creating a Community VLAN.................................................................................................................................650 Creating an Isolated VLAN..................................................................................................................................... 650 Private VLAN Configuration Example.........................................................................................................................
Configuring Weights and ECN for WRED ................................................................................................................. 688 Global Service Pools With WRED and ECN Settings..........................................................................................689 Configuring WRED and ECN Attributes.....................................................................................................................
44 Security................................................................................................................................................... 724 AAA Accounting............................................................................................................................................................. 724 Configuration Task List for AAA Accounting........................................................................................................ 724 AAA Authentication....
Configuring Dell Networking OS Options for Trunk Ports.................................................................................. 765 Debugging VLAN Stacking..................................................................................................................................... 766 VLAN Stacking in Multi-Vendor Networks........................................................................................................... 766 VLAN Stacking Packet Drop Precedence........................
Writing Managed Object Values...................................................................................................................................792 Configuring Contact and Location Information using SNMP................................................................................... 792 Subscribing to Managed Object Value Updates using SNMP..................................................................................793 Enabling a Subset of SNMP Traps..................................
Adding an Interface to the Spanning Tree Group....................................................................................................... 818 Modifying Global Parameters........................................................................................................................................ 818 Modifying Interface STP Parameters...........................................................................................................................819 Enabling PortFast............
Important Points to Remember................................................................................................................................... 848 Configuring Uplink Failure Detection........................................................................................................................... 849 Clearing a UFD-Disabled Interface..............................................................................................................................
Configuration Notes.................................................................................................................................................878 Primary and Secondary VLT Peers.........................................................................................................................881 RSTP and VLT...........................................................................................................................................................
Configuring VxLAN Gateway........................................................................................................................................924 Connecting to an NVP Controller.......................................................................................................................... 924 Advertising VXLAN Access Ports to Controller...................................................................................................925 Displaying VXLAN Configurations...........
Enabling Environmental Monitoring............................................................................................................................. 973 Recognize an Overtemperature Condition............................................................................................................974 Troubleshoot an Over-temperature Condition......................................................................................................975 Recognize an Under-Voltage Condition...............
1 About this Guide This guide describes the protocols and features the Dell Networking Operating System (OS) supports and provides configuration instructions and examples for implementing them. For complete information about all the CLI commands, see the Dell Command Line Reference Guide for your system. The S6100–ON platform is available with Dell Networking OS version 9.10(0.0) and beyond. Though this guide contains information about protocols, it is not intended to be a complete reference.
2 Configuration Fundamentals The Dell Networking Operating System (OS) command line interface (CLI) is a text-based interface you can use to configure interfaces and protocols. The CLI is largely the same for each platform except for some commands and command outputs. The CLI is structured in modes for security and management purposes. Different sets of commands are available in each mode, and you can limit user access to modes using privilege levels.
You can set user access rights to commands and command modes using privilege levels. The Dell Networking OS CLI is divided into three major mode levels: • EXEC mode is the default mode and has a privilege level of 1, which is the most restricted level. Only a limited selection of commands is available, notably the show commands, which allow you to view system information.
PVST PORT-CHANNEL FAILOVER-GROUP PREFIX-LIST PRIORITY-GROUP PROTOCOL GVRP QOS POLICY RSTP ROUTE-MAP ROUTER BGP BGP ADDRESS-FAMILY ROUTER ISIS ISIS ADDRESS-FAMILY ROUTER OSPF ROUTER OSPFV3 ROUTER RIP SPANNING TREE TRACE-LIST VLT DOMAIN VRRP UPLINK STATE GROUP GRUB Navigating CLI Modes The Dell Networking OS prompt changes to indicate the CLI mode. The following table lists the CLI mode, its prompt, and information about how to access and exit the CLI mode.
CLI Command Mode Prompt Access Command 25 Gigabit Ethernet Interface Dell(conf-if-tf-1/1/1/1)# interface(INTERFACE modes) 50 Gigabit Ethernet Interface Dell(conf-if-fi-1/1/1/1)# interface(INTERFACE modes) 100 Gigabit Ethernet Interface Dell(conf-if-hu-1/1/1)# interface(INTERFACE modes) Interface Group Dell(conf-if-group)# interface(INTERFACE modes) Interface Range Dell(conf-if-range)# interface (INTERFACE modes) Loopback Interface Dell(conf-if-lo-0)# interface (INTERFACE modes) Manageme
CLI Command Mode Prompt Access Command ROUTER OSPFV3 Dell(conf-ipv6router_ospf)# ipv6 router ospf ROUTER RIP Dell(conf-router_rip)# router rip SPANNING TREE Dell(config-span)# protocol spanning-tree 0 TRACE-LIST Dell(conf-trace-acl)# ip trace-list CLASS-MAP Dell(config-class-map)# class-map CONTROL-PLANE Dell(conf-control-cpuqos)# control-plane-cpuqos DHCP Dell(config-dhcp)# ip dhcp server DHCP POOL Dell(config-dhcp-pool-name)# pool (DHCP Mode) ECMP Dell(conf-ecmp-group-ecmpgroup
The do Command You can enter an EXEC mode command from any CONFIGURATION mode (CONFIGURATION, INTERFACE, SPANNING TREE, and so on.) without having to return to EXEC mode by preceding the EXEC mode command with the do command. The following example shows the output of the do command.
Dell(conf-if-te-1/1/1/1)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/1 no ip address no shutdown Layer 2 protocols are disabled by default. To enable Layer 2 protocols, use the no disable command. For example, in PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE mode, enter no disable to enable Spanning Tree.
Short-Cut Key Combination Action CNTL-I Completes a keyword. CNTL-K Deletes all characters from the cursor to the end of the command line. CNTL-L Re-enters the previous command. CNTL-N Return to more recent commands in the history buffer after recalling commands with CTRL-P or the UP arrow key. CNTL-P Recalls commands, beginning with the last command. CNTL-R Re-enters the previous command. CNTL-U Deletes the line. CNTL-W Deletes the previous word. CNTL-X Deletes the line.
Example of the grep Keyword Dell#show system brief | grep Management 1 Management online S6100-ON Dell# S6100-ON 9.10(0.0) 130 NOTE: Dell Networking OS accepts a space or no space before and after the pipe. To filter a phrase with spaces, underscores, or ranges, enclose the phrase with double quotation marks. The except keyword displays text that does not match the specified text. The following example shows this command used in combination with the show system brief command.
If either of these messages appears, Dell Networking recommends coordinating with the users listed in the message so that you do not unintentionally overwrite each other’s configuration changes.
3 Getting Started This chapter describes how you start configuring your system. When you power up the chassis, the system performs a power-on self test (POST) and system then loads the Dell Networking Operating System. Boot messages scroll up the terminal window during this process. No user interaction is required if the boot process proceeds without interruption. When the boot process completes, the system status LEDs remain online (green) and the console monitor displays the EXEC mode prompt.
Console Access The device has one RJ-45/RS-232 console port, an out-of-band (OOB) Ethernet port, and a micro USB-B console port. Serial Console The RS-232 console port and the RJ-45 out-of-band management Ethernet ports are on the left-hand side of the system as you face the I/O side of the chassis, as shown in the following illustration. The USB port is on the right-hand side. Figure 1. RJ-45 Console Port 1 USB port. 2 RS-232 console and RJ-45 out-of-band management Ethernet ports.
Table 2. Pin Assignments Between the Console and a DTE Terminal Server Console Port RJ-45 to RJ-45 Rollover RJ-45 to RJ-45 Rollover RJ-45 to DB-9 Adapter Cable Cable Terminal Server Device Signal RJ-45 Pinout RJ-45 Pinout DB-9 Pin Signal RTS 1 8 8 CTS NC 2 7 6 DSR TxD 3 6 2 RxD GND 4 5 5 GND GND 5 4 5 GND RxD 6 3 3 TxD NC 7 2 4 DTR CTS 8 1 7 RTS Micro USB-B Access The Micro USB type B console port is on the I/O side.
Default Configuration Although a version of Dell Networking OS is pre-loaded onto the system, the system is not configured when you power up the system first time (except for the default hostname, which is Dell). You must configure the system using the CLI. Configuring a Host Name The host name appears in the prompt. The default host name is Dell. • Host names must start with a letter and end with a letter or digit. • Characters within the string can be letters, digits, and hyphens.
• 3 mask: a subnet mask in /prefix-length format (/ xx). Enable the interface. INTERFACE mode no shutdown Configure a Management Route Define a path from the system to the network from which you are accessing the system remotely. Management routes are separate from IP routes and are only used to manage the system through the management port. To configure a management route, use the following command. • Configure a management route to the network from which you are accessing the system.
• level: is the privilege level, is 15 by default, and is not required. • encryption-type: specifies how you input the password, is 0 by default, and is not required. • 0 is to input the password in clear text. • 5 is to input a password that is already encrypted using MD5 encryption method. Obtain the encrypted password from the configuration file of another device. • 7 is to input a password that is already encrypted using DES encryption method.
Example of Importing a File to the Local System Dell#copy ftp://myusername:mypassword@192.168.1.1/file_path/FTOS-S6100-ON-9.10.0.0.bin flash:// FTOS-S6100-ON-9.10.0.0.bin !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! 54238335 bytes successfully copied Mounting an NFS File System This feature enables you to quickly access data on an NFS mounted file system.
Example of Logging in to Copy from NFS Mount Dell#copy nfsmount:///test flash: Destination file name [test]: test2 ! 5592 bytes successfully copied Dell# Dell#copy nfsmount:///test.txt ftp://10.16.127.35 Destination file name [test.txt]: User name to login remote host: username Password to login remote host: ! Example of Copying to NFS Mount Dell#copy flash://test.txt nfsmount:/// Destination file name [test.txt]: ! 15 bytes successfully copied Dell#copy flash://test/capture.txt.
NOTE: When copying to a server, a host name can only be used if a DNS server is configured. NOTE: When you load the startup configuration or a configuration file from a network server such as TFTP to the running configuration, the configuration is added to the running configuration. This does not replace the existing running configuration. Commands in the configuration file has precedence over commands in the running configuration.
View Configuration Files Configuration files have three commented lines at the beginning of the file, as shown in the following example, to help you track the last time any user made a change to the file, which user made the changes, and when the file was last saved to the startup-configuration.
To view the command-history trace, use the show command-history command.
Verify Software Images Before Installation To validate the software image on the flash drive, you can use the MD5 message-digest algorithm or SHA256 Secure Hash Algorithm, after the image is transferred to the system but before the image is installed. The validation calculates a hash value of the downloaded image file on system’s flash drive, and, optionally, compares it to a Dell Networking published hash for that file.
SHA256 Dell# verify sha256 flash://FTOS-SE-9.5.0.0.bin e6328c06faf814e6899ceead219afbf9360e986d692988023b749e6b2093e933 SHA256 hash VERIFIED for FTOS-SE-9.5.0.0.
4 Management This chapter describes the different protocols or services used to manage the Dell Networking system.
• restricting access to an EXEC mode command • moving commands from EXEC Privilege to EXEC mode • restricting access A user can access all commands at his privilege level and below. Removing a Command from EXEC Mode To remove a command from the list of available commands in EXEC mode for a specific privilege level, use the privilege exec command from CONFIGURATION mode.
• privilege exec level level {command ||...|| command} Move a command from EXEC Privilege to EXEC mode. CONFIGURATION mode • privilege exec level level {command ||...|| command} Allow access to CONFIGURATION mode. CONFIGURATION mode • privilege exec level level configure Allow access to INTERFACE, LINE, ROUTE-MAP, and/or ROUTER mode. Specify all the keywords in the command. CONFIGURATION mode • privilege configure level level {interface | line | route-map | router} {command-keyword ||...
Applying a Privilege Level to a Username To set the user privilege level, use the following command. • Configure a privilege level for a user. CONFIGURATION mode username username privilege level Applying a Privilege Level to a Terminal Line To set a privilege level for a terminal line, use the following command. • Configure a privilege level for a user.
Audit and Security Logs This section describes how to configure, display, and clear audit and security logs. The following is the configuration task list for audit and security logs: • Enabling Audit and Security Logs • Displaying Audit and Security Logs • Clearing Audit Logs Enabling Audit and Security Logs You enable audit and security logs to monitor configuration changes or determine if these changes affect the operation of the system in the network.
Displaying Audit and Security Logs To display audit logs, use the show logging auditlog command in Exec mode. To view these logs, you must first enable the logging extended command. Only the RBAC system administrator user role can view the audit logs. Only the RBAC security administrator and system administrator user role can view the security logs. If extended logging is disabled, you can only view system events, regardless of RBAC user role. To view security logs, use the show logging command.
Figure 2. Setting Up a Secure Connection to a Syslog Server Pre-requisites To configure a secure connection from the switch to the syslog server: 1 On the switch, enable the SSH server Dell(conf)#ip ssh server enable 2 On the syslog server, create a reverse SSH tunnel from the syslog server to the Dell OS switch, using following syntax: ssh -R :: user@remote_host -nNf In the following example the syslog server IP address is 10.156.166.
Log Messages in the Internal Buffer All error messages, except those beginning with %BOOTUP (Message), are log in the internal buffer.
• Configure a UNIX system as a syslog server by adding the following lines to /etc/syslog.conf on the UNIX system and assigning write permissions to the file. • Add line on a 4.1 BSD UNIX system. local7.debugging /var/log/ftos.log • Add line on a 5.7 SunOS UNIX system. local7.debugging /var/adm/ftos.log In the previous lines, local7 is the logging facility level and debugging is the severity level.
Display Login Statistics To view the login statistics, use the show login statistics command. Example of the show login statistics Command The show login statistics command displays the successful and failed login details of the current user in the last 30 days or the custom defined time period. Dell#show login statistics -----------------------------------------------------------------User: admin Last login time: 12:52:01 UTC Tue Mar 22 2016 Last login location: Line vty0 ( 10.16.127.
Example of the show login statistics user user-id command The show login statistics user user-id command displays the successful and failed login details of a specific user in the last 30 days or the custom defined time period. Dell# show login statistics user admin -----------------------------------------------------------------User: admin Last login time: 12:52:01 UTC Tue Mar 22 2016 Last login location: Line vty0 ( 10.16.127.
login concurrent-session limit number-of-sessions Example of Configuring Concurrent Session Limit The following example limits the permitted number of concurrent login sessions to 4. Dell(config)#login concurrent-session limit 4 Enabling the System to Clear Existing Sessions To enable the system to clear existing login sessions, follow this procedure: • Use the following command.
Changing System Logging Settings You can change the default settings of the system logging by changing the severity level and the storage location. The default is to log all messages up to debug level, that is, all system messages. By changing the severity level in the logging commands, you control the number of system messages logged. To specify the system logging settings, use the following commands. • Specify the minimum severity level for logging to the logging buffer.
Display the Logging Buffer and the Logging Configuration To display the current contents of the logging buffer and the logging settings for the system, use the show logging command in EXEC privilege mode. When RBAC is enabled, the security logs are filtered based on the user roles. Only the security administrator and system administrator can view the security logs.
• sys10 (system use) • sys11 (system use) • sys12 (system use) • sys13 (system use) • sys14 (system use) • syslog (for syslog messages) • user (for user programs) • uucp (UNIX to UNIX copy protocol) Example of the show running-config logging Command To view nondefault settings, use the show running-config logging command in EXEC mode.
Enabling Timestamp on Syslog Messages By default, syslog messages do not include a time/date stamp stating when the error or message was created. To enable timestamp, use the following command. • Add timestamp to syslog messages. CONFIGURATION mode service timestamps [log | debug] [datetime [localtime] [msec] [show-timezone] | uptime] Specify the following optional parameters: • You can add the keyword localtime to include the localtime, msec, and show-timezone.
• Enable FTP on the system. CONFIGURATION mode ftp-server enable Example of Viewing FTP Configuration Dell#show running ftp ! ftp-server enable ftp-server username nairobi password 0 zanzibar Dell# Configuring FTP Server Parameters After you enable the FTP server on the system, you can configure different parameters. To specify the system logging settings, use the following commands. • Specify the directory for users using FTP to reach the system.
ip ftp source-interface interface • Configure a password. CONFIGURATION mode ip ftp password password • Enter a username to use on the FTP client. CONFIGURATION mode ip ftp username name To view the FTP configuration, use the show running-config ftp command in EXEC privilege mode, as shown in the example for Enable FTP Server. Terminal Lines You can access the system remotely and restrict access to the system by creating user profiles.
seq 5 permit host 10.11.0.1 Dell(config-std-nacl)#line vty 0 Dell(config-line-vty)#show config line vty 0 access-class myvtyacl Dell(conf-ipv6-acl)#do show run acl ! ip access-list extended testdeny seq 10 deny ip 30.1.1.
password Example of Terminal Line Authentication In the following example, VTY lines 0-2 use a single authentication method, line.
Enter an IPv4 address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D). Enter an IPv6 address in the format 0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000. Elision of zeros is supported. Example of the telnet Command for Device Access Dell# telnet 10.11.80.203 Trying 10.11.80.203... Connected to 10.11.80.203. Exit character is '^]'. Login: Login: admin Password: Dell>exit Dell#telnet 2200:2200:2200:2200:2200::2201 Trying 2200:2200:2200:2200:2200::2201... Connected to 2200:2200:2200:2200:2200::2201. Exit character is '^]'.
NOTE: The CONFIGURATION mode lock corresponds to a VTY session, not a user. Therefore, if you configure a lock and then exit CONFIGURATION mode, and another user enters CONFIGURATION mode, when you attempt to re-enter CONFIGURATION mode, you are denied access even though you are the one that configured the lock. NOTE: If your session times out and you return to EXEC mode, the CONFIGURATION mode lock is unconfigured.
When you use the Network boot procedure to boot the device, the boot loader checks if the primary partition contains a valid image. If a valid image exists on the primary partition and the secondary partition does not contain a valid image, then the primary boot line is set to A: and the secondary and default boot lines are set to a Null string.
For example, 10.16.150.106/16. 5 Assign an IP address as the default gateway for the system. default-gateway gateway_ip_address For example, 10.16.150.254. 6 The environment variables are auto saved. 7 Reload the system. BOOT_USER # reload Reloading the system You can reload the system using the reload command. To reload the system, follow these steps: • Reload the system into Dell Networking OS.
5 802.1X 802.1X is a port-based Network Access Control (PNAC) that provides an authentication mechanism to devices wishing to attach to a LAN or WLAN. A device connected to a port that is enabled with 802.1X is disallowed from sending or receiving packets on the network until its identity is verified (through a username and password, for example). 802.
Figure 4. EAP Frames Encapsulated in Ethernet and RADUIS The authentication process involves three devices: • The device attempting to access the network is the supplicant. The supplicant is not allowed to communicate on the network until the authenticator authorizes the port. It can only communicate with the authenticator in response to 802.1X requests. • The device with which the supplicant communicates is the authenticator. The authenticator is the gate keeper of the network.
• Re-Authenticating a Port • Configuring Dynamic VLAN Assignment with Port Authentication • Guest and Authentication-Fail VLANs • Multi-Host Authentication • Multi-Supplicant Authentication • MAC Authentication Bypass • Dynamic CoS with 802.
EAP over RADIUS 802.1X uses RADIUS to shuttle EAP packets between the authenticator and the authentication server, as defined in RFC 3579. EAP messages are encapsulated in RADIUS packets as a type of attribute in Type, Length, Value (TLV) format. The Type value for EAP messages is 79. Figure 6. EAP Over RADIUS RADIUS Attributes for 802.1X Support Dell Networking systems include the following RADIUS attributes in all 802.
Important Points to Remember • Dell Networking OS supports 802.1X with EAP-MD5, EAP-OTP, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, PEAPv0, PEAPv1, and MS-CHAPv2 with PEAP. • All platforms support only RADIUS as the authentication server. • If the primary RADIUS server becomes unresponsive, the authenticator begins using a secondary RADIUS server, if configured. • 802.1X is not supported on port-channels or port-channel members. Enabling 802.1X Enable 802.1X globally. Figure 7. 802.1X Enabled 1 Enable 802.1X globally.
3 Enable 802.1X on the supplicant interface only. INTERFACE mode dot1x authentication Examples of Verifying that 802.1X is Enabled Globally and on an Interface Verify that 802.1X is enabled globally and at the interface level using the show running-config | find dot1x command from EXEC Privilege mode. In the following example, the bold lines show that 802.1X is enabled.
dot1x profile {profile-name} profile—name — Enter the dot1x profile name. The profile name length is limited to 32 characters. Example of Configuring and Displaying a dot1x Profile Dell(conf)#dot1x profile test Dell(conf-dot1x-profile)# Dell#show dot1x profile 802.1x profile information ----------------------------Dot1x Profile test Profile MACs 00:00:00:00:01:11 Configuring MAC addresses for a do1x Profile To configure a list of MAC addresses for a dot1x profile, use the mac command.
Dell(conf-if-Te 2/1))#show dot1x interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/1 802.
Guest VLAN: Guest VLAN id: Auth-Fail VLAN: Auth-Fail VLAN id: Auth-Fail Max-Attempts: Mac-Auth-Bypass: Mac-Auth-Bypass Only: Tx Period: Quiet Period: ReAuth Max: Supplicant Timeout: Server Timeout: Re-Auth Interval: Max-EAP-Req: Host Mode: Auth PAE State: Backend State: Enable 100 Disable NONE NONE Enable Enable 3 seconds 60 seconds 2 30 seconds 30 seconds 3600 seconds 2 SINGLE_HOST Authenticated Idle Configuring Request Identity Re-Transmissions When the authenticator sends a Request Identity frame and t
INTERFACE mode dot1x quiet-period seconds The range is from 1 to 65535. The default is 60 seconds.
• • after 90 seconds and a maximum of 10 times for an unresponsive supplicant re-transmits an EAP Request Identity frame The bold lines show the new re-transmit interval, new quiet period, and new maximum re-transmissions. Dell(conf-if-range-Te-1/1/1/1)#dot1x tx-period 90 Dell(conf-if-range-Te-1/1/1/1)#dot1x max-eap-req 10 Dell(conf-if-range-Te-1/1/1/1)#dot1x quiet-period 120 Dell#show dot1x interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/1 802.
Tx Period: Quiet Period: ReAuth Max: Supplicant Timeout: Server Timeout: Re-Auth Interval: Max-EAP-Req: Auth Type: Auth PAE State: Backend State: Auth PAE State: Backend State: 90 seconds 120 seconds 2 30 seconds 30 seconds 3600 seconds 10 SINGLE_HOST Initialize Initialize Initialize Initialize Re-Authenticating a Port You can configure the authenticator for periodic re-authentication.
Auth PAE State: Backend State: Initialize Initialize Configuring Dynamic VLAN Assignment with Port Authentication Dell Networking OS supports dynamic VLAN assignment when using 802.1X. The basis for VLAN assignment is RADIUS attribute 81, Tunnel-Private-Group-ID.
4 Connect the supplicant to the port configured for 802.1X. 5 Verify that the port has been authorized and placed in the desired VLAN (refer to the illustration in Dynamic VLAN Assignment with Port Authentication). Guest and Authentication-Fail VLANs Typically, the authenticator (the Dell system) denies the supplicant access to the network until the supplicant is authenticated.
Configure a port to be placed in the VLAN after failing the authentication process as specified number of times using the dot1x authfail-vlan command from INTERFACE mode. Configure the maximum number of authentication attempts by the authenticator using the keyword max-attempts with this command.
dot1x supplicant-timeout seconds The range is from 1 to 300. • The default is 30. Terminate the authentication process due to an unresponsive authentication server. INTERFACE mode dot1x server-timeout seconds The range is from 1 to 300. The default is 30. Example of Viewing Configured Server Timeouts The example shows configuration information for a port for which the authenticator terminates the authentication process for an unresponsive supplicant or server after 15 seconds.
Figure 9. Single-Host Authentication Mode When multiple end users are connected to a single authenticator port, single-host mode authentication does not authenticate all end users, and all but one are denied access to the network. For these cases, the Dell Networking OS supports multi-host mode authentication. Figure 10. Multi-Host Authentication Mode 96 802.
When you configure multi-host mode authentication, the first client to respond to an identity request is authenticated and subsequent responses are still ignored. However, because the authenticator expects the possibility of multiple responses, no system log is generated. After the first supplicant is authenticated, all end users connected to the authorized port are allowed to access the network.
Dot1x Status: Port Control: Port Auth Status: Re-Authentication: Untagged VLAN id: Guest VLAN: Guest VLAN id: Auth-Fail VLAN: Auth-Fail VLAN id: Auth-Fail Max-Attempts: Critical VLAN: Critical VLAN id: Mac-Auth-Bypass: Mac-Auth-Bypass Only: Static-MAB: Static-MAB Profile: Tx Period: Quiet Period: ReAuth Max: Supplicant Timeout: Server Timeout: Re-Auth Interval: Max-EAP-Req: Host Mode: Auth PAE State: Backend State: Enable AUTO UNAUTHORIZED Disable None Disable NONE Disable NONE NONE Disable NONE Disable Di
Critical VLAN: Critical VLAN id: Mac-Auth-Bypass: Mac-Auth-Bypass Only: Static-MAB: Static-MAB Profile: Tx Period: Quiet Period: ReAuth Max: Supplicant Timeout: Server Timeout: Re-Auth Interval: Max-EAP-Req: Host Mode: Max-Supplicants: Disable NONE Disable Disable Disable NONE 30 seconds 60 seconds 2 30 seconds 30 seconds 3600 seconds 2 MULTI_AUTH 128 Port status and State info for Supplicant: 7a:d9:d9:7d:00:00 Port Auth Status: Untagged VLAN id: Auth PAE State: Backend State: AUTHORIZED 400 Authenticate
3 If MAB times out or MAC authentication fails, the port is placed into the guest VLAN. If both MAB and re-authentication are enabled, when the re-auth period finishes and whether the previous authentication was through MAB or 802.1X, 802.1X authentication is tried first. If 802.1X times out, MAB authentication is tried. The port remains authorized throughout the reauthentication process. Once a port is enabled/disabled through 802.
dot1x mac-auth-bypass 4 (Optional) Use MAB authentication only — do not use 802.1X authentication first. If MAB fails the port or the MAC address is blocked, the port is placed in the guest VLAN (if configured). 802.1x authentication is not even attempted. Re-authentication is performed using 802.1X timers. INTERFACE mode dot1x mac-auth mab-only Example of Verifying MAB Configuration on an 802.1X-enabled Interface Verify the MAB and 802.
corresponds to a priority value: the first octet maps to incoming priority 0, the second octet maps to incoming priority 1, etc. The value in each octet represents the corresponding new priority. To use dynamic CoS with 802.1X authentication, no configuration command is required. You must only configure the supplicant records on the RADIUS server, including VLAN assignment and CoS priority re-mapping table. VLAN and priority values are automatically applied to incoming packets.
6 Access Control Lists (ACLs) This chapter describes access control lists (ACLs), prefix lists, and route-maps. At their simplest, access control lists (ACLs), prefix lists, and route-maps permit or deny traffic based on MAC and/or IP addresses. This chapter describes implementing IP ACLs, IP prefix lists and route-maps. For MAC ACLS, refer to Layer 2.
Topics: • IP Access Control Lists (ACLs) • Important Points to Remember • IP Fragment Handling • Configure a Standard IP ACL • Configure an Extended IP ACL • Configure Layer 2 and Layer 3 ACLs • Assign an IP ACL to an Interface • Applying an IP ACL • Configure Ingress ACLs • Configure Egress ACLs • IP Prefix Lists • ACL Resequencing • Route Maps • Flow-Based Monitoring Support for ACLs IP Access Control Lists (ACLs) In Dell Networking switch/routers, you can create two different
• CAM Optimization User Configurable CAM Allocation Allocate space for IPV6 ACLs by using the cam-acl command in CONFIGURATION mode. The CAM space is allotted in filter processor (FP) blocks. The total space allocated must equal 9 FP blocks. (There are 12 FP blocks, but System Flow requires three blocks that cannot be reallocated.) Enter the ipv6acl allocation as a factor of 3 (3, 6, 9). All other profile allocations can use either even or odd numbered ranges.
NOTE: IP ACLs are supported over VLANs in Dell Networking OS version 6.2.1.1 and higher. Assigning ACLs to VLANs When you apply an ACL to a VLAN using single port-pipe, a copy of the ACL entries gets installed in the ACL CAM on the port-pipe. The entry looks for the incoming VLAN in the packet. When you apply an ACL on individual ports of a VLAN, separate copies of the ACL entries are installed for each port belonging to a port-pipe.
Important Points to Remember • • • For route-maps with more than one match clause: • Two or more match clauses within the same route-map sequence have the same match commands (though the values are different), matching a packet against these clauses is a logical OR operation. • Two or more match clauses within the same route-map sequence have different match commands, matching a packet against these clauses is a logical AND operation.
command, such as redistribute, traffic passes through all instances of that route map until a match is found. The following is an example with two instances of a route map. The following example shows matching instances of a route-map.
Dell(config-route-map)#match tag 2000 Dell(config-route-map)#match tag 3000 Example of the match Command to Match All Specified Values In the next example, there is a match only if a route has both of the specified characteristics. In this example, there a match only if the route has a tag value of 1000 and a metric value of 2000. Also, if there are different instances of the same route-map, then it’s sufficient if a permit match happens in any instance of that routemap.
CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode match ip address prefix-list-name • Match destination routes specified in a prefix list (IPv6). CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode match ipv6 address prefix-list-name • Match next-hop routes specified in a prefix list (IPv4). CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode match ip next-hop {access-list-name | prefix-list prefix-list-name} • Match next-hop routes specified in a prefix list (IPv6).
set automatic-tag • Specify an OSPF area or ISIS level for redistributed routes. CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode set level {backbone | level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2 | stub-area} • Specify a value for the BGP route’s LOCAL_PREF attribute. CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode set local-preference value • Specify a value for redistributed routes. CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode set metric {+ | - | metric-value} • Specify an OSPF or ISIS type for redistributed routes.
In the following example, the redistribute command calls the route map static ospf to redistribute only certain static routes into OSPF. According to the route map static ospf, only routes that have a next hop of Tengigabitethernet interface 1/1/1/1 and that have a metric of 255 are redistributed into the OSPF backbone area. NOTE: When re-distributing routes using route-maps, you must create the route-map defined in the redistribute command under the routing protocol.
IP Fragment Handling Dell Networking OS supports a configurable option to explicitly deny IP fragmented packets, particularly second and subsequent packets. It extends the existing ACL command syntax with the fragments keyword for all Layer 3 rules applicable to all Layer protocols (permit/ deny ip/tcp/udp/icmp). • Both standard and extended ACLs support IP fragments. • Second and subsequent fragments are allowed because a Layer 4 rule cannot be applied to these fragments.
Example of Permitting All Packets from a Specified Host In this first example, TCP packets from host 10.1.1.1 with TCP destination port equal to 24 are permitted. All others are denied. Dell(conf)#ip access-list extended ABC Dell(conf-ext-nacl)#permit tcp host 10.1.1.
Example of Viewing the Rules of a Specific ACL on an Interface The following is an example of viewing the rules of a specific ACL on an interface. Dell#show ip accounting access-list ToOspf interface gig 1/6 Standard IP access list ToOspf seq 5 deny any seq 10 deny 10.2.0.0 /16 seq 15 deny 10.3.0.0 /16 seq 20 deny 10.4.0.0 /16 seq 25 deny 10.5.0.0 /16 seq 30 deny 10.6.0.0 /16 seq 35 deny 10.7.0.0 /16 seq 40 deny 10.8.0.0 /16 seq 45 deny 10.9.0.0 /16 seq 50 deny 10.10.0.
To view all configured IP ACLs, use the show ip accounting access-list command in EXEC Privilege mode. The following examples shows how to view a standard ACL filter sequence for an interface. Dell#show ip accounting access example interface gig 4/12 Extended IP access list example seq 15 deny udp any any eq 111 seq 20 deny udp any any eq 2049 seq 25 deny udp any any eq 31337 seq 30 deny tcp any any range 12345 12346 seq 35 permit udp host 10.21.126.225 10.4.5.0 /28 monitor 300 seq 40 permit udp host 10.21.
seq sequence-number {deny | permit} tcp {source mask | any | host ip-address} [count [byte]] [order] [fragments] Configure Filters, UDP Packets To create a filter for UDP packets with a specified sequence number, use the following commands. 1 Create an extended IP ACL and assign it a unique name. CONFIGURATION mode ip access-list extended access-list-name 2 Configure an extended IP ACL filter for UDP packets.
which the sequence numbers were assigned by the software. The filters were assigned sequence numbers based on the order in which they were configured (for example, the first filter was given the lowest sequence number). The show config command in IP ACCESS LIST mode displays the two filters with the sequence numbers 5 and 10. Example of Viewing Filter Sequence for a Specified Extended ACL Dell(config-ext-nacl)#deny tcp host 123.55.34.0 any Dell(config-ext-nacl)#permit udp 154.44.123.34 0.0.255.255 host 34.
The same ACL may be applied to different interfaces and that changes its functionality. For example, you can take ACL “ABCD” and apply it using the in keyword and it becomes an ingress access list. If you apply the same ACL using the out keyword, it becomes an egress access list. If you apply the same ACL to the Loopback interface, it becomes a Loopback access list.
EXEC Privilege mode View the number of packets matching the ACL. Configure Ingress ACLs Ingress ACLs are applied to interfaces and to traffic entering the system. These system-wide ACLs eliminate the need to apply ACLs onto each interface and achieves the same results. By localizing target traffic, it is a simpler implementation. To create an ingress ACL, use the ip access-group command in EXEC Privilege mode.
Dell(conf-if-te-1/1/1/1)#show config ! TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/1 no ip address ip access-group abcd out no shutdown Dell(conf-if-te-1/1/1/1)#end Dell#configure terminal Dell(conf)#ip access-list extended abcd Dell(config-ext-nacl)#permit tcp any any Dell(config-ext-nacl)#deny icmp any any Dell(config-ext-nacl)#permit 1.1.1.
IP Prefix Lists IP prefix lists control routing policy. An IP prefix list is a series of sequential filters that contain a matching criterion (examine IP route prefix) and an action (permit or deny) to process routes. The filters are processed in sequence so that if a route prefix does not match the criterion in the first filter, the second filter (if configured) is applied. When the route prefix matches a filter, Dell Networking OS drops or forwards the packet based on the filter’s designated action.
CONFIGURATION mode ip prefix-list prefix-name 2 Create a prefix list with a sequence number and a deny or permit action. CONFIG-NPREFIXL mode seq sequence-number {deny | permit} ip-prefix [ge min-prefix-length] [le max-prefix-length] The optional parameters are: • ge min-prefix-length: the minimum prefix length to match (from 0 to 32). • le max-prefix-length: the maximum prefix length to match (from 0 to 32).
Example of Creating a Filter with Dell Networking OS-Assigned Sequence Numbers The example shows a prefix list in which the sequence numbers were assigned by the software. The filters were assigned sequence numbers based on the order in which they were configured (for example, the first filter was given the lowest sequence number). The show config command in PREFIX LIST mode displays two filters with the sequence numbers 5 and 10. Dell(conf-nprefixl)#permit 123.23.0.0 /16 Dell(conf-nprefixl)#deny 133.24.56.
Applying a Prefix List for Route Redistribution To pass traffic through a configured prefix list, use the prefix list in a route redistribution command. Apply the prefix list to all traffic redistributed into the routing process. The traffic is either forwarded or dropped, depending on the criteria and actions specified in the prefix list. To apply a filter to routes in RIP, use the following commands. • Enter RIP mode. CONFIGURATION mode router rip • Apply a configured prefix list to incoming routes.
Example of Viewing Configured Prefix Lists (ROUTER OSPF mode) To view the configuration, use the show config command in ROUTER OSPF mode, or the show running-config ospf command in EXEC mode. Dell(conf-router_ospf)#show config ! router ospf 34 network 10.2.1.1 255.255.255.255 area 0.0.0.1 distribute-list prefix awe in Dell(conf-router_ospf)# ACL Resequencing ACL resequencing allows you to re-number the rules and remarks in an access or prefix list.
Examples of Resequencing ACLs When Remarks and Rules Have the Same Number or Different Numbers Remarks and rules that originally have the same sequence number have the same sequence number after you apply the resequence command. The example shows the resequencing of an IPv4 access-list beginning with the number 2 and incrementing by 2. Dell(config-ext-nacl)# show config ! ip access-list extended test remark 4 XYZ remark 5 this remark corresponds to permit any host 1.1.1.1 seq 5 permit ip any host 1.1.1.
Implementation Information ACLs and prefix lists can only drop or forward the packet or traffic. Route maps process routes for route redistribution. For example, a route map can be called to filter only specific routes and to add a metric. Route maps also have an “implicit deny.” Unlike ACLs and prefix lists; however, where the packet or traffic is dropped, in route maps, if a route does not match any of the route map conditions, the route is not redistributed.
The ACL agent module saves monitoring details in its local database and also in the CAM region to monitor packets that match the specified criterion. The ACL agent maintains data on the source port, the destination port, and the endpoint to which the packet must be forwarded when a match occurs with the ACL entry. If you configure the flow-based enable command and do not apply an ACL on the source port or the monitored port, both flow-based monitoring and port mirroring do not function.
MONITOR SESSION mode flow-based enable 2 Define access-list rules that include the keyword monitor. Dell Networking OS only considers port monitoring traffic that matches rules with the keyword monitor. CONFIGURATION mode ip access-list For more information, see Access Control Lists (ACLs). 3 Apply the ACL to the monitored port.
7 Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD) BFD is a protocol that is used to rapidly detect communication failures between two adjacent systems. It is a simple and lightweight replacement for existing routing protocol link state detection mechanisms. It also provides a failure detection solution for links on which no routing protocol is used. BFD is a simple hello mechanism. Two neighboring systems running BFD establish a session using a three-way handshake.
BFD Packet Format Control packets are encapsulated in user datagram protocol (UDP) packets. The following illustration shows the complete encapsulation of a BFD control packet inside an IPv4 packet. Figure 11. BFD in IPv4 Packet Format Field Description Diagnostic Code The reason that the last session failed. State The current local session state. Refer to BFD Sessions. Flag A bit that indicates packet function.
Field Description Detection Multiplier The number of packets that must be missed in order to declare a session down. Length The entire length of the BFD packet. My Discriminator A random number generated by the local system to identify the session. Your Discriminator A random number generated by the remote system to identify the session. Discriminator values are necessary to identify the session to which a control packet belongs because there can be many sessions running on a single interface.
Demand mode If one system requests Demand mode, the other system stops sending periodic control packets; it only sends a response to status inquiries from the Demand mode initiator. Either system (but not both) can request Demand mode at any time. NOTE: Dell Networking OS supports Asynchronous mode only. A session can have four states: Administratively Down, Down, Init, and Up. State Description Administratively Down The local system does not participate in a particular session.
Figure 12.
Session State Changes The following illustration shows how the session state on a system changes based on the status notification it receives from the remote system. For example, if a session on a system is down and it receives a Down status notification from the remote system, the session state on the local system changes to Init. Figure 13.
• Configure BFD for OSPFv3 • Configure BFD for IS-IS • Configure BFD for BGP • Configure BFD for VRRP • Configuring Protocol Liveness • Configure BFD for Physical Ports Configuring BFD for physical ports is supported on the C-Series and E-Series platforms only. BFD on physical ports is useful when you do not enable the routing protocol. Without BFD, if the remote system fails, the local system does not remove the connected route until the first failed attempt to send a packet.
Establishing a Session on Physical Ports To establish a session, enable BFD at the interface level on both ends of the link, as shown in the following illustration. The configuration parameters do not need to match. Figure 14. Establishing a BFD Session on Physical Ports 1 Enter interface mode. CONFIGURATION mode interface 2 Assign an IP address to the interface if one is not already assigned.
Int: TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/4/1 State: Up Configured parameters: TX: 100ms, RX: 100ms, Multiplier: 3 Neighbor parameters: TX: 100ms, RX: 100ms, Multiplier: 3 Actual parameters: TX: 100ms, RX: 100ms, Multiplier: 3 Role: Active Delete session on Down: False Client Registered: CLI Uptime: 00:03:57 Statistics: Number of packets received from neighbor: 1775 Number of packets sent to neighbor: 1775 Number of state changes: 1 Number of messages from IFA about port state change: 0 Number of messages communicated b/
Disabling and Re-Enabling BFD BFD is enabled on all interfaces by default, though sessions are not created unless explicitly configured. If you disable BFD, all of the sessions on that interface are placed in an Administratively Down state ( the first message example), and the remote systems are notified of the session state change (the second message example). To disable and re-enable BFD on an interface, use the following commands. • Disable BFD on an interface.
Establishing Sessions for Static Routes Sessions are established for all neighbors that are the next hop of a static route. Figure 15. Establishing Sessions for Static Routes To establish a BFD session, use the following command. • Establish BFD sessions for all neighbors that are the next hop of a static route.
CONFIGURATION mode ip route bfd [prefix-list prefix-list-name] interval milliseconds min_rx milliseconds multiplier value role [active | passive] To view session parameters, use the show bfd neighbors detail command, as shown in the examples in Displaying BFD for BGP Information Disabling BFD for Static Routes If you disable BFD, all static route BFD sessions are torn down. A final Admin Down packet is sent to all neighbors on the remote systems, and those neighbors change to the Down state.
Establishing Sessions with OSPF Neighbors for the Default VRF BFD sessions can be established with all OSPF neighbors at once or sessions can be established with all neighbors out of a specific interface. Sessions are only established when the OSPF adjacency is in the Full state. Figure 16. Establishing Sessions with OSPF Neighbors To establish BFD with all OSPF neighbors or with OSPF neighbors on a single interface, use the following commands. • Enable BFD globally.
INTERFACE mode ip ospf bfd all-neighbors Example of Verifying Sessions with OSPF Neighbors To view the established sessions, use the show bfd neighbors command. The bold line shows the OSPF BFD sessions. R2(conf-router_ospf)#bfd all-neighbors R2(conf-router_ospf)#do show bfd neighbors * - Active session role Ad Dn - Admin Down C - CLI I - ISIS O - OSPF R - Static Route (RTM) LocalAddr * 2.2.2.2 * 2.2.3.1 RemoteAddr Interface State Rx-int Tx-int Mult Clients 2.2.2.1 Te 2/1/1 Up 100 100 3 O 2.2.3.
B C I O O3 R M V VT - BGP CLI ISIS OSPF OSPFv3 Static Route (RTM) MPLS VRRP Vxlan Tunnel LocalAddr * 5.1.1.1 RemoteAddr 5.1.1.2 Interface Po 30 State Rx-int Tx-int Mult Up 200 200 3 Clients O * 6.1.1.1 6.1.1.2 Vl 30 Up 200 200 3 O * 7.1.1.1 7.1.1.2 Te 1/1/1/1 Up 200 200 3 O The following example shows the show bfd vrf neighbors command output showing the nondefault VRF.
Number of messages communicated b/w Manager and Agent: 4 Session Discriminator: 7 Neighbor Discriminator: 2 Local Addr: 6.1.1.1 Local MAC Addr: 00:a0:c9:00:00:02 Remote Addr: 6.1.1.
TX: 300ms, RX: 250ms, Multiplier: 3 Role: Active Delete session on Down: False Client Registered: CLI Uptime: 00:02:04 Statistics: Number of packets received from neighbor: 376 Number of packets sent to neighbor: 314 Number of state changes: 2 Number of messages from IFA about port state change: 0 Number of messages communicated b/w Manager and Agent: 6 Dell# Changing OSPF Session Parameters Configure BFD sessions with default intervals and a default role.
1 Enable BFD globally. 2 Establish sessions with OSPFv3 neighbors. NOTE: BFD for OSPFv3 with ECMP is not supported. Related Configuration Tasks • Changing OSPFv3 Session Parameters • Disabling BFD for OSPFv3 Establishing Sessions with OSPFv3 Neighbors You can establish BFD sessions with all OSPFv3 neighbors at once or with all neighbors out of a specific interface. Sessions are only established when the OSPFv3 adjacency is in the Full state.
Disabling BFD for OSPFv3 If you disable BFD globally, all sessions are torn down and sessions on the remote system are placed in a Down state. If you disable BFD on an interface, sessions on the interface are torn down and sessions on the remote system are placed in a Down state. Disabling BFD does not trigger a change in BFD clients; a final Admin Down packet is sent before the session is terminated. To disable BFD sessions, use the following commands. • Disable BFD sessions with all OSPFv3 neighbors.
Establishing Sessions with IS-IS Neighbors BFD sessions can be established for all IS-IS neighbors at once or sessions can be established for all neighbors out of a specific interface. Figure 17. Establishing Sessions with IS-IS Neighbors To establish BFD with all IS-IS neighbors or with IS-IS neighbors on a single interface, use the following commands. • Establish sessions with all IS-IS neighbors. ROUTER-ISIS mode • bfd all-neighbors Establish sessions with IS-IS neighbors on a single interface.
Ad Dn - Admin Down C - CLI I - ISIS O - OSPF R - Static Route (RTM) LocalAddr * 2.2.2.2 RemoteAddr Interface State Rx-int Tx-int Mult Clients 2.2.2.1 Te 2/1/1 Up 100 100 3 I Changing IS-IS Session Parameters BFD sessions are configured with default intervals and a default role. The parameters that you can configure are: Desired TX Interval, Required Min RX Interval, Detection Multiplier, and system role. These parameters are configured for all IS-IS sessions or all IS-IS sessions out of an interface.
Prerequisites Before configuring BFD for BGP, you must first configure the following settings: 1 Configure BGP on the routers that you want to interconnect, as described in Border Gateway Protocol IPv4 (BGPv4). 2 Enable fast fall-over for BGP neighbors to reduce convergence time (the neighbor fall-over command), as described in BGP Fast Fall-Over. Establishing Sessions with BGP Neighbors Before configuring BFD for BGP, you must first configure BGP on the routers that you want to interconnect.
BFD notifies BGP of any failure conditions that it detects on the link. Recovery actions are initiated by BGP. BFD for BGP is supported only on directly-connected BGP neighbors and only in BGP IPv4 networks. Up to 128 simultaneous BFD sessions are supported As long as each BFD for BGP neighbor receives a BFD control packet within the configured BFD interval for failure detection, the BFD session remains up and BGP maintains its adjacencies.
The BGP link with the neighbor returns to normal operation and uses the BFD session parameters globally configured with the bfd allneighbors command or configured for the peer group to which the neighbor belongs. • Disable a BFD for BGP session with a specified neighbor. ROUTER BGP mode neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} bfd disable • Remove the disabled state of a BFD for BGP session with a specified neighbor.
EXEC Privilege mode show ip bgp neighbors [ip-address] Examples of Verifying BGP Information The following example shows verifying a BGP configuration. R2# show running-config bgp ! router bgp 2 neighbor 1.1.1.2 remote-as 1 neighbor 1.1.1.2 no shutdown neighbor 2.2.2.2 remote-as 1 neighbor 2.2.2.2 no shutdown neighbor 3.3.3.2 remote-as 1 neighbor 3.3.3.2 no shutdown bfd all-neighbors The following example shows viewing all BFD neighbors.
Session Discriminator: 10 Neighbor Discriminator: 11 Local Addr: 2.2.2.3 Local MAC Addr: 00:01:e8:66:da:34 Remote Addr: 2.2.2.
BGP table version is 0, main routing table version 0 BFD is enabled, Interval 100 Min_rx 100 Multiplier 3 Role Active 3 neighbor(s) using 24168 bytes of memory Neighbor AS MsgRcvd MsgSent TblVer InQ OutQ Up/Down State/Pfx 1.1.1.2 2.2.2.2 3.3.3.2 0 0 0 1 1 1 282 273 282 281 273 281 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (0) 0 00:38:12 04:32:26 00:38:12 The following example shows viewing BFD information for a specified neighbor.
R2# show ip bgp neighbors 2.2.2.4 BGP neighbor is 2.2.2.4, remote AS 1, external link Member of peer-group pg1 for session parameters BGP version 4, remote router ID 12.0.0.4 BGP state ESTABLISHED, in this state for 00:05:33 ... Neighbor is using BGP peer-group mode BFD configuration Peer active in peer-group outbound optimization ... Configure BFD for VRRP When using BFD with VRRP, the VRRP protocol registers with the BFD manager on the route processor module (RPM).
Establishing Sessions with All VRRP Neighbors BFD sessions can be established for all VRRP neighbors at once, or a session can be established with a particular neighbor. Figure 19. Establishing Sessions with All VRRP Neighbors To establish sessions with all VRRP neighbors, use the following command. • Establish sessions with all VRRP neighbors.
The bold line shows that VRRP BFD sessions are enabled. Dell(conf-if-te-1/1/1/1)#vrrp bfd all-neighbors Dell(conf-if-te-1/1/1/1)#do show bfd neighbor * - Active session role Ad Dn - Admin Down C - CLI I - ISIS O - OSPF R - Static Route (RTM) V - VRRP LocalAddr * 2.2.5.1 RemoteAddr Interface State Rx-int Tx-int Mult Clients 2.2.5.2 Te 1/1/1/1 Down 1000 1000 3 V To view session state information, use the show vrrp command. The bold line shows the VRRP BFD session.
To disable all VRRP sessions on an interface, sessions for a particular VRRP group, or for a particular VRRP session on an interface, use the following commands. • Disable all VRRP sessions on an interface. INTERFACE mode • no vrrp bfd all-neighbors Disable all VRRP sessions in a VRRP group. VRRP mode • bfd disable Disable a particular VRRP session on an interface.
00:54:38: %RPM0-P:RP2 %BFDMGR-1-BFD_STATE_CHANGE: Changed session state to Up for neighbor 2.2.2.2 on interface Te 4/24/1 (diag: 0) The following example shows hexadecimal output from the debug bfd packet command. RX packet dump: 20 c0 03 18 00 00 00 05 00 00 00 04 00 01 86 a0 00 01 86 a0 00 00 00 00 00:34:13 : Sent packet for session with neighbor 2.2.2.
8 Border Gateway Protocol IPv4 (BGPv4) This chapter provides a general description of BGPv4 as it is supported in the Dell Networking Operating System (OS). BGP protocol standards are listed in the Standards Compliance chapter. BGP is an external gateway protocol that transmits interdomain routing information within and between autonomous systems (AS). The primary function of the BGP is to exchange network reachability information with other BGP systems.
IBGP provides routers inside the AS with the knowledge to reach routers external to the AS. EBGP routers exchange information with other EBGP routers as well as IBGP routers to maintain connectivity and accessibility. Figure 20. Internal BGP BGP version 4 (BGPv4) supports classless interdomain routing and aggregate routes and AS paths. BGP is a path vector protocol — a computer network in which BGP maintains the path that updated information takes as it diffuses through the network.
Figure 21. BGP Routers in Full Mesh The number of BGP speakers each BGP peer must maintain increases exponentially. Network management quickly becomes impossible. Sessions and Peers When two routers communicate using the BGP protocol, a BGP session is started. The two end-points of that session are Peers. A Peer is also called a Neighbor. Establish a Session Information exchange between peers is driven by events and timers. The focus in BGP is on the traffic routing policies.
State Description Idle BGP initializes all resources, refuses all inbound BGP connection attempts, and initiates a TCP connection to the peer. Connect In this state the router waits for the TCP connection to complete, transitioning to the OpenSent state if successful. If that transition is not successful, BGP resets the ConnectRetry timer and transitions to the Active state when the timer expires. Active The router resets the ConnectRetry timer to zero and returns to the Connect state.
Figure 22. BGP Router Rules 1 Router B receives an advertisement from Router A through eBGP. Because the route is learned through eBGP, Router B advertises it to all its iBGP peers: Routers C and D. 2 Router C receives the advertisement but does not advertise it to any peer because its only other peer is Router D, an iBGP peer, and Router D has already learned it through iBGP from Router B.
In non-deterministic mode (the bgp non-deterministic-med command is applied), paths are compared in the order in which they arrive. This method can lead to Dell Networking OS choosing different best paths from a set of paths, depending on the order in which they were received from the neighbors because MED may or may not get compared between the adjacent paths.
7 Prefer external (EBGP) to internal (IBGP) paths or confederation EBGP paths. 8 Prefer the path with the lowest IGP metric to the BGP if next-hop is selected when synchronization is disabled and only an internal path remains. 9 Dell Networking OS deems the paths as equal and does not perform steps 9 through 11, if the following criteria is met: 10 a the IBGP multipath or EBGP multipath are configured (the maximum-path command).
Figure 24. BGP Local Preference Multi-Exit Discriminators (MEDs) If two ASs connect in more than one place, a multi-exit discriminator (MED) can be used to assign a preference to a preferred path. MED is one of the criteria used to determine the best path, so keep in mind that other criteria may impact selection, as shown in the illustration in Best Path Selection Criteria. One AS assigns the MED a value and the other AS uses that value to decide the preferred path.
Figure 25. Multi-Exit Discriminators NOTE: Configuring the set metric-type internal command in a route-map advertises the IGP cost as MED to outbound EBGP peers when redistributing routes. The configured set metric value overwrites the default IGP cost. If the outbound route-map uses MED, it overwrites IGP MED. Origin The origin indicates the origin of the prefix, or how the prefix came into BGP. There are three origin codes: IGP, EGP, INCOMPLETE.
AS Path The AS path is the list of all ASs that all the prefixes listed in the update have passed through. The local AS number is added by the BGP speaker when advertising to a eBGP neighbor. NOTE: Any update that contains the AS path number 0 is valid. The AS path is shown in the following example. The origin attribute is shown following the AS path information (shown in bold).
NOTE: It is possible to configure BGP peers that exchange both unicast and multicast network layer reachability information (NLRI), but you cannot connect multiprotocol BGP with BGP. Therefore, you cannot redistribute multiprotocol BGP routes into BGP. Implement BGP with Dell Networking OS The following sections describe how to implement BGP on Dell Networking OS.
Ignore Router-ID in Best-Path Calculation You can avoid unnecessary BGP best-path transitions between external paths under certain conditions. The bgp bestpath routerid ignore command reduces network disruption caused by routing and forwarding plane changes and allows for faster convergence. Four-Byte AS Numbers You can use the 4-Byte (32-bit) format when configuring autonomous system numbers (ASNs). The 4-Byte support is advertised as a new BGP capability (4-BYTE-AS) in the OPEN message.
ASDOT representation combines the ASPLAIN and ASDOT+ representations. AS numbers less than 65536 appear in integer format (asplain); AS numbers equal to or greater than 65536 appear in the decimal format (asdot+). For example, the AS number 65526 appears as 65526 and the AS number 65546 appears as 1.10. Dynamic AS Number Notation Application Dell Networking OS applies the ASN notation type change dynamically to the running-config statements.
Dell(conf-router_bgp)#sho conf ! router bgp 100 neighbor 172.30.1.250 local-as 65057 Dell(conf-router_bgp)#do show ip bgp BGP table version is 28093, local router ID is 172.30.1.57 AS Number Migration With this feature you can transparently change the AS number of an entire BGP network and ensure that the routes are propagated throughout the network while the migration is in progress.
3 Prepend "65001 65002" to as-path. Local-AS is prepended before the route-map to give an impression that update passed through a router in AS 200 before it reached Router B. BGP4 Management Information Base (MIB) The FORCE10-BGP4-V2-MIB enhances support for BGP management information base (MIB) with many new simple network management protocol (SNMP) objects and notifications (traps) defined in draft-ietf-idr-bgp4-mibv2-05. To see these enhancements, download the MIB from the Dell website.
• Multiple BPG process instances are not supported. Thus, the f10BgpM2PeerInstance field in various tables is not used to locate a peer. • Multiple instances of the same NLRI in the BGP RIB are not supported and are set to zero in the SNMP query response. • The f10BgpM2NlriIndex and f10BgpM2AdjRibsOutIndex fields are not used. • Carrying MPLS labels in BGP is not supported. The f10BgpM2NlriOpaqueType and f10BgpM2NlriOpaquePointer fields are set to zero. • 4-byte ASN is supported.
Item Default suppress = 2000 max-suppress-time = 60 minutes external distance = 20 Distance internal distance = 200 local distance = 200 keepalive = 60 seconds Timers holdtime = 180 seconds Add-path Disabled Enabling BGP By default, BGP is not enabled on the system. Dell Networking OS supports one autonomous system (AS) and assigns the AS number (ASN). To establish BGP sessions and route traffic, configure at least one BGP neighbor or peer.
Disable 4-Byte support and return to the default 2-Byte format by using the no bgp four-octet-as-support command. You cannot disable 4-Byte support if you currently have a 4-Byte ASN configured. b Disabling 4-Byte AS numbers also disables ASDOT and ASDOT+ number representation. All AS numbers are displayed in ASPLAIN format. Enable IPv4 multicast or IPv6 mode. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode address-family [ipv4 | ipv6} vrf Use this command to enter BGP for IPv6 mode (CONF-ROUTER_BGPv6_AF).
The following example shows the show ip bgp summary command output (4–byte AS number displays). R2#show ip bgp summary BGP router identifier 192.168.10.2, local AS number 48735.
BGP state IDLE, in this state for 17:12:40 Last read 17:12:40, hold time is 180, keepalive interval is 60 seconds Received 0 messages, 0 notifications, 0 in queue Sent 0 messages, 0 notifications, 0 in queue Received 0 updates, Sent 0 updates Minimum time between advertisement runs is 5 seconds For address family: IPv4 Unicast BGP table version 0, neighbor version 0 0 accepted prefixes consume 0 bytes Prefix advertised 0, rejected 0, withdrawn 0 Connections established 0; dropped 0 Last reset never No activ
To configure AS4 number representations, use the following commands. • Enable ASPLAIN AS Number representation. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp asnotation asplain • NOTE: ASPLAIN is the default method Dell Networking OS uses and does not appear in the configuration display. Enable ASDOT AS Number representation. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp asnotation asdot • Enable ASDOT+ AS Number representation.
Configuring Peer Groups To configure multiple BGP neighbors at one time, create and populate a BGP peer group. An advantage of peer groups is that members of a peer group inherit the configuration properties of the group and share same update policy. A maximum of 256 peer groups are allowed on the system. Create a peer group by assigning it a name, then adding members to the peer group. After you create a peer group, you can configure route policies for it.
When you add a peer to a peer group, it inherits all the peer group’s configured parameters.
BGP version 4 Minimum time between advertisement runs is 5 seconds For address family: IPv4 Unicast BGP neighbor is zanzibar, peer-group internal, Number of peers in this group 26 Peer-group members (* - outbound optimized): 10.68.160.1 10.68.161.1 10.68.162.1 10.68.163.1 10.68.164.1 10.68.165.1 10.68.166.1 10.68.167.1 10.68.168.1 10.68.169.1 10.68.170.1 10.68.171.1 10.68.172.1 10.68.173.1 10.68.174.1 10.68.175.1 10.68.176.1 10.68.177.1 10.68.178.1 10.68.179.1 10.68.180.1 10.68.181.1 10.68.182.1 10.68.183.
BGP neighbor is 100.100.100.100, remote AS 65517, internal link Member of peer-group test for session parameters BGP version 4, remote router ID 30.30.30.
neighbor 100.100.100.100 no shutdown Dell# Configuring Passive Peering When you enable a peer-group, the software sends an OPEN message to initiate a TCP connection. If you enable passive peering for the peer group, the software does not send an OPEN message, but it responds to an OPEN message. When a BGP neighbor connection with authentication configured is rejected by a passive peer-group, Dell Networking OS does not allow another passive peer-group on the same subnet to connect with the BGP neighbor.
• No Prepend: specifies that local AS values are not prepended to announcements from the neighbor. Format: IP Address: A.B.C.D. You must Configure Peer Groups before assigning it to an AS. This feature is not supported on passive peer groups. Example of the Verifying that Local AS Numbering is Disabled The first line in bold shows the actual AS number. The second two lines in bold show the local AS number (6500) maintained during migration.
router bgp 65123 bgp router-id 192.168.10.2 network 10.10.21.0/24 network 10.10.32.0/24 network 100.10.92.0/24 network 192.168.10.0/24 bgp four-octet-as-support neighbor 10.10.21.1 remote-as 65123 neighbor 10.10.21.1 filter-list Laura in neighbor 10.10.21.1 no shutdown neighbor 10.10.32.3 remote-as 65123 neighbor 10.10.32.3 no shutdown neighbor 100.10.92.9 remote-as 65192 neighbor 100.10.92.9 local-as 6500 neighbor 100.10.92.9 no shutdown neighbor 192.168.10.1 remote-as 65123 neighbor 192.168.10.
• The default is 120 seconds. Set maximum time to retain the restarting peer’s stale paths. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp graceful-restart [stale-path-time time-in-seconds] • The default is 360 seconds. Local router supports graceful restart as a receiver only. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp graceful-restart [role receiver-only] Enabling Neighbor Graceful Restart BGP graceful restart is active only when the neighbor becomes established. Otherwise, it is disabled.
To configure an AS-PATH ACL to filter a specific AS_PATH value, use these commands in the following sequence. 1 Assign a name to a AS-PATH ACL and enter AS-PATH ACL mode. CONFIGURATION mode ip as-path access-list as-path-name 2 Enter the parameter to match BGP AS-PATH for filtering. CONFIG-AS-PATH mode {deny | permit} filter parameter This is the filter that is used to match the AS-path. The entries can be any format, letters, numbers, or regular expressions.
Regular Expressions as Filters Regular expressions are used to filter AS paths or community lists. A regular expression is a special character used to define a pattern that is then compared with an input string. For an AS-path access list, as shown in the previous commands, if the AS path matches the regular expression in the access list, the route matches the access list. The following lists the regular expressions accepted in Dell Networking OS.
Dell(config-as-path)#deny 32$ Dell(config-as-path)#ex Dell(conf)#router bgp 99 Dell(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor AAA filter-list Eagle in Dell(conf-router_bgp)#show conf ! router bgp 99 neighbor AAA peer-group neighbor AAA filter-list Eaglein neighbor AAA no shutdown neighbor 10.155.15.2 remote-as 32 neighbor 10.155.15.2 filter-list 1 in neighbor 10.155.15.
Enabling Additional Paths The add-path feature is disabled by default. NOTE: Dell Networking OS recommends not using multipath and add path simultaneously in a route reflector. To allow multiple paths sent to peers, use the following commands. 1 Allow the advertisement of multiple paths for the same address prefix without the new paths replacing any previous ones. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp add-path [both|received|send] path-count count The range is from 2 to 64.
• • • • • local-AS: routes with the COMMUNITY attribute of NO_EXPORT_SUBCONFED. no-advertise: routes with the COMMUNITY attribute of NO_ADVERTISE. no-export: routes with the COMMUNITY attribute of NO_EXPORT. quote-regexp: then any number of regular expressions. The software applies all regular expressions in the list. regexp: then a regular expression.
deny deny deny deny deny deny deny deny deny deny deny deny deny deny deny deny deny deny Dell# 701:20 702:20 703:20 704:20 705:20 14551:20 701:112 702:112 703:112 704:112 705:112 14551:112 701:667 702:667 703:667 704:666 705:666 14551:666 Filtering Routes with Community Lists To use an IP community list or IP extended community list to filter routes, you must apply a match community filter to a route map and then apply that route map to a BGP neighbor or peer group.
Manipulating the COMMUNITY Attribute In addition to permitting or denying routes based on the values of the COMMUNITY attributes, you can manipulate the COMMUNITY attribute value and send the COMMUNITY attribute with the route information. By default, Dell Networking OS does not send the COMMUNITY attribute. To send the COMMUNITY attribute to BGP neighbors, use the following command. • Enable the software to send the router’s COMMUNITY attribute to the BGP neighbor or peer group specified.
Example of the show ip bgp community Command To view the BGP configuration, use the show config command in CONFIGURATION ROUTER BGP mode. To view a route map configuration, use the show route-map command in EXEC Privilege mode. To view BGP routes matching a certain community number or a pre-defined BGP community, use the show ip bgp community command in EXEC Privilege mode. Dell>show ip bgp community BGP table version is 3762622, local router ID is 10.114.8.
• Change the LOCAL_PREF value. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp default local-preference value • value: the range is from 0 to 4294967295. The default is 100. To view the BGP configuration, use the show config command in CONFIGURATION ROUTER BGP mode or the show runningconfig bgp command in EXEC Privilege mode. A more flexible method for manipulating the LOCAL_PREF attribute value is to use a route map. 1 Enter the ROUTE-MAP mode and assign a name to a route map.
• If you do not use the all keyword, the next hop of only eBGP-learned routes is updated by the route reflector. If you use the all keyword, the next hop of both eBGP- and iBGP-learned routes are updated by the route reflector. Sets the next hop address. CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode set next-hop ip-address If the set next-hop command is applied on the out-bound interface using a route map, it takes precedence over the neighbor next-hop-self command.
NOTE: Dell Networking OS supports up to 255 characters in a set community statement inside a route map. NOTE: You can create inbound and outbound policies. Each of the commands used for filtering has in and out parameters that you must apply. In Dell Networking OS, the order of preference varies depending on whether the attributes are applied for inbound updates or outbound updates.
• If none of the routes match any of the filters in the prefix list, the route is denied. This action is called an implicit deny. (If you want to forward all routes that do not match the prefix list criteria, you must configure a prefix list filter to permit all routes. For example, you could have the following filter as the last filter in your prefix list permit 0.0.0.0/0 le 32). • After a route matches a filter, the filter’s action is applied. No additional filters are applied to the route.
ip as-path access-list as-path-name 2 Create a AS-PATH ACL filter with a deny or permit action. AS-PATH ACL mode {deny | permit} as-regular-expression 3 Return to CONFIGURATION mode. AS-PATH ACL exit 4 Enter ROUTER BGP mode. CONFIGURATION mode router bgp as-number 5 Filter routes based on the criteria in the configured route map.
To view a route reflector configuration, use the show config command in CONFIGURATION ROUTER BGP mode or the show running-config bgp in EXEC Privilege mode. Aggregating Routes Dell Networking OS provides multiple ways to aggregate routes in the BGP routing table. At least one specific route of the aggregate must be in the routing table for the configured aggregate to become active. To aggregate routes, use the following command.
To view the configuration, use the show config command in CONFIGURATION ROUTER BGP mode. Enabling Route Flap Dampening When EBGP routes become unavailable, they “flap” and the router issues both WITHDRAWN and UPDATE notices. A flap is when a route: • is withdrawn • is readvertised after being withdrawn • has an attribute change The constant router reaction to the WITHDRAWN and UPDATE notices causes instability in the BGP process.
• • reuse: the range is from 1 to 20000. This number is compared to the flapping route’s Penalty value. If the Penalty value is less than the reuse value, the flapping route is once again advertised (or no longer suppressed). The default is 750. • suppress: the range is from 1 to 20000. This number is compared to the flapping route’s Penalty value. If the Penalty value is greater than the suppress value, the flapping route is no longer advertised (that is, it is suppressed). The default is 2000.
BGP table version is 855562, main routing table version 780266 122836 network entrie(s) and 221664 paths using 29697640 bytes of memory 34298 BGP path attribute entrie(s) using 1920688 bytes of memory 29577 BGP AS-PATH entrie(s) using 1384403 bytes of memory 184 BGP community entrie(s) using 7616 bytes of memory Dampening enabled. 0 history paths, 0 dampened paths, 0 penalized paths Neighbor AS MsgRcvd MsgSent TblVer 10.114.8.34 18508 82883 79977 780266 10.114.8.
To reset a BGP connection using BGP soft reconfiguration, use the clear ip bgp command in EXEC Privilege mode at the system prompt. When you enable soft-reconfiguration for a neighbor and you execute the clear ip bgp soft in command, the update database stored in the router is replayed and updates are reevaluated. With this command, the replay and update process is triggered only if a routerefresh request is not negotiated with the peer.
Match a Clause with a Continue Clause The continue feature can exist without a match clause. Without a match clause, the continue clause executes and jumps to the specified route-map entry. With a match clause and a continue clause, the match clause executes first and the continue clause next in a specified route map entry. The continue clause launches only after a successful match.
neighbor [ip-address | peer-group-name] activate BGP Regular Expression Optimization Dell Networking OS optimizes processing time when using regular expressions by caching and re-using regular expression evaluated results, at the expense of some memory in RP1 processor. BGP policies that contain regular expressions to match against as-paths and communities might take a lot of CPU processing time, thus affect BGP routing convergence.
To disable all BGP debugging, use the no debug ip bgp command. To disable all debugging, use the undebug all command. Storing Last and Bad PDUs Dell Networking OS stores the last notification sent/received and the last bad protocol data unit (PDU) received on a per peer basis. The last bad PDU is the one that causes a notification to be issued. In the following example, the last seven lines shown in bold are the last PDUs.
Capturing PDUs To capture incoming and outgoing PDUs on a per-peer basis, use the capture bgp-pdu neighbor direction command. To disable capturing, use the no capture bgp-pdu neighbor direction command. The buffer size supports a maximum value between 40 MB (the default) and 100 MB. The capture buffers are cyclic and reaching the limit prompts the system to overwrite the oldest PDUs when new ones are received for a given neighbor or direction.
BGP table version is 313511, main routing table version 313511 207896 network entrie(s) and 207896 paths using 42364576 bytes of memory 59913 BGP path attribute entrie(s) using 2875872 bytes of memory 59910 BGP AS-PATH entrie(s) using 2679698 bytes of memory 3 BGP community entrie(s) using 81 bytes of memory Neighbor AS 1.1.1.2 2 172.30.1.
Example of Enabling BGP (Router 1) R1# conf R1(conf)#int loop 0 R1(conf-if-lo-0)#ip address 192.168.128.1/24 R1(conf-if-lo-0)#no shutdown R1(conf-if-lo-0)#show config ! interface Loopback 0 ip address 192.168.128.1/24 no shutdown R1(conf-if-lo-0)#int te 1/1/2/1 R1(conf-if-te-1/1/2/1)#ip address 10.0.1.21/24 R1(conf-if-te-1/1/2/1)#no shutdown R1(conf-if-te-1/1/2/1)#show config ! interface TengigabitEthernet 1/1/2/1 ip address 10.0.1.
R1(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 192.168.128.3 no shut R1(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 192.168.128.3 update-source loop 0 R1(conf-router_bgp)#show config ! router bgp 99 network 192.168.128.0/24 neighbor 192.168.128.2 remote-as 99 neighbor 192.168.128.2 update-source Loopback 0 neighbor 192.168.128.2 no shutdown neighbor 192.168.128.3 remote-as 100 neighbor 192.168.128.
! interface TengigabitEthernet 1/1/4/1 ip address 10.0.3.33/24 no shutdown R3(conf-if-lo-0)#int te 3/21/1 R3(conf-if-te-3/21/1)#ip address 10.0.2.3/24 R3(conf-if-te-3/21/1)#no shutdown R3(conf-if-te-3/21/1)#show config ! interface TengigabitEthernet 3/21/1 ip address 10.0.2.3/24 no shutdown R3(conf-if-te-3/21/1)# R3(conf-if-te-3/21/1)#router bgp 100 R3(conf-router_bgp)#show config ! router bgp 100 R3(conf-router_bgp)#network 192.168.128.0/24 R3(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 192.168.128.
MULTIPROTO_EXT(1) ROUTE_REFRESH(2) CISCO_ROUTE_REFRESH(128) Update source set to Loopback 0 Peer active in peer-group outbound optimization For address family: IPv4 Unicast BGP table version 1, neighbor version 1 Prefixes accepted 1 (consume 4 bytes), withdrawn 0 by peer Prefixes advertised 1, denied 0, withdrawn 0 from peer Connections established 2; dropped 1 Last reset 00:00:57, due to user reset Notification History 'Connection Reset' Sent : 1 Recv: 0 Last notification (len 21) sent 00:00:57 ago fffffff
2 neighbor(s) using 9216 bytes of memory Neighbor AS MsgRcvd MsgSent TblVer InQ OutQ Up/Down State/Pfx 192.168.128.1 99 140 136 2 0 (0) 00:11:24 1 192.168.128.3 100 138 140 2 0 (0) 00:18:31 1 Example of Enabling Peer Groups (Router 3) R3#conf R3(conf)#router bgp 100 R3(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor AAA peer-group R3(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor AAA no shutdown R3(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor CCC peer-group R3(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor CCC no shutdown R3(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 192.168.128.
Last read 00:00:45, last write 00:00:44 Hold time is 180, keepalive interval is 60 seconds Received 138 messages, 0 in queue 7 opens, 2 notifications, 7 updates 122 keepalives, 0 route refresh requests Sent 140 messages, 0 in queue 220 Border Gateway Protocol IPv4 (BGPv4)
9 Content Addressable Memory (CAM) CAM is a type of memory that stores information in the form of a lookup table. On Dell Networking systems, CAM stores Layer 2 (L2) and Layer 3 (L3) forwarding information, access-lists (ACLs), flows, and routing policies. CAM Allocation CAM Allocation for Ingress To allocate the space for regions such has L2 ingress ACL, IPV4 ingress ACL, IPV6 ingress ACL, IPV4 QoS, L2 QoS, PBR, VRF ACL, and so forth, use the cam-acl command in CONFIGURATION mode.
The following additional CAM allocation settings are supported. Table 11. Additional Default CAM Allocation Settings Additional CAM Allocation Setting FCoE ACL (fcoeacl) 0 ISCSI Opt ACL (iscsioptacl) 0 You must enter l2acl, ipv4acl, l2qos, l2pt, ipv4qos, ipv4pbr, vrfv4acl, and fcoe allocations as a factor of 2, ipv6acl, openflow, and vman_qos allocations as a factor of 3. Ipv4 acl region should also be in multiples of 3 when ipv4udf option is enabled.
NOTE: If you do not enter the allocation values for the CAM regions, the value is 0. 3 Execute write memory and verify that the new settings are written to the CAM on the next boot. EXEC Privilege mode show cam-acl 4 Reload the system. EXEC Privilege mode reload Test CAM Usage To determine whether sufficient CAM space is available to enable a service-policy, use the test-cam-usage command.
FcoeAcl : ipv4pbr : vrfv4Acl : Openflow : fedgovacl : nlbclusteracl: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Dell# Example of Viewing CAM-ACL Settings NOTE: If you change the cam-acl setting from CONFIGURATION mode, the output of this command does not reflect any changes until you save the running-configuration and reload the chassis.
| | | | | | 1 | 0 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 1 | 0 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 1 | 0 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | Codes: * - cam usage Dell# | OUT-L3 ACL | OUT-V6 ACL | IN-L3 FIB 1 | IN-L2 ACL | IN-L3 ACL | IN-V6 ACL | IN-NLB ACL | IPMAC ACL | OUT-L2 ACL | OUT-L3 ACL | OUT-V6 ACL 2 | IN-L2 ACL | IN-L3 ACL | IN-V6 ACL | IN-NLB ACL | IPMAC ACL | OUT-L2 ACL | OUT-L3 ACL | OUT-V6 ACL 3 | IN-L2 ACL | IN-L3 ACL | IN-V6 ACL | IN-NLB ACL | IPMAC ACL | OUT-L2 ACL | OUT-L3 ACL | OUT-V6 ACL is above 90%.
A table-full error message is displayed once the number of entries is crossed the table size. Table-full message is generated only once when it crosses the threshold. For subsequent addition of entries, the table-full message is not recorded you clear the table-full message. The table-full message is cleared internally when the number of entries is less than the table size.
EXEC Privilege show hardware forwarding-table mode Dell#show hardware forwarding-table mode Mode L2 MAC Entries L3 Host Entries L3 Route Entries : : : : Current Settings Default 72K 72K 16K Next Boot Settings scaled-l3-hosts 8K 136K 16K Content Addressable Memory (CAM) 227
10 Control Plane Policing (CoPP) Control plane policing (CoPP) uses access control list (ACL) rules and quality of service (QoS) policies to create filters for a system’s control plane. That filter prevents traffic not specifically identified as legitimate from reaching the system control plane, rate-limits, traffic to an acceptable level.
Figure 29. CoPP Implemented Versus CoPP Not Implemented Configure Control Plane Policing The system can process a maximum of 8500 packets per second (PPS). Protocols that share a single queue may experience flaps if one of the protocols receives a high rate of control traffic even though per protocol CoPP is applied. This happens because queue-based rate limiting is applied first.
CoPP policies are configured by creating extended ACL rules and specifying rate-limits through QoS policies. The ACLs and QoS policies are assigned as service-policies. Configuring CoPP for Protocols This section lists the commands necessary to create and enable the service-policies for CoPP. For complete information about creating ACLs and QoS rules, refer to Access Control Lists (ACLs) and Quality of Service (QoS).
8 Assign the protocol based the service policy on the control plane. Enabling this command on a port-pipe automatically enables the ACL and QoS rules creates with the cpu-qos keyword. CONTROL-PLANE mode service-policy rate-limit-protocols Examples of Configuring CoPP for Different Protocols The following example shows creating the IP/IPv6/MAC extended ACL.
Dell(conf-policy-map-in-cpuqos)#class-map class-ipv6 qos-policy rate_limit_200k Dell(conf-policy-map-in-cpuqos)#exit The following example shows creating the control plane service policy. Dell(conf)#control-plane-cpuqos Dell(conf-control-cpuqos)#service-policy rate-limit-protocols egressFP_rate_policy Dell(conf-control-cpuqos)#exit Configuring CoPP for CPU Queues Controlling traffic on the CPU queues does not require ACL rules, but does require QoS policies.
The following example shows creating the control plane service policy. Dell#conf Dell(conf)#control-plane Dell(conf-control-plane)#service-policy rate-limit-cpu-queues cpuq_rate_policy Displaying CoPP Configuration The CLI provides show commands to display the protocol traffic assigned to each control-plane queue and the current rate-limit applied to each queue. Other show commands display statistical information for trouble shooting CoPP operation.
LACP LLDP GVRP STP ISIS 01:80:c2:00:00:02 any 01:80:c2:00:00:21 01:80:c2:00:00:00 01:80:c2:00:00:14/15 09:00:2b:00:00:04/05 0x8809 0x88cc any any any any Q7 Q8 Q8 Q7 Q9 Q9 CP CP CP CP CP CP _ _ _ _ _ To view the queue mapping for IPv6 protocols, use the show ipv6 protocol-queue-mapping command.
11 Data Center Bridging (DCB) Data center bridging (DCB) refers to a set of enhancements to Ethernet local area networks used in data center environments, particularly with clustering and storage area networks.
DCB-enabled network is required in a data center. The Dell Networking switches that support a unified fabric and consolidate multiple network infrastructures use a single input/output (I/O) device called a converged network adapter (CNA). A CNA is a computer input/output device that combines the functionality of a host bus adapter (HBA) with a network interface controller (NIC). Multiple adapters on different devices for several traffic types are no longer required.
Figure 30. Illustration of Traffic Congestion The system supports loading two DCB_Config files: • FCoE converged traffic with priority 3. • iSCSI storage traffic with priority 4. In the Dell Networking OS, PFC is implemented as follows: • PFC is supported on specified 802.1p priority traffic (dot1p 0 to 7) and is configured per interface.
Figure 31. Enhanced Transmission Selection The following table lists the traffic groupings ETS uses to select multiprotocol traffic for transmission. Table 13. ETS Traffic Groupings Traffic Groupings Description Group ID A 4-bit identifier assigned to each priority group. The range is from 0 to 7 configurable; 8 - 14 reservation and 15.0 - 15.7 is strict priority group.. Group bandwidth Percentage of available bandwidth allocated to a priority group.
ETS parameters ETS Configuration TLV and ETS Recommendation TLV. Data Center Bridging in a Traffic Flow The following figure shows how DCB handles a traffic flow on an interface. Figure 32. DCB PFC and ETS Traffic Handling Enabling Data Center Bridging DCB is automatically configured when you configure FCoE or iSCSI optimization. Data center bridging supports converged enhanced Ethernet (CEE) in a data center network. DCB is disabled by default. It must be enabled to support CEE.
DCB Maps and its Attributes This topic contains the following sections that describe how to configure a DCB map, apply the configured DCB map to a port, configure PFC without a DCB map, and configure lossless queues. DCB Map: Configuration Procedure A DCB map consists of PFC and ETS parameters. By default, PFC is not enabled on any 802.1p priority and ETS allocates equal bandwidth to each priority. To configure user-defined PFC and ETS settings, you must create a DCB map.
The default dot1p priority-queue assignments are applied as follows: Dell(conf)#do show qos dot1p-queue-mapping Dot1p Priority : 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Queue : 1 0 2 3 4 5 6 7 PFC is not applied on specific dot1p priorities. ETS: Equal bandwidth is assigned to each port queue and each dot1p priority in a priority group. To configure PFC and ETS parameters on an interface, you must specify the PFC mode, the ETS bandwidth allocation for a priority group, and the 802.
NOTE: You cannot enable PFC and link-level flow control at the same time on an interface. Configuring Lossless Queues DCB also supports the manual configuration of lossless queues on an interface when PFC mode is turned off. Prerequisite: A DCB with PFC configuration is applied to the interface with the following conditions: • • PFC mode is off (no pfc mode on). No PFC priority classes are configured (no pfc priority priority-range).
show hardware pfc-nodrop-priority l2-dlf drops stack-unit stack-unit-number port-set portpipe Dell#show hardware pfc-nodrop-priority l2-dlf drops stack-unit 0 port-set 0 --------------------------------------------------Priority DropCount --------------------------------------------------0 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 To clear the drop statistics, use the clear hardware pfc-nodrop-priority l2-dlf drops stack-unit stackunit-number port-set port-pipe command.
• To disable PFC operation on an interface, use the no pfc mode on command in DCB-Map configuration mode. • Traffic may be interrupted when you reconfigure PFC no-drop priorities in a DCB map or re-apply the DCB map to an interface. • For PFC to be applied, the configured priority traffic must be supported by a PFC peer (as detected by DCBx). • If you apply a DCB map with PFC disabled (pfc off), you can enable link-level flow control on the interface using the flowcontrol rx on tx on command.
Step Task Command Command Mode Dell# interface tengigabitEthernet 1/1/1 Dell(config-if-te-1/1/1)# dcb-map SAN_A_dcb_map1 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to apply a DCB map to more than one port. You cannot apply a DCB map on an interface that has been already configured for PFC using thepfc priority command or which is already configured for lossless queues (pfc no-drop queues command).
When a device sends a pause frame to another device, the time for which the sending of packets from the other device must be stopped is contained in the pause frame. The device that sent the pause frame empties the buffer to be less than the threshold value and restarts the acceptance of data packets. Dynamic ingress buffering enables the sending of pause frames at different thresholds based on the number of ports that experience congestion at a time.
The internal Priority assigned for the packet by Ingress FP is used by the memory management unit (MMU) to assign the packet to right queue by indexing the internal-priority to queue map table (TABLE 1) in hardware. PRIO2COS setting for honoring the PFC protocol packets from the Peer switches is as per above Packet-Dot1p->queue table (Table 2). The packets come in with packet-dot1p 2 alone are assign to PG6 on ingress.
Dell Networking OS Releases 9.3(0.0) and earlier provide CLI support to specify the priorities for which PFC is enabled on each port. This feature is applicable only for the tagged packets based on the incoming packet Dot1p and Dot1p based queue classification. This document will discuss the configurations required to support PFC for untagged packets based on incoming packet DSCP. For the tagged packets, Queue is selected based on the incoming Packet Dot1p.
b Apply PFC Priority configuration. Configure priorities on which PFC is enabled.
The range is from 0 to 7. The default is none. Separate priority values with a comma. Specify a priority range with a dash. For example, priority-list 3,5-7. 4 Exit priority-group configuration mode. PRIORITY-GROUP mode exit 5 Repeat Steps 1 to 4 to configure all remaining dot1p priorities in an ETS priority group. 6 Specify the dot1p priority-to-priority group mapping for each priority. priority-pgid dot1p0_group_num dot1p1_group_num ...dot1p7_group_num Priority group range is from 0 to 7.
Configuring ETS in a DCB Map A switch supports the use of a DCB map in which you configure enhanced transmission selection (ETS) setting. To configure ETS parameters, you must apply a DCB map on an interface. ETS Configuration Notes ETS provides a way to optimize bandwidth allocation to outbound 802.1p classes of converged Ethernet traffic. Different traffic types have different service needs. Using ETS, you can create groups within an 802.
you can apply a QoS output policy with WRED and/or rate shaping on a DCBx CIN-enabled interface. In this case, the WRED or rate shaping configuration in the QoS output policy must take into account the bandwidth allocation or queue scheduler configured in the DCB map. Priority-Group Configuration Notes When you configure priority groups in a DCB map: • A priority group consists of 802.
Applying DCB Policies in a Switch Stack You can apply DCB policies with PFC and ETS configurations to all stacked ports in a switch stack or on a stacked switch. To apply DCB policies in a switch stack, follow this step. • Apply the specified DCB policy on all ports of the switch stack or a single stacked switch.
with the new parameter values. When an auto-upstream port (besides the configuration source) receives and overwrites its configuration with internally propagated information, one of the following actions is taken: Auto-downstream • If the peer configuration received is compatible with the internally propagated port configuration, the link with the DCBx peer is enabled.
NOTE: On a DCBx port, application priority TLV advertisements are handled as follows: • The application priority TLV is transmitted only if the priorities in the advertisement match the configured PFC priorities on the port. • On auto-upstream and auto-downstream ports: • • If a configuration source is elected, the ports send an application priority TLV based on the application priority TLV received on the configuration-source port.
Propagation of DCB Information When an auto-upstream or auto-downstream port receives a DCB configuration from a peer, the port acts as a DCBx client and checks if a DCBx configuration source exists on the switch. • If a configuration source is found, the received configuration is checked against the currently configured values that are internally propagated by the configuration source.
Figure 33. DCBx Sample Topology DCBx Prerequisites and Restrictions The following prerequisites and restrictions apply when you configure DCBx operation on a port: • For DCBx, on a port interface, enable LLDP in both Send (TX) and Receive (RX) mode (the protocol lldp mode command; refer to the example in in the chapter). If multiple DCBx peer ports are detected on a local DCBx interface, LLDP is shut down.
[no] DCBx version {auto | cee | cin | ieee-v2.5} • cee: configures the port to use CEE (Intel 1.01). • cin: configures the port to use Cisco-Intel-Nuova (DCBx 1.0). • ieee-v2.5: configures the port to use IEEE 802.1Qaz (Draft 2.5). The default is Auto. 4 Configure the DCBx port role the interface uses to exchange DCB information. PROTOCOL LLDP mode [no] DCBx port-role {config-source | auto-downstream | auto-upstream | manual} • auto-upstream: configures the port to receive a peer configuration.
Configuring DCBx Globally on the Switch To globally configure the DCBx operation on a switch, follow these steps. 1 Enter Global Configuration mode. EXEC PRIVILEGE mode configure 2 Enter LLDP Configuration mode to enable DCBx operation. CONFIGURATION mode [no] protocol lldp 3 Configure the DCBx version used on all interfaces not already configured to exchange DCB information. PROTOCOL LLDP mode [no] DCBx version {auto | cee | cin | ieee-v2.
6 Configure the FCoE priority advertised for the FCoE protocol in Application Priority TLVs. PROTOCOL LLDP mode [no] fcoe priority-bits priority-bitmap The priority-bitmap range is from 1 to FF. The default is 0x8. 7 Configure the iSCSI priority advertised for the iSCSI protocol in Application Priority TLVs. PROTOCOL LLDP mode [no] iscsi priority-bits priority-bitmap The priority-bitmap range is from 1 to FF. The default is 0x10.
Verifying the DCB Configuration To display DCB configurations, use the following show commands. Table 18. Displaying DCB Configurations Command Output show qos dot1p-queue mapping Displays the current 802.1p priority-queue mapping. Displays the data center bridging status, number of PFC-enabled ports, and number of PFC-enabled queues. show interface port-type pfc {summary | detail} Displays the PFC configuration applied to ingress traffic on an interface, including priorities and link delay.
Admin mode is on Admin is enabled Remote is enabled, Priority list is 4 Remote Willing Status is enabled Local is enabled Oper status is Recommended PFC DCBx Oper status is Up State Machine Type is Feature TLV Tx Status is enabled PFC Link Delay 45556 pause quantams Application Priority TLV Parameters : -------------------------------------FCOE TLV Tx Status is disabled Local FCOE PriorityMap is 0x8 Remote FCOE PriorityMap is 0x8 Dell# show interfaces tengigabitethernet 1/1/1/4 pfc detail Interface TenGigab
Fields Description • • Recommend: Remote PFC configuration parameters were received from peer. Internally propagated: PFC configuration parameters were received from configuration source. PFC DCBx Oper status Operational status for exchange of PFC configuration on local port: match (up) or mismatch (down).
The following example shows the show interface ets summary command.
6 7 Priority# Bandwidth TSA 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Remote Parameters: ------------------Remote is disabled Local Parameters : -----------------Local is enabled TC-grp Priority# 0 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0% 0% ETS ETS 13% 13% 13% 13% 12% 12% 12% 12% ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS Bandwidth 100% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% TSA ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS Priority# Bandwidth 0 13% 1 13% 2 13% 3 13% 4 12% 5 12% 6 12% 7 12% Oper status is init Conf TLV Tx Status is disabled Traffic Class TLV Tx Status is dis
Field Description Local Parameters ETS configuration on local port, including Admin mode (enabled when a valid TLV is received from a peer), priority groups, assigned dot1p priorities, and bandwidth allocation. Operational status (local port) Port state for current operational ETS configuration: • • • Init: Local ETS configuration parameters were exchanged with peer. Recommend: Remote ETS configuration parameters were received from peer.
----------------------------------------------------------------------Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/4/1 Remote Mac Address 00:01:e8:8a:df:a0 Port Role is Auto-Upstream DCBx Operational Status is Enabled Is Configuration Source? FALSE Local DCBx Compatibility mode is CEE Local DCBx Configured mode is CEE Peer Operating version is CEE Local DCBx TLVs Transmitted: ErPFi Local DCBx Status ----------------DCBx Operational Version is 0 DCBx Max Version Supported is 0 Sequence Number: 1 Acknowledgment Number: 1
Field Description Local DCBx Status: Sequence Number Sequence number transmitted in Control TLVs. Local DCBx Status: Acknowledgment Number Acknowledgement number transmitted in Control TLVs. Local DCBx Status: Protocol State Current operational state of DCBx protocol: ACK or IN-SYNC. Peer DCBx Status: DCBx Operational Version DCBx version advertised in Control TLVs received from peer device.
dcb enable 2 Configure the shared PFC buffer size and the total buffer size. A maximum of 4 lossless queues are supported. CONFIGURATION mode dcb pfc-shared-buffer-size value dcb pfc-total-buffer-size value The buffer size range is from 0 to 3399. Default is 3088. 3 Configure the number of PFC queues. CONFIGURATION mode dcb enable pfc-queues pfc-queues The number of ports supported based on lossless queues configured depends on the buffer. The default number of PFC queues in the system is one.
Figure 34. PFC and ETS Applied to LAN, IPC, and SAN Priority Traffic QoS Traffic Classification: The service-class dynamic dot1p command has been used in Global Configuration mode to map ingress dot1p frames to the queues shown in the following table. For more information, refer to QoS dot1p Traffic Classification and Queue Assignment.
dot1p Value in the Incoming Frame Priority Group Assignment 5 LAN 6 LAN 7 LAN The following describes the priority group-bandwidth assignment. Priority Group Bandwidth Assignment IPC 5% SAN 50% LAN 45% PFC and ETS Configuration Command Examples The following examples show PFC and ETS configuration commands to manage your data center traffic.
12 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) DHCP is an application layer protocol that dynamically assigns IP addresses and other configuration parameters to network end-stations (hosts) based on configuration policies determined by network administrators.
The following table lists common DHCP options. Option Number and Description Subnet Mask Option 1 Specifies the client’s subnet mask. Router Option 3 Specifies the router IP addresses that may serve as the client’s default gateway. Domain Name Server Option 6 Domain Name Option 15 Specifies the domain name servers (DNSs) that are available to the client. Specifies the domain name that clients should use when resolving hostnames via DNS.
Option Number and Description User Port Stacking Option 230 Set the stacking option variable to provide DHCP server stack-port detail when the DHCP offer is set. End Option 255 Signals the last option in the DHCP packet. Assign an IP Address using DHCP The following section describes DHCP and the client in a network. When a client joins a network: 1 The client initially broadcasts a DHCPDISCOVER message on the subnet to discover available DHCP servers.
Implementation Information The following describes DHCP implementation. • Dell Networking implements DHCP based on RFC 2131 and RFC 3046. • IP source address validation is a sub-feature of DHCP Snooping; the Dell Networking OS uses access control lists (ACLs) internally to implement this feature and as such, you cannot apply ACLs to an interface which has IP source address validation.
Configuring the Server for Automatic Address Allocation Automatic address allocation is an address assignment method by which the DHCP server leases an IP address to a client from a pool of available addresses. An address pool is a range of IP addresses that the DHCP server may assign. The subnet number indexes the address pools. To create an address pool, follow these steps. 1 Access the DHCP server CLI context. CONFIGURATION mode ip dhcp server 2 Create an address pool and give it a name.
Excluding Addresses from the Address Pool The DHCP server assumes that all IP addresses in a DHCP address pool are available for assigning to DHCP clients. You must specify the IP address that the DHCP server should not assign to clients. To exclude an address, follow this step. • Exclude an address range from DHCP assignment. The exclusion applies to all configured pools. DHCP mode excluded-address Specifying an Address Lease Time To specify an address lease time, use the following command.
Using NetBIOS WINS for Address Resolution Windows internet naming service (WINS) is a name resolution service that Microsoft DHCP clients use to correlate host names to IP addresses within a group of networks. Microsoft DHCP clients can be one of four types of NetBIOS nodes: broadcast, peer-to-peer, mixed, or hybrid. 1 Specify the NetBIOS WINS name servers, in order of preference, that are available to Microsoft Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) clients.
Using DHCP Clear Commands To clear DHCP binding entries, address conflicts, and server counters, use the following commands. • Clear DHCP binding entries for the entire binding table. EXEC Privilege mode. • clear ip dhcp binding Clear a DHCP binding entry for an individual IP address. EXEC Privilege mode. clear ip dhcp binding ip address Configure the System to be a DHCP Client A DHCP client is a network device that requests an IP address and configuration parameters from a DHCP server.
Use the no ip address dhcp command to: • Release the IP address dynamically acquired from a DHCP server from the interface. • Disable the DHCP client on the interface so it cannot acquire a dynamic IP address from a DHCP server. • Stop DHCP packet transactions on the interface. When you enter the release dhcp command, the IP address dynamically acquired from a DHCP server is released from an interface.
• To display log messages for all DHCP packets sent and received on DHCP client interfaces, use the debug ip dhcp client packets [interface type slot/port[/subport] command. • To display log message on DHCP client interfaces for IP address acquisition, IP address release, IP address and lease time renewal, and release an IP address, use the [no] debug ip dhcp client events [interface type slot/port[/subport]] command.
DHCP Snooping A DHCP client can run on a switch simultaneously with the DHCP snooping feature as follows: • If you enable DHCP snooping globally on a switch and you enable a DHCP client on an interface, the trust port, source MAC address, and snooping table validations are not performed on the interface by DHCP snooping for packets destined to the DHCP client daemon. The following criteria determine packets destined for the DHCP client: • • DHCP is enabled on the interface.
• Source Address Validation Option 82 RFC 3046 (the relay agent information option, or Option 82) is used for class-based IP address assignment. The code for the relay agent information option is 82, and is comprised of two sub-options, circuit ID and remote ID. Circuit ID This is the interface on which the client-originated message is received. Remote ID This identifies the host from which the message is received. The value of this sub-option is the MAC address of the relay agent that adds Option 82.
DHCP snooping is supported on Layer 2 and Layer 3 traffic. DHCP snooping on Layer 2 interfaces does require a relay agent. Binding table entries are deleted when a lease expires or when the relay agent encounters a DHCPRELEASE. Line cards maintain a list of snooped VLANs. When the binding table is exhausted, DHCP packets are dropped on snooped VLANs, while these packets are forwarded across non-snooped VLANs. Because DHCP packets are dropped, no new IP address assignments are made.
ip dhcp snooping binding mac Adding a Static IPV6 DHCP Snooping Binding Table To add a static entry in the snooping database, use the following command. • Add a static entry in the snooping binding table. EXEC Privilege mode ipv6 dhcp snooping binding mac address vlan-id vlan-id ipv6 ipv6-address interface interfacetype | interface-number lease value Clearing the Binding Table To clear the binding table, use the following command. • Delete all of the entries in the binding table.
Snooping packets : 0 Packets received on snooping disabled L3 Ports Snooping packets processed on L2 vlans : 0 : 142 DHCP Binding File Details Invalid File Invalid Binding Entry Binding Entry lease expired List of Trust Ports List of DHCP Snooping Enabled Vlans List of DAI Trust ports : 0 : 0 : 0 :Te 1/4/1 :Vl 10 :Te 1/4/1 Displaying the Contents of the DHCPv6 Binding Table To display the contents of the DHCP IPv6 binding table, use the following command. • Display the contents of the binding table.
However, DHCP release and decline packets are allowed so that the DHCP snooping table can decrease in size. After the table usage falls below the maximum limit of 4000 entries, new IP address assignments are allowed. To view the number of entries in the table, use the show ip dhcp snooping binding command. This output displays the snooping binding table created using the ACK packets from the trusted port.
NOTE: Dynamic ARP inspection (DAI) uses entries in the L2SysFlow CAM region, a sub-region of SystemFlow. One CAM entry is required for every DAI-enabled VLAN. You can enable DAI on up to 16 VLANs on a system. However, the ExaScale default CAM profile allocates only nine entries to the L2SysFlow region for DAI. You can configure 10 to 16 DAI-enabled VLANs by allocating more CAM space to the L2SysFlow region before enabling DAI. SystemFlow has 102 entries by default.
To bypass the ARP inspection, use the following command. • Specify an interface as trusted so that ARPs are not validated against the binding table. INTERFACE mode arp inspection-trust Dynamic ARP inspection is supported on Layer 2 and Layer 3. Source Address Validation Using the DHCP binding table, Dell Networking OS can perform three types of source address validation (SAV). Table 23.
NOTE: Before enabling SAV With VLAN option, allocate at least one FP block to the ipmacacl CAM region. DHCP MAC Source Address Validation DHCP MAC source address validation (SAV) validates a DHCP packet’s source hardware address against the client hardware address field (CHADDR) in the payload. Dell Networking OS ensures that the packet’s source MAC address is checked against the CHADDR field in the DHCP header only for packets from snooped VLANs. • Enable DHCP MAC SAV.
Viewing the Number of SAV Dropped Packets The following output of the show ip dhcp snooping source-address-validation discard-counters command displays the number of SAV dropped packets. The following output of the show ip dhcp snooping source-address-validation discard-counters interface interface command displays the number of SAV dropped packets on a particular interface.
13 Equal Cost Multi-Path (ECMP) This chapter describes configuring ECMP. This chapter describes configuring ECMP. ECMP for Flow-Based Affinity ECMP for flow-based affinity includes link bundle monitoring. Configuring the Hash Algorithm Seed Deterministic ECMP sorts ECMPs in order even though RTM provides them in a random order. However, the hash algorithm uses as a seed the lower 12 bits of the chassis MAC, which yields a different hash result for every chassis.
Enable link bundle monitoring using the ecmp-group command. NOTE: An ecmp-group index is generated automatically for each unique ecmp-group when you configure multipath routes to the same network. The system can generate a maximum of 512 unique ecmp-groups. The ecmp-group indexes are generated in even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6... 1022) and are for information only. For link bundle monitoring with ECMP, to enable the link bundle monitoring feature, use the ecmp-group command.
The range is from 1 to 64. 2 Add interfaces to the ECMP group bundle. CONFIGURATION ECMP-GROUP mode interface interface 3 Enable monitoring for the bundle. CONFIGURATION ECMP-GROUP mode link-bundle-monitor enable Modifying the ECMP Group Threshold You can customize the threshold percentage for monitoring ECMP group bundles. To customize the ECMP group bundle threshold and to view the changes, use the following commands. • Modify the threshold for monitoring ECMP group bundles.
Host table on the device is a Hash table. In this scenario, a workaround does not exist for the user having route entries programmed in host table. When the command is issued, you are prompted with a warning message stating that the command configuration can take effect on existing prefixes only when “clear ip route *” command is used. When you use the clear command, all the existing /32 IPv4 prefix route entries are reprogrammed in appropriate table.
IPV4 FIELDS : source-ipv4 dest-ipv4 vlan protocol L4-source-port L4-dest-port IPV6 Load Balancing Enabled IPV6 FIELDS : source-ipv6 dest-ipv6 vlan protocol L4-source-port L4-dest-port Mac Load Balancing Enabled MAC FIELDS : source-mac dest-mac vlan ethertype Load Balancing Configuration for tunnels ipv4-over-ipv4 Payload header ipv4-over-ipv6 Payload header ipv6-over-ipv6 Payload header ipv6-over-ipv4 Payload header ipv4-over-gre-ipv4 Payload header ipv6-over-gre-ipv4 Payload header ipv4-over-gre-ipv6 Paylo
Polarization Multipath routing is a method that is often used to address data forwarding issues during network failures so that the network traffic reaches its desired destination. Multipath routing in IP networks is typically implemented using Equal-Cost Multipath (ECMP) routing, which employs load balancing algorithms to distribute the traffic over multiple paths towards its destination.
The preceding anti-polarization techniques require some coordinated configuration of network nodes to solve the problem and these techniques are not scalable when the number of tiers in the network is high. Flow based hashing specifically addresses this using Macro flow-based Hash function. It facilitates a dynamic hash function selection across different nodes in a network on a macro flow basis, thus reducing unfair distribution of bandwidth between members and starvation.
Figure 38. After Polarization Effect Traffic flow after enabling flow-based hashing When the flow-based hashing is enabled at all the nodes in the multi-tier network, traffic distribution is balanced at all tiers of the network nullifying the polarization effect. Traffic occurs by the randomness for the flow-based hashing algorithm across multiple nodes in a given network.
14 FIP Snooping The Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Transit feature is supported on Ethernet interfaces. When you enable the switch for FCoE transit, the switch functions as a FIP snooping bridge. NOTE: FIP snooping is not supported on Fibre Channel interfaces or in a switch stack.
FIP provides functionality for discovering and logging into an FCF. After discovering and logging in, FIP allows FCoE traffic to be sent and received between FCoE end-devices (ENodes) and the FCF. FIP uses its own EtherType and frame format. The following illustration shows the communication that occurs between an ENode server and an FCoE switch (FCF). The following table lists the FIP functions. Table 24.
FIP Snooping on Ethernet Bridges In a converged Ethernet network, intermediate Ethernet bridges can snoop on FIP packets during the login process on an FCF. Then, using ACLs, a transit bridge can permit only authorized FCoE traffic to be transmitted between an FCoE end-device and an FCF. An Ethernet bridge that provides these functions is called a FIP snooping bridge (FSB). On a FIP snooping bridge, ACLs are created dynamically as FIP login frames are processed.
Figure 40. FIP Snooping on a Dell Networking Switch The following sections describe how to configure the FIP snooping feature on a switch: • Allocate CAM resources for FCoE. • Perform FIP snooping (allowing and parsing FIP frames) globally on all VLANs or on a per-VLAN basis. • To assign a MAC address to an FCoE end-device (server ENode or storage device) after a server successfully logs in, set the FCoE MAC address prefix (FC-MAP) value an FCF uses.
Using FIP Snooping There are four steps to configure FCoE transit. 1 Enable the FCoE transit feature on a switch. 2 Enable FIP snooping globally on all Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs) or individual VLANs on a FIP snooping bridge. 3 Configure the FC-Map value applied globally by the switch on all VLANs or an individual VLAN. 4 Configure FCF mode for a FIP snooping bridge-to-FCF link. For a sample FIP snooping configuration, refer to FIP Snooping Configuration Example.
• You must apply the CAM-ACL space for the FCoE region before enabling the FIP-Snooping feature. If you do not apply CAM-ACL space, the following error message is displayed: Dell(conf)#feature fip-snooping % Error: Cannot enable fip snooping. CAM Region not allocated for Fcoe. Dell(conf)# NOTE: Manually add the CAM-ACL space to the FCoE region as it is not applied by default.
configurations are synchronized. By default, all FCoE and FIP frames are dropped unless specifically permitted by existing FIP snoopinggenerated ACLs. You can reconfigure any of the FIP snooping settings. If you disable FCoE transit, FIP and FCoE traffic are handled as normal Ethernet frames and no FIP snooping ACLs are generated. The VLAN-specific and FIP snooping configuration is disabled and stored until you re-enable FCoE transit and the configurations are re-applied.
Impact on Other Software Features When you enable FIP snooping on a switch, other software features are impacted. The following table lists the impact of FIP snooping. Table 25. Impact of Enabling FIP Snooping Impact Description MAC address learning MAC address learning is not performed on FIP and FCoE frames, which are denied by ACLs dynamically created by FIP snooping on server-facing ports in ENode mode.
fip-snooping port-mode fcf NOTE: To disable the FCoE transit feature or FIP snooping on VLANs, use the no version of a command; for example, no feature fip-snooping or no fip-snooping enable. Displaying FIP Snooping Information Use the following show commands to display information on FIP snooping. Table 26.
The following table describes the show fip-snooping sessions command fields. Table 27. show fip-snooping sessions Command Description Field Description ENode MAC MAC address of the ENode . ENode Interface Slot/port number of the interface connected to the ENode. FCF MAC MAC address of the FCF. FCF Interface Slot/port number of the interface to which the FCF is connected. VLAN VLAN ID number used by the session. FCoE MAC MAC address of the FCoE session assigned by the FCF.
The following table describes the show fip-snooping fcf command fields. Table 29. show fip-snooping fcf Command Description Field Description FCF MAC MAC address of the FCF. FCF Interface Slot/port number of the interface to which the FCF is connected. VLAN VLAN ID number used by the session. FC-MAP FC-Map value advertised by the FCF. ENode Interface Slot/port number of the interface connected to the ENode.
Number of FCF Discovery Timeouts :0 Number of VN Port Session Timeouts :0 Number of Session failures due to Hardware Config :0 The following example shows the show fip-snooping statistics port-channel command.
Field Description Number of FLOGI Accepts Number of FIP FLOGI accept frames received on the interface. Number of FLOGI Rejects Number of FIP FLOGI reject frames received on the interface. Number of FDISC Accepts Number of FIP FDISC accept frames received on the interface. Number of FDISC Rejects Number of FIP FDISC reject frames received on the interface. Number of FLOGO Accepts Number of FIP FLOGO accept frames received on the interface.
FCoE Transit Configuration Example The following illustration shows a switch used as a FIP snooping bridge for FCoE traffic between an ENode (server blade) and an FCF (ToR switch). The ToR switch operates as an FCF and FCoE gateway. Figure 41. Configuration Example: FIP Snooping on a Switch In this example, DCBx and PFC are enabled on the FIP snooping bridge and on the FCF ToR switch.
Example of Configuring the ENode Server-Facing Port Dell(conf)# interface tengigabitethernet 1/1/1/1 Dell(conf-if-te-1/1/1/1)# portmode hybrid Dell(conf-if-te-1/1/1/1)# switchport Dell(conf-if-te-1/1/1/1)# protocol lldp Dell(conf-if-te-1/1/1/1-lldp)# dcbx port-role auto-downstream NOTE: A port is enabled by default for bridge-ENode links.
15 Flex Hash and Optimized Boot-Up This chapter describes the Flex Hash and fast-boot enhancements. Topics: • Flex Hash Capability Overview • Configuring the Flex Hash Mechanism • Configuring Fast Boot and LACP Fast Switchover • Optimizing the Boot Time • Interoperation of Applications with Fast Boot and System States • RDMA Over Converged Ethernet (RoCE) Overview • Preserving 802.
When load balancing RRoCE packets using flex hash is enabled, the show ip flow command is disabled. Similarly, when the show ip flow command is in use (ingress port-based load balancing is disabled), the hashing of RRoCE packets is disabled. Flex hash APIs do not mask out unwanted byte values after extraction of the data from the Layer 4 headers for the offset value.
adjacency settings) is learned and installed before the traffic resumes. In a typical network scenario, a traffic disconnection of 150 seconds or more usually occurs. When you employ the optimized booting functionality, the traffic outage duration is reduced drastically.
ports to be 10-Gigabit Ethernet interfaces and 8 ports as 40-Gigabit Ethernet interfaces. You must configure the switch to operate with an uplink speed of 40 Gigabit Ethernet per second. Interoperation of Applications with Fast Boot and System States This functionality is supported on the platform.
BGP Graceful Restart When the system contains one or more BGP peerings configured for BGP graceful restart, fast boot performs the following actions: • A closure of the TCP sessions is performed on all sockets corresponding to BGP sessions on which Graceful Restart has been negotiated. This behavior is to force the peer to perform the helper role so that any routes advertised by the restarting system are retained and the peering session will not go down due to BGP Hold timeout.
Changes to BGP Multipath When the system becomes active after a fast-boot restart, a change has been made to the BGP multipath and ECMP behavior. The system delays the computation and installation of additional paths to a destination into the BGP routing information base (RIB) and forwarding table for a certain period of time.
enabled, the packets comprise TCP and UDP packets and they can be marked with DSCP code points. Multicast is not supported in that network. RRoCE packets are received and transmitted on specific interfaces called lite-subinterfaces. These interfaces are similar to the normal Layer 3 physical interfaces except for the extra provisioning that they offer to enable the VLAN ID for encapsulation. You can configure a physical interface or a Layer 3 Port Channel interface as a lite subinterface.
16 Force10 Resilient Ring Protocol (FRRP) FRRP provides fast network convergence to Layer 2 switches interconnected in a ring topology, such as a metropolitan area network (MAN) or large campuses. FRRP is similar to what can be achieved with the spanning tree protocol (STP), though even with optimizations, STP can take up to 50 seconds to converge (depending on the size of network and node of failure) and may require 4 to 5 seconds to reconverge.
Ring Status The ring failure notification and the ring status checks provide two ways to ensure the ring remains up and active in the event of a switch or port failure. Ring Checking At specified intervals, the Master node sends a ring health frame (RHF) through the ring. If the ring is complete, the frame is received on its secondary port and the Master node resets its fail-period timer and continues normal operation.
In the following example, FRRP 101 is a ring with its own Control VLAN, and FRRP 202 has its own Control VLAN running on another ring. A Member VLAN that spans both rings is added as a Member VLAN to both FRRP groups. Switch R3 has two instances of FRRP running on it: one for each ring. The example topology that follows shows R3 assuming the role of a Transit node for both FRRP 101 and FRRP 202. Figure 42.
• STP disabled on ring interfaces. • Master node secondary port is in blocking state during Normal operation. • Ring health frames (RHF) • Hello RHF: sent at 500ms (hello interval); Only the Master node transmits and processes these. • Topology Change RHF: triggered updates; processed at all nodes. Important FRRP Concepts The following table lists some important FRRP concepts.
Concept Explanation number, on any topology change to ensure that all Transit nodes receive it. There is no periodic transmission of TCRHFs. The TCRHFs are sent on triggered events of ring failure or ring restoration only. Implementing FRRP • FRRP is media and speed independent. • FRRP is a Dell proprietary protocol that does not interoperate with any other vendor. • You must disable the spanning tree protocol (STP) on both the Primary and Secondary interfaces before you can enable FRRP.
Be sure to follow these guidelines: • All VLANS must be in Layer 2 mode. • You can only add ring nodes to the VLAN. • A control VLAN can belong to one FRRP group only. • Tag control VLAN ports. • All ports on the ring must use the same VLAN ID for the control VLAN. • You cannot configure a VLAN as both a control VLAN and member VLAN on the same ring. • Only two interfaces can be members of a control VLAN (the Master Primary and Secondary ports).
CONFIG-FRRP mode. no disable Configuring and Adding the Member VLANs Control and member VLANS are configured normally for Layer 2. Their status as Control or Member is determined at the FRRP group commands. For more information about configuring VLANS in Layer 2 mode, refer to the Layer 2 chapter. Be sure to follow these guidelines: • All VLANS must be in Layer 2 mode. • Tag control VLAN ports. Member VLAN ports, except the Primary/Secondary interface, can be tagged or untagged.
CONFIG-FRRP mode. member-vlan vlan-id {range} VLAN-ID, Range: VLAN IDs for the ring’s Member VLANs. 6 Enable this FRRP group on this switch. CONFIG-FRRP mode. no disable Setting the FRRP Timers To set the FRRP timers, use the following command. NOTE: Set the Dead-Interval time 3 times the Hello-Interval. • Enter the desired intervals for Hello-Interval or Dead-Interval times. CONFIG-FRRP mode.
• Show the information for the identified FRRP group. EXEC or EXEC PRIVELEGED mode. show frrp ring-id • Ring ID: the range is from 1 to 255. Show the state of all FRRP groups. EXEC or EXEC PRIVELEGED mode. show frrp summary Ring ID: the range is from 1 to 255. Troubleshooting FRRP To troubleshoot FRRP, use the following information. Configuration Checks • Each Control Ring must use a unique VLAN ID. • Only two interfaces on a switch can be Members of the same control VLAN.
mode master no disable Example of R2 TRANSIT interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/2/1 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/2/2 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface Vlan 101 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/2/1,1/1/2/2 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 201 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/2/1, 1/1/2/2 no shutdown ! protocol frrp 101 interface primary TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/2/1 secondary TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/2/2 controlvlan 101 member-vlan 201 mode
17 GARP VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP) The generic attribute registration protocol (GARP) VLAN registration protocol (GVRP), defined by the IEEE 802.1q specification, is a Layer 2 network protocol that provides for automatic VLAN configuration of switches. GVRP-compliant switches use GARP to register and deregister attribute values, such as VLAN IDs, with each other.
Configure GVRP To begin, enable GVRP. To facilitate GVRP communications, enable GVRP globally on each switch. Then, GVRP configuration is per interface on a switch-by-switch basis. Enable GVRP on each port that connects to a switch where you want GVRP information exchanged. In the following example, GVRP is configured on VLAN trunk ports. Figure 43.
Enabling GVRP Globally To configure GVRP globally, use the following command. • Enable GVRP for the entire switch. CONFIGURATION mode gvrp enable Example of Configuring GVRP Dell(conf)#protocol gvrp Dell(config-gvrp)#no disable Dell(config-gvrp)#show config ! protocol gvrp no disable Dell(config-gvrp)# To inspect the global configuration, use the show gvrp brief command. Enabling GVRP on a Layer 2 Interface To enable GVRP on a Layer 2 interface, use the following command.
Based on the configuration in the following example, the interface is not removed from VLAN 34 or VLAN 35 despite receiving a GVRP Leave message. Additionally, the interface is not dynamically added to VLAN 45 or VLAN 46, even if a GVRP Join message is received.
18 Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) Internet group management protocol (IGMP) is a Layer 3 multicast protocol that hosts use to join or leave a multicast group. Multicast is premised on identifying many hosts by a single destination IP address; hosts represented by the same IP address are a multicast group. Multicast routing protocols (such as protocol-independent multicast [PIM]) use the information in IGMP messages to discover which groups are active and to populate the multicast routing table.
leaves a multicast group by sending an IGMP message to its IGMP Querier. The querier is the router that surveys a subnet for multicast receivers and processes survey responses to populate the multicast routing table. IGMP messages are encapsulated in IP packets, as shown in the following illustration. Figure 44.
3 Any remaining hosts respond to the query according to the delay timer mechanism (refer to Adjusting Query and Response Timers). If no hosts respond (because there are none remaining in the group), the querier waits a specified period and sends another query. If it still receives no response, the querier removes the group from the list associated with forwarding port and stops forwarding traffic for that group to the subnet. IGMP Version 3 Conceptually, IGMP version 3 behaves the same as version 2.
Figure 46. IGMP Version 3–Capable Multicast Routers Address Structure Joining and Filtering Groups and Sources The following illustration shows how multicast routers maintain the group and source information from unsolicited reports. 1 The first unsolicited report from the host indicates that it wants to receive traffic for group 224.1.1.1. 2 The host’s second report indicates that it is only interested in traffic from group 224.1.1.1, source 10.11.1.1.
Figure 47. Membership Reports: Joining and Filtering Leaving and Staying in Groups The following illustration shows how multicast routers track and refresh state changes in response to group-and-specific and general queries. 1 Host 1 sends a message indicating it is leaving group 224.1.1.1 and that the included filter for 10.11.1.1 and 10.11.1.2 are no longer necessary.
Figure 48. Membership Queries: Leaving and Staying Configure IGMP Configuring IGMP is a two-step process. 1 Enable multicast routing using the ip multicast-routing command. 2 Enable a multicast routing protocol.
Viewing IGMP Enabled Interfaces Interfaces that are enabled with PIM-SM are automatically enabled with IGMP. To view IGMP-enabled interfaces, use the following command. • View IGMP-enabled interfaces. EXEC Privilege mode show ip igmp interface Example of the show ip igmp interface Command Dell#show ip igmp interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/1 Inbound IGMP access group is not set Internet address is 165.87.34.
EXEC Privilege mode show ip igmp groups Example of the show ip igmp groups Command Dell#show ip igmp groups Total Number of Groups: 2 IGMP Connected Group Membership Group Address Interface Mode Uptime Expires Last Reporter 225.1.1.1 TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/1 IGMPV2 00:11:19 00:01:50 165.87.34.100 225.1.2.1 TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/1 IGMPV2 00:10:19 00:01:50 165.87.31.100 Adjusting Timers The following sections describe viewing and adjusting timers.
Enabling IGMP Immediate-Leave If the querier does not receive a response to a group-specific or group-and-source query, it sends another (querier robustness value). Then, after no response, it removes the group from the outgoing interface for the subnet. IGMP immediate leave reduces leave latency by enabling a router to immediately delete the group membership on an interface after receiving a Leave message (it does not send any group-specific or group-and-source queries before deleting the entry).
no ip igmp snooping Related Configuration Tasks • Removing a Group-Port Association • Disabling Multicast Flooding • Specifying a Port as Connected to a Multicast Router • Configuring the Switch as Querier Example of ip igmp snooping enable Command Dell(conf)#ip igmp snooping enable Dell(conf)#do show running-config igmp ip igmp snooping enable Dell(conf)# Removing a Group-Port Association To configure or view the remove a group-port association feature, use the following commands.
• Statically specify a port in a VLAN as connected to a multicast router. INTERFACE VLAN mode ip igmp snooping mrouter • View the ports that are connected to multicast routers. EXEC Privilege mode. show ip igmp snooping mrouter Configuring the Switch as Querier To configure the switch as a querier, use the following command. Hosts that do not support unsolicited reporting wait for a general query before sending a membership report.
Egress Interface Selection (EIS) for HTTP and IGMP Applications You can use the Egress Interface Selection (EIS) feature to isolate the management and front-end port domains for HTTP and IGMP traffic. Also, EIS enables you to configure the responses to switch-destined traffic by using the management port IP address as the source IP address. This information is sent out of the switch through the management port instead of the front-end port.
Application Name Port Number Client Server FTP 20/21 Supported Supported Syslog 514 Supported Telnet 23 Supported TFTP 69 Supported Radius 1812,1813 Supported Tacacs 49 Supported HTTP 80 for httpd Supported Supported 443 for secure httpd 8008 HTTP server port for confd application 8888 secure HTTP server port for confd application If you configure a source interface is for any EIS management application, EIS might not coexist with that interface and the behavior is undefined in su
• For management applications, route lookup is preferentially done in the management EIS routing table for all traffic. management port is the preferred egress port. For example, if SSH is a management application, an SSH session to a front-panel port IP on the peer box is initiated via management port only, if the management port is UP and management route is available.
• To ensure that protocol separation is done only for switch initiated traffic where the application acts as client, only the destination TCP/UDP port is compared and not the source TCP/UDP port. The source TCP/UDP port becomes a known port number when the box acts as server. • TFTP is an exception to the preceding logic. • For TFTP, data transfer is initiated on port 69, but the data transfer ports are chosen independently by the sender and receiver during initialization of the connection.
takes a preference for ip1 as source IP and uses the management network to reach the destination. If the management port is down or the route lookup in EIS routing table fails, ip2 is the source IP and the front-panel port is used to reach the destination. The fallback route between the management and data networks is used in such a case. At any given time, end users can access Dell Networking OS applications using either ip1 or ip2.
This phenomenon occurs where traffic is transiting the switch. Traffic has not originated from the switch and is not terminating on the switch. • Drop the packets that are received on the front-end data port with destination on the management port. • Drop the packets that received on the management port with destination as the front-end data port. Switch-Destined Traffic This phenomenon occurs where traffic is terminated on the switch.
Protocol Behavior when EIS is Enabled Behavior when EIS is Disabled Snmp (SNMP Mib response and SNMP Traps) EIS Behavior Default Behavior ssh EIS Behavior Default Behavior syslog EIS Behavior Default Behavior tacacs EIS Behavior Default Behavior telnet EIS Behavior Default Behavior tftp EIS Behavior Default Behavior icmp (ping and traceroute) EIS Behavior for ICMP Default Behavior Behavior of Various Applications for Switch-Destined Traffic This section describes the different system
Interworking of EIS With Various Applications Stacking • The management EIS is enabled on the master and the standby unit. • Because traffic can be initiated from the Master unit only, the preference to management EIS table for switch-initiated traffic and all its related ARP processing is done in the Master unit only. • ARP-related processing for switch-destined traffic is done by both master and standby units. VLT VLT feature is for the front-end port only.
19 Interfaces This chapter describes interface types, both physical and logical, and how to configure them with Dell Networking Operating System (OS). The system supports 10–Gigabit, 25–Gigabit, 40–Gigbit, 50–Gigabit, and 100–Gigabit QSFP 28 interfaces. NOTE: Only Dell-qualified optics are supported on these interfaces. Non-Dell optics for 40–Gigbit, 25–Gigabit, 50–Gigabit, and 100–Gigabit are set to error-disabled state.
• Null Interfaces • Port Channel Interfaces • Bulk Configuration • Defining Interface Range Macros • Monitoring and Maintaining Interfaces • Split 40G Ports on a 16X40G QSFP+ Module • Splitting 100G Ports • Link Dampening • Link Bundle Monitoring • Using Ethernet Pause Frames for Flow Control • Configure the MTU Size on an Interface • Port-Pipes • CR4 Auto-Negotiation • FEC Configuration • Setting the Speed of Ethernet Interfaces • Adjusting the Keepalive Timer • View Advanc
This command has options to display the interface status, IP and MAC addresses, and multiple counters for the amount and type of traffic passing through the interface. If you configured a port channel interface, this command lists the interfaces configured in the port channel. NOTE: To end output from the system, such as the output from the show interfaces command, enter CTRL+C and Dell Networking OS returns to the command prompt.
TenGigabitEthernet fortyGigE 1/1/11 fortyGigE 1/1/12 fortyGigE 1/1/13 fortyGigE 1/1/14 TenGigabitEthernet TenGigabitEthernet TenGigabitEthernet TenGigabitEthernet fortyGigE 1/2/1 fortyGigE 1/2/2 1/1/9/4 1/1/15/1 1/1/15/2 1/1/15/3 1/1/15/4 unassigned unassigned unassigned unassigned unassigned unassigned unassigned unassigned unassigned unassigned unassigned NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO Manual Manual Manual Manual Manual Manual Manual Manual Manual Manual Manual administratively administratively ad
show config Dell(conf-if-te-1/1/5/1)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/5/1 no ip address shutdown All the applied configurations are removed and the interface is set to the factory default state. Enabling a Physical Interface After determining the type of physical interfaces available, to enable and configure the interfaces, enter INTERFACE mode by using the interface interface command. 1 Enter the keyword interface then the type of interface and slot/port[/subport] information.
• Management Interfaces • Adjusting the Keepalive Timer • Clearing Interface Counters Overview of Layer Modes On all systems running Dell Networking OS, you can place physical interfaces, port channels, and VLANs in Layer 2 mode or Layer 3 mode. By default, VLANs are in Layer 2 mode. Table 36. Layer Modes Type of Interface Possible Modes Requires Creation Default State 10 Gigabit Ethernet, 25–Gigabit Ethernet, 40–Gigabit Ethernet, 50–Gigabit Ethernet, and 100– Gigabit Ethernet.
Configuring Layer 2 (Interface) Mode To configure an interface in Layer 2 mode, use the following commands. • Enable the interface. INTERFACE mode no shutdown • Place the interface in Layer 2 (switching) mode. INTERFACE mode switchport To view the interfaces in Layer 2 mode, use the show interfaces switchport command in EXEC mode. Configuring Layer 3 (Network) Mode When you assign an IP address to a physical interface, you place it in Layer 3 mode.
• Enable the interface. INTERFACE mode • no shutdown Configure a primary IP address and mask on the interface. INTERFACE mode ip address ip-address mask [secondary] The ip-address must be in dotted-decimal format (A.B.C.D) and the mask must be in slash format (/xx). Add the keyword secondary if the IP address is the interface’s backup IP address. Example of the show ip interface Command You can only configure one primary IP address per interface.
To enable and configure EIS, use the following commands: 1 Enter EIS mode. CONFIGURATION mode management egress-interface-selection 2 Configure which applications uses EIS.
• • across a platform must be in the same subnet. must not match the virtual IP address and must not be in the same subnet as the virtual IP. If there are two RPMs on the system, configure each Management interface with a different IP address. Unless you configure the management route command, you can only access the Management interface from the local LAN. To access the Management interface from another LAN, configure the management route command to point to the Management interface.
Pluggable media not present Interface index is 46449666 Internet address is 10.11.131.
Loopback Interfaces A Loopback interface is a virtual interface in which the software emulates an interface. Packets routed to it are processed locally. Because this interface is not a physical interface, you can configure routing protocols on this interface to provide protocol stability. You can place Loopback interfaces in default Layer 3 mode. To configure, view, or delete a Loopback interface, use the following commands. • Enter a number as the Loopback interface.
Port Channel Definition and Standards Link aggregation is defined by IEEE 802.3ad as a method of grouping multiple physical interfaces into a single logical interface—a link aggregation group (LAG) or port channel. A LAG is “a group of links that appear to a MAC client as if they were a single link” according to IEEE 802.3ad. In Dell Networking OS, a LAG is referred to as a port channel interface. A port channel provides redundancy by aggregating physical interfaces into one logical interface.
Interfaces in Port Channels When interfaces are added to a port channel, the interfaces must share a common speed. When interfaces have a configured speed different from the port channel speed, the software disables those interfaces. The common speed is determined when the port channel is first enabled. Then, the software checks the first interface listed in the port channel configuration. If you enabled that interface, its speed configuration becomes the common speed of the port channel.
Adding a Physical Interface to a Port Channel The physical interfaces in a port channel can be on any line card in the chassis, but must be the same physical type. NOTE: Port channels can contain a mix of Ethernet interfaces, but Dell Networking OS disables the interfaces that are not the same speed of the first channel member in the port channel (refer to 10/100/1000 Mbps Interfaces in Port Channels). You can add any physical interface to a port channel if the interface configuration is minimal.
Internet address is 1.1.120.
INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL mode channel-member interface Example of Moving an Interface to a New Port Channel The following example shows moving an interface from port channel 4 to port channel 3.
untagged port-channel id number • An interface without tagging enabled can belong to only one VLAN. Remove the port channel with tagging enabled from the VLAN. INTERFACE VLAN mode no tagged port-channel id number or no untagged port-channel id number • Identify which port channels are members of VLANs.
ip address ip-address mask [secondary] • ip-address mask: enter an address in dotted-decimal format (A.B.C.D). The mask must be in slash format (/24). • secondary: the IP address is the interface’s backup IP address. You can configure up to eight secondary IP addresses. Deleting or Disabling a Port Channel To delete or disable a port channel, use the following commands. • Delete a port channel. CONFIGURATION mode no interface portchannel channel-number • Disable a port channel.
• tcp-udp enable — Distribute traffic based on the TCP/UDP source and destination ports. • ingress-port — Option to Source Port Id for ECMP/ LAG hashing. • ipv6-selection— Set the IPV6 key fields to use in hash computation. • tunnel— Set the tunnel key fields to use in hash computation. Changing the Hash Algorithm The load-balance command selects the hash criteria applied to port channels.
• xor4 —Upper 8 bits of CRC16-BISYNC and lower 8 bits of xor4 • xor8 — Upper 8 bits of CRC16-BISYNC and lower 8 bits of xor8 • xor16 — uses 16 bit XOR. Bulk Configuration Bulk configuration allows you to determine if interfaces are present for physical interfaces or configured for logical interfaces. Interface Range An interface range is a set of interfaces to which other commands may be applied and may be created if there is at least one valid interface within the range.
Create a Single-Range The following is an example of a single range. Example of the interface range Command (Single Range) Dell(config)# interface range tengigabitethernet 1/1/1/1 - 1/1/2/3 Dell(config-if-range-te-1/1/1/1-1/1/2/3)# no shutdown Dell(config-if-range-te-1/1/1/1-1/1/2/3)# Dell(config)# interface range hundredGigE 1/1/1-1/1/8 Dell(config-if-range-te-1/1/1-1/1/8)# no shutdown Dell(config-if-range-te-1/1/1-1/1/8)# Create a Multiple-Range The following is an example of multiple range.
Commas The following is an example of how to use commas to add different interface types to a range of interfaces. Example of Adding Interface Ranges Dell(conf)#interface range fo 1/1/1-1/1/4 , te 1/1/5/1 - 1/1/5/4 Dell(conf-if-range-te-1/1/5/1-1/1/5/4,fo-1/1/1...)# Add Ranges The following example shows how to use commas to add VLAN and port-channel interfaces to the range.
Example of Using a Macro to Change the Interface Range Configuration Mode The following example shows how to change to the interface-range configuration mode using the interface-range macro named “test.” Dell(config)# interface range macro test Dell(config-if)# Monitoring and Maintaining Interfaces Monitor interface statistics with the monitor interface command. This command displays an ongoing list of the interface status (up/ down), number of packets, traffic statistics, and so on.
m l T q - Change mode Page up Increase refresh interval Quit c - Clear screen a - Page down t - Decrease refresh interval q Dell# Split 40G Ports on a 16X40G QSFP+ Module You can only split the 40G ports in the top row (odd numbered ports) on a 16X40G module. If you configure 4X10G on a 40G interface, the subsequent even numbered interface is removed and unavailable for use.
Splitting 100G Ports The platform supports splitting a single 100G QSFP 28 port into any of the following ports: • Two 50G ports • Four 25G ports • One 40G port • Four 10G ports NOTE: You can use the supported breakout cables (for a list of supported cables, refer to the Installation Guide or the Release Notes). To split a single 100G port into 50G, 25G, 40G, and 10G ports, use the following commands: • Split a 100G port into two 50G ports.
Link Dampening Interface state changes occur when interfaces are administratively brought up or down or if an interface state changes. Every time an interface changes a state or flaps, routing protocols are notified of the status of the routes that are affected by the change in state. These protocols go through the momentous task of re-converging. Flapping; therefore, puts the status of entire network at risk of transient loops and black holes.
To view a dampening summary for the entire system, use the show interfaces dampening summary command from EXEC Privilege mode. Dell# show interfaces dampening summary 20 interfaces are configured with dampening. 3 interfaces are currently suppressed. Following interfaces are currently suppressed: Te 1/1/1/2 Te 1/1/1/3 Te 1/1/1/4 Dell# Clearing Dampening Counters To clear dampening counters and accumulated penalties, use the following command. • Clear dampening counters.
Link Bundle Monitoring Monitoring linked LAG bundles allows traffic distribution amounts in a link to be monitored for unfair distribution at any given time. A threshold of 60% is defined as an acceptable amount of traffic on a member link. Links are monitored in 15-second intervals for three consecutive instances. Any deviation within that time sends Syslog and an alarm event generates. When the deviation clears, another Syslog sends and a clear alarm event generates.
rx off: Ignores the received flow control frames on this port. tx on: Sends control frames from this port to the connected device when a higher rate of traffic is received. tx off: Flow control frames are not sent from this port to the connected device when a higher rate of traffic is received. monitor session-ID: Enables mirror flow control frames on this port. Changes in the flow-control values may not be reflected automatically in the show interface output.
Layer 2 Overhead Difference Between Link MTU and IP MTU Untagged Packet with VLAN-Stack Header 22 bytes Tagged Packet with VLAN-Stack Header 26 bytes Link MTU and IP MTU considerations for port channels and VLANs are as follows. Port Channels: • All members must have the same link MTU value and the same IP MTU value. • The port channel link MTU and IP MTU must be less than or equal to the link MTU and IP MTU values configured on the channel members.
shutdown no intf-type cr4 autoneg Important Points to Remember • • • For 10–Gigabit Ethernet interfaces, CR4 auto-negotiation is not applicable. For 100-Gigabit Ethernet interfaces, CR4 auto-negotiation is enabled by default. For 40–Gigbit, 25–Gigabit and 50–Gigabit Ethernet interfaces, CR4 auto-negotiation is disabled by default. FEC Configuration FEC configurations are available on 100–Gigbit, 50–Gigabit and 25–Gigabit Ethernet interfaces. To configure FEC, use the following commands. • Enable FEC.
no ip address shutdown no intf-type cr4 autoneg Dell(conf-if-hu-1/1/1)# Important Points to Remember • For 10–Gigabit and 40–Gigabit Ethernet interfaces, FEC configurations are not applicable. • For 100-Gigabit Ethernet interfaces, CR4 auto-negotiation is enabled by default. You cannot enable or disable FEC separately. To enable or disable FEC, disable CR4 auto-negotiation first. Similarly, CR4 auto-negotiation cannot be enabled if FEC is already enabled or disabled.
[Use the command on the remote system that is equivalent to the first command.] 3 Access CONFIGURATION mode. EXEC Privilege mode config 4 Access the port. CONFIGURATION mode interface interface-type 5 Set the local port speed. INTERFACE mode speed {10 | 100 | 1000 | 10000 | auto} NOTE: If you use an active optical cable (AOC), you can convert the QSFP+ port to a 10 Gigabit SFP+ port or 1 Gigabit SFP port. You can use the speed command to enable the required speed.
! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/1 no ip address speed 100 duplex full no shutdown Adjusting the Keepalive Timer To change the time interval between keepalive messages on the interfaces, use the keepalive command. The interface sends keepalive messages to itself to test network connectivity on the interface. To change the default time interval between keepalive messages, use the following command. • Change the default interval between keepalive messages.
Vlan membership: Vlan 2 Name: TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/4 802.1QTagged: True Vlan membership: Vlan 2 --More-- Configuring the Interface Sampling Size Although you can enter any value between 30 and 299 seconds (the default), software polling is done once every 15 seconds. So, for example, if you enter “19”, you actually get a sample of the past 15 seconds. All LAG members inherit the rate interval configuration from the LAG.
Input 0 IP Packets, 0 Vlans 0 MPLS 0 64-byte pkts, 0 over 64-byte pkts, 0 over 127-byte pkts 0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts Received 0 input symbol errors, 0 runts, 0 giants, 0 throttles 0 CRC, 0 IP Checksum, 0 overrun, 0 discarded 0 packets output, 0 bytes, 0 underruns Output 0 Multicasts, 0 Broadcasts, 0 Unicasts 0 IP Packets, 0 Vlans, 0 MPLS 0 throttles, 0 discarded Rate info (interval 100 seconds): Input 00.00 Mbits/sec, 0 packets/sec, 0.00% of line-rate Output 00.
• For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. • For the Management interface on the stack-unit, enter the keyword ManagementEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. • For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. • (OPTIONAL) To clear statistics for all VRRP groups configured, enter the keyword vrrp. Enter a number from 1 to 255 as the vrid.
shut shut shut int te 1/1/1/1 int te 1/1/1/2 int te 1/1/1/3 int te 1/1/1/4 int te 1/1/5/1 int te 1/1/6/1 no ip address no ip address no ip address no ip address no ip address ip address 2.1.1.
! no shutdown interface Vlan 2 ! no ip address no shutdown Compressed config size – 27 lines. ! interface Vlan 3 tagged te 1/1/1/1 no ip address shutdown ! interface Vlan 4 tagged te 1/1/1/1 no ip address shutdown ! interface Vlan 5 tagged te 1/1/1/1 no ip address shutdown ! interface Vlan 100 no ip address no shutdown ! interface Vlan 1000 ip address 1.1.1.
in flash by default copy compressed-config Copy one file, after optimizing and reducing the size of the configuration file, to another location. Dell Networking OS supports IPv4 and IPv6 addressing for FTP, TFTP, and SCP (in the hostip field).
20 IPv4 Routing The Dell Networking Operating System (OS) supports various IP addressing features. This chapter describes the basics of domain name service (DNS), address resolution protocol (ARP), and routing principles and their implementation in the Dell Networking OS.
• Configurations Using UDP Helper • UDP Helper with Broadcast-All Addresses • UDP Helper with Subnet Broadcast Addresses • UDP Helper with Configured Broadcast Addresses • UDP Helper with No Configured Broadcast Addresses • Troubleshooting UDP Helper IP Addresses Dell Networking OS supports IP version 4 (as described in RFC 791), classful routing, and variable length subnet masks (VLSM). With VLSM, you can configure one network with different masks.
2 • For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the stack/slot/port[/subport] information. • For a 50-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fiftyGigE then the stack/slot/port/subport information. • For a 100-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword hundredGigE then the stack/slot/port information. • For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383.
• permanent: keep the static route in the routing table (if you use the interface option) even if you disable the interface with the route. (optional) • tag tag-value: the range is from 1 to 4294967295. (optional) Example of the show ip route static Command To view the configured routes, use the show ip route static command. Dell#show ip route static Destination Gateway ----------------S 2.1.2.0/24 Direct, Nu 0 S 6.1.2.0/24 via 6.1.20.2, S 6.1.2.2/32 via 6.1.20.2, S 6.1.2.3/32 via 6.1.20.2, S 6.1.2.
10.16.0.0/16 172.16.1.0/24 ManagementEthernet 1/1 10.16.151.4 Connected Active Connected Static Using the Configured Source IP Address in ICMP Messages ICMP error or unreachable messages are now sent with the configured IP address of the source interface instead of the front-end port IP address as the source IP address. Enable the generation of ICMP unreachable messages through the ip unreachable command in Interface mode.
Dell>show ip tcp reduced-syn-ack-wait Enabling Directed Broadcast By default, Dell Networking OS drops directed broadcast packets destined for an interface. This default setting provides some protection against denial of service (DoS) attacks. To enable Dell Networking OS to receive directed broadcasts, use the following command. • Enable directed broadcast. INTERFACE mode ip directed-broadcast To view the configuration, use the show config command in INTERFACE mode.
To view the current configuration, use the show running-config resolve command. Specifying the Local System Domain and a List of Domains If you enter a partial domain, Dell Networking OS can search different domains to finish or fully qualify that partial domain. A fully qualified domain name (FQDN) is any name that is terminated with a period/dot. Dell Networking OS searches the host table first to resolve the partial domain.
---------------------------------------------------------------------TTL Hostname Probe1 Probe2 Probe3 1 10.11.199.190 001.000 ms 001.000 ms 002.000 ms 2 gwegress-sjc-02.force10networks.com (10.11.30.126) 005.000 ms 001.000 ms 001.000 ms 3 fw-sjc-01.force10networks.com (10.11.127.254) 000.000 ms 000.000 ms 000.000 ms 4 www.dell.com (10.11.84.18) 000.000 ms 000.000 ms 000.000 ms Dell# ARP Dell Networking OS uses two forms of address resolution: address resolution protocol (ARP) and Proxy ARP.
To view the static entries in the ARP cache, use the show arp static command in EXEC privilege mode. Dell#show arp Protocol Address Age(min) Hardware Address Interface VLAN CPU -------------------------------------------------------------------------------Internet 10.1.2.4 17 08:00:20:b7:bd:32 Ma 1/1 CP Dell# Enabling Proxy ARP By default, Proxy ARP is enabled. To disable Proxy ARP, use the no proxy-arp command in the interface mode. To re-enable Proxy ARP, use the following command.
In the request, the host uses its own IP address in the Sender Protocol Address and Target Protocol Address fields. Enabling ARP Learning via Gratuitous ARP To enable ARP learning via gratuitous ARP, use the following command. • Enable ARP learning via gratuitous ARP. CONFIGURATION mode arp learn-enable ARP Learning via ARP Request In Dell Networking OS versions prior to 8.3.1.
Configuring ARP Retries You can configure the number of ARP retries. The default backoff interval remains at 20 seconds. To set and display ARP retries, use the following commands. • Set the number of ARP retries. CONFIGURATION mode arp retries number The default is 5. • The range is from 1 to 20. Set the exponential timer for resending unresolved ARPs. CONFIGURATION mode arp backoff-time The default is 30. • The range is from 1 to 3600. Display all ARP entries learned via gratuitous ARP.
ip unreachable To view if ICMP unreachable messages are sent on the interface, use the show config command in INTERFACE mode. If it is not listed in the show config command output, it is enabled. Only non-default information is displayed in the show config command output. UDP Helper User datagram protocol (UDP) helper allows you to direct the forwarding IP/UDP broadcast traffic by creating special broadcast addresses and rewriting the destination IP address of packets to match those addresses.
To view the configured broadcast address for an interface, use show interfaces command. Dell#show interfaces vlan 100 Vlan 100 is up, line protocol is down Address is 00:01:e8:0d:b9:7a, Current address is 00:01:e8:0d:b9:7a Interface index is 1107787876 Internet address is 1.1.0.1/24 IP UDP-Broadcast address is 1.1.255.
Figure 51. UDP Helper with Broadcast-All Addresses UDP Helper with Subnet Broadcast Addresses When the destination IP address of an incoming packet matches the subnet broadcast address of any interface, the system changes the address to the configured broadcast address and sends it to matching interface. In the following illustration, Packet 1 has the destination IP address 1.1.1.255, which matches the subnet broadcast address of VLAN 101.
Figure 53. UDP Helper with Configured Broadcast Addresses UDP Helper with No Configured Broadcast Addresses The following describes UDP helper with no broadcast addresses configured. • If the incoming packet has a broadcast destination IP address, the unaltered packet is routed to all Layer 3 interfaces. • If the Incoming packet has a destination IP address that matches the subnet broadcast address of any interface, the unaltered packet is routed to the matching interfaces.
21 IPv6 Routing Internet protocol version 6 (IPv6) routing is the successor to IPv4. Due to the rapid growth in internet users and IP addresses, IPv4 is reaching its maximum usage. IPv6 will eventually replace IPv4 usage to allow for the constant expansion. This chapter provides a brief description of the differences between IPv4 and IPv6, and the Dell Networking support of IPv6. This chapter is not intended to be a comprehensive description of IPv6.
Extended Address Space The address format is extended from 32 bits to 128 bits. This not only provides room for all anticipated needs, it allows for the use of a hierarchical address space structure to optimize global addressing. Stateless Autoconfiguration When a booting device comes up in IPv6 and asks for its network prefix, the device can get the prefix (or prefixes) from an IPv6 router on its link.
• Flow Label (20 bits) • Payload Length (16 bits) • Next Header (8 bits) • Hop Limit (8 bits) • Source Address (128 bits) • Destination Address (128 bits) IPv6 provides for extension headers. Extension headers are used only if necessary. There can be no extension headers, one extension header or more than one extension header in an IPv6 packet. Extension headers are defined in the Next Header field of the preceding IPv6 header.
The platforms uses only IPv6 /0 – 0/64 prefix route entries. Support for /0 – /128 IPv6 prefix route entries is available, although they are not utilized. A total of eight pools or regions are present with each region containing 1024 210-bit entries (supports up to 0/64 prefix). To support up to /128 prefixes, you must use 2 banks (410-bit entries). It is necessary to partition the LPM. The optimized booting functionality does not use Openflow and therefore SDN support is not available.
Next Header (8 bits) The Next Header field identifies the next header’s type. If an Extension header is used, this field contains the type of Extension header (as shown in the following table). If the next header is a transmission control protocol (TCP) or user datagram protocol (UDP) header, the value in this field is the same as for IPv4. The Extension header is located between the IP header and the TCP or UDP header. The following lists the Next Header field values.
Source Address (128 bits) The Source Address field contains the IPv6 address for the packet originator. Destination Address (128 bits) The Destination Address field contains the intended recipient’s IPv6 address. This can be either the ultimate destination or the address of the next hop router. Extension Header Fields Extension headers are used only when necessary. Due to the streamlined nature of the IPv6 header, adding extension headers do not severely impact performance.
10 Discard the packet and send an ICMP Parameter Problem Code 2 message to the packet’s Source IP Address identifying the unknown option type. 11 Discard the packet and send an ICMP Parameter Problem, Code 2 message to the packet’s Source IP Address only if the Destination IP Address is not a multicast address. The second byte contains the Option Data Length. The third byte specifies whether the information can change en route to the destination.
the same IPv6 address to a particular computer, and never to assign that IP address to another computer. This allows static IPv6 addresses to be configured in one place, without having to specifically configure each computer on the network in a different way. In IPv6, every interface, whether using static or dynamic address assignments, also receives a local-link address automatically in the fe80::/64 subnet.
IPv6 Neighbor Discovery The IPv6 neighbor discovery protocol (NDP) is a top-level protocol for neighbor discovery on an IPv6 network. In place of address resolution protocol (ARP), NDP uses “Neighbor Solicitation” and “Neighbor Advertisement” ICMPv6 messages for determining relationships between neighboring nodes. Using these messages, an IPv6 device learns the link-layer addresses for neighbors known to reside on attached links, quickly purging cached values that become invalid.
The lifetime parameter configures the amount of time the IPv6 host can use the IPv6 RDNSS address for name resolution. The lifetime range is 0 to 4294967295 seconds. When the maximum lifetime value, 4294967295, or the infinite keyword is specified, the lifetime to use the RDNSS address does not expire. A value of 0 indicates to the host that the RDNSS address should not be used. You must specify a lifetime using the lifetime or infinite parameter.
Displaying IPv6 RDNSS Information To display IPv6 interface information, including IPv6 RDNSS information, use the show ipv6 interface command in EXEC or EXEC Privilege mode. Examples of Displaying IPv6 RDNSS Information The following example displays IPv6 RDNSS information. The output in the last 3 lines indicates that the IPv6 RDNSS was correctly configured on interface te 1/1/1.
Configuration Tasks for IPv6 The following are configuration tasks for the IPv6 protocol. • Adjusting Your CAM-Profile • Assigning an IPv6 Address to an Interface • Assigning a Static IPv6 Route • Configuring Telnet with IPv6 • SNMP over IPv6 • Showing IPv6 Information • Clearing IPv6 Routes Adjusting Your CAM-Profile Although adjusting your CAM-profile is not a mandatory step, if you plan to implement IPv6 ACLs, adjust your CAM settings. The CAM space is allotted in FP blocks.
The total number of groups is 4. Assigning an IPv6 Address to an Interface Essentially, IPv6 is enabled in Dell Networking OS simply by assigning IPv6 addresses to individual router interfaces. You can use IPv6 and IPv4 together on a system, but be sure to differentiate that usage carefully. To assign an IPv6 address to an interface, use the ipv6 address command.
• For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. • For a Null interface, enter the keyword null then the Null interface number. • For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Configuring Telnet with IPv6 The Telnet client and server in Dell Networking OS supports IPv6 connections. You can establish a Telnet session directly to the router using an IPv6 Telnet client, or you can initiate an IPv6 Telnet connection from the router.
mroute neighbors ospf pim prefix-list route rpf Dell# IPv6 multicast-routing table IPv6 neighbor information OSPF information PIM V6 information List IPv6 prefix lists IPv6 routing information RPF table Displaying an IPv6 Interface Information To view the IPv6 configuration for a specific interface, use the following command. • Show the currently running configuration for the specified interface.
Showing IPv6 Routes To view the global IPv6 routing information, use the following command. • Show IPv6 routing information for the specified route type. EXEC mode show ipv6 route [vrf vrf-name] type The following keywords are available: • To display information about a network, enter ipv6 address (X:X:X:X::X). • To display information about a host, enter hostname. • To display information about all IPv6 routes (including non-active routes), enter all.
Dell# Direct, Nu 0, 00:34:42 The following example shows the show ipv6 route static command.
Configuring IPv6 RA Guard The IPv6 Router Advertisement (RA) guard allows you to block or reject the unwanted router advertisement guard messages that arrive at the network device platform. To configure the IPv6 RA guard, perform the following steps: 1 Configure the terminal to enter the Global Configuration mode. EXEC Privilege mode configure terminal 2 Enable the IPv6 RA guard. CONFIGURATION mode ipv6 nd ra-guard enable 3 Create the policy.
router—lifetime value The router lifetime range is from 0 to 9,000 seconds. 11 Apply the policy to trusted ports. POLICY LIST CONFIGURATION mode trusted-port 12 Set the maximum transmission unit (MTU) value. POLICY LIST CONFIGURATION mode mtu value 13 Set the advertised reachability time. POLICY LIST CONFIGURATION mode reachable—time value The reachability time range is from 0 to 3,600,000 milliseconds. 14 Set the advertised retransmission time.
EXEC Privilege mode show ipv6 nd ra-guard policy policy-name The policy name string can be up to 140 characters. Example of the show ipv6 nd ra-guard policy Command Dell#show ipv6 nd ra-guard policy test ipv6 nd ra-guard policy test device-role router hop-limit maximum 1 match ra ipv6-access-list access other-config-flag on router-preference maximum medium trusted-port Interfaces : Te 1/1/1 Dell# Monitoring IPv6 RA Guard To debug IPv6 RA guard, use the following command.
22 iSCSI Optimization This chapter describes how to configure internet small computer system interface (iSCSI) optimization, which enables quality-of-service (QoS) treatment for iSCSI traffic.
• iSCSI QoS — A user-configured iSCSI class of service (CoS) profile is applied to all iSCSI traffic. Classifier rules are used to direct the iSCSI data traffic to queues that can be given preferential QoS treatment over other data passing through the switch. Preferential treatment helps to avoid session interruptions during times of congestion that would otherwise cause dropped iSCSI packets. • iSCSI DCBx TLVs are supported.
Monitoring iSCSI Traffic Flows The switch snoops iSCSI session-establishment and termination packets by installing classifier rules that trap iSCSI protocol packets to the CPU for examination. Devices that initiate iSCSI sessions usually use well-known TCP ports 3260 or 860 to contact targets. When you enable iSCSI optimization, by default the switch identifies IP packets to or from these ports as iSCSI traffic.
If more than 256 simultaneous sessions are logged continuously, the following message displays indicating the queue rate limit has been reached: %STKUNIT2-M:CP %iSCSI-5-ISCSI_OPT_MAX_SESS_EXCEEDED: New iSCSI Session Ignored: ISID 400001370000 InitiatorName - iqn.1991-05.com.microsoft:dt-brcd-cna-2 TargetName iqn.2001-05.com.equallogic:4-52aed6-b90d9446c-162466364804fa49-wj-v1 TSIH - 0" NOTE: If you are using EqualLogic or Compellent storage arrays, more than 256 simultaneous iSCSI sessions are possible.
including jumbo frames and flow-control on all ports; no storm control and spanning-tree port fast to be enabled on the port of detection. After you execute the iscsi profile-compellent command, the following actions occur: • Jumbo frame size is set to the maximum for all interfaces on all ports and port-channels, if it is not already enabled. • Spanning-tree portfast is enabled on the interface. • Unicast storm control is disabled on the interface.
NOTE: By default, CAM allocation for iSCSI is set to 0. This disables session monitoring. Default iSCSI Optimization Values The following table lists the default values for the iSCSI optimization feature. Table 39. iSCSI Optimization Defaults Parameter Default Value iSCSI Optimization global setting Disabled. iSCSI CoS mode (802.1p priority queue mapping) dot1p priority 4 without the remark setting when you enable iSCSI. If you do not enable iSCSI, this feature is disabled.
NOTE: Content addressable memory (CAM) allocation is optional. If CAM is not allocated, the following features are disabled: • session monitoring • aging • class of service You can enable iSCSI even when allocated with zero (0) CAM blocks. However, if no CAM blocks are allocated, session monitoring is disabled and this information the show iscsi command displays this information. 2 For a non-DCB environment: Enable iSCSI.
• dot1p vlan-priority-value: specifies the virtual local area network (VLAN) priority tag assigned to incoming packets in an iSCSI session. The range is from 0 to 7. The default is: the dot1p value in ingress iSCSI frames is not changed and the same priority is used in iSCSI TLV advertisements if you do not enter the iscsi priority-bits command (Step 10). • 8 dscp dscp-value: specifies the DSCP value assigned to incoming packets in an iSCSI session. The range is from 0 to 63.
iSCSI COS : dot1p is 4 no-remark Session aging time: 10 Maximum number of connections is 256 -----------------------------------------------iSCSI Targets and TCP Ports: -----------------------------------------------TCP Port Target IP Address 3260 860 The following example shows the show iscsi session command. VLT PEER1 Dell#show iscsi session Session 0: ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------Target: iqn.2001-05.com.
23 Intermediate System to Intermediate System The intermediate system to intermediate system (IS-IS) protocol that uses a shortest-path-first algorithm. Dell Networking supports both IPv4 and IPv6 versions of IS-IS.
• area address — within your routing domain or area, each area must have a unique area value. The first byte is called the authority and format indicator (AFI). • system address — the router’s MAC address. • N-selector — this is always 0. The following illustration is an example of the ISO-style address to show the address format IS-IS uses. In this example, the first five bytes (47.0005.0001) are the area address. The system portion is 000c.000a.4321 and the last byte is always 0. Figure 58.
Interface Support MT IS-IS is supported on physical Ethernet interfaces, physical synchronous optical network technologies (SONET) interfaces, portchannel interfaces (static and dynamic using LACP), and virtual local area network (VLAN) interfaces. Adjacencies Adjacencies on point-to-point interfaces are formed as usual, where IS-IS routers do not implement MT extensions.
IPv6 Reachability and IPv6 Interface Address. Also, a new IPv6 protocol identifier has also been included in the supported TLVs. The new TLVs use the extended metrics and up/down bit semantics. Multi-topology IS-IS adds TLVs: • MT TLV — contains one or more Multi-Topology IDs in which the router participates. This TLV is included in IIH and the first fragment of an LSP. • MT Intermediate Systems TLV — appears for every topology a node supports.
Configuration Tasks for IS-IS The following describes the configuration tasks for IS-IS. • Enabling IS-IS • Configure Multi-Topology IS-IS (MT IS-IS) • Configuring IS-IS Graceful Restart • Changing LSP Attributes • Configuring the IS-IS Metric Style • Configuring IS-IS Cost • Changing the IS-Type • Controlling Routing Updates • Configuring Authentication Passwords • Setting the Overload Bit • Debuging IS-IS Enabling IS-IS By default, IS-IS is not enabled.
4 • For a 25-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword twentyFiveGigE then the stack/slot/port/subport information. • For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the stack/slot/port[/subport] information. • For a 50-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fiftyGigE then the stack/slot/port/subport information. • For a 100-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword hundredGigE then the stack/slot/port information.
Distance: 115 Generate narrow metrics: Accept narrow metrics: Generate wide metrics: Accept wide metrics: Dell# level-1-2 level-1-2 none none To view IS-IS protocol statistics, use the show isis traffic command in EXEC Privilege mode.
Use this command for IPv6 route computation only when you enable multi-topology. If using single-topology mode, to apply to both IPv4 and IPv6 route computations, use the spf-interval command in CONFIG ROUTER ISIS mode. 4 Implement a wide metric-style globally. ROUTER ISIS AF IPV6 mode isis ipv6 metric metric-value [level-1 | level-2 | level-1-2] To configure wide or wide transition metric style, the cost can be between 0 and 16,777,215.
ROUTER-ISIS mode graceful-restart t3 {adjacency | manual seconds} • adjacency: the restarting router receives the remaining time value from its peer and adjusts its T3 value so if user has configured this option. • manual: allows you to specify a fixed value that the restarting router should use. The range is from 50 to 120 seconds. The default is 30 seconds.
Hello Interval: 10, Hello Multiplier: 3, CSNP Interval: 10 Number of active level-2 adjacencies: 1 Next IS-IS LAN Level-1 Hello in 4 seconds Next IS-IS LAN Level-2 Hello in 6 seconds LSP Interval: 33 Next IS-IS LAN Level-1 Hello in 4 seconds Next IS-IS LAN Level-2 Hello in 6 seconds LSP Interval: 33 Restart Capable Neighbors: 2, In Start: 0, In Restart: 0 Dell# Changing LSP Attributes IS-IS routers flood link state PDUs (LSPs) to exchange routing information.
Configuring the IS-IS Metric Style All IS-IS links or interfaces are associated with a cost that is used in the shortest path first (SPF) calculations. The possible cost varies depending on the metric style supported. If you configure narrow, transition, or narrow transition metric style, the cost can be a number between 0 and 63. If you configure wide or wide transition metric style, the cost can be a number between 0 and 16,777,215.
Distance: 115 Generate narrow metrics: Accept narrow metrics: Generate wide metrics: Accept wide metrics: Dell# level-1-2 level-1-2 none none Configuring the IS-IS Cost When you change from one IS-IS metric style to another, the IS-IS metric value could be affected. For each interface with IS-IS enabled, you can assign a cost or metric that is used in the link state calculation. To change the metric or cost of the interface, use the following commands. • Assign an IS-IS metric.
Changing the IS-Type To change the IS-type, use the following commands. You can configure the system to act as a Level 1 router, a Level 1-2 router, or a Level 2 router. To change the IS-type for the router, use the following commands. • Configure IS-IS operating level for a router. ROUTER ISIS mode is-type {level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2-only} • Default is level-1-2. Change the IS-type for the IS-IS process.
• For a 100-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword hundredGigE then the stack/slot/port information. • For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. • For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. • For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Distribute Routes Another method of controlling routing information is to filter the information through a prefix list.
Applying IPv6 Routes To apply prefix lists to incoming or outgoing IPv6 routes, use the following commands. NOTE: These commands apply to IPv6 IS-IS only. To apply prefix lists to IPv4 routes, use ROUTER ISIS mode, previously shown. • Apply a configured prefix list to all incoming IPv6 IS-IS routes.
ROUTER ISIS mode redistribute {bgp as-number | connected | rip | static} [level-1 level-1-2 | level-2] [metric metric-value] [metric-type {external | internal}] [route-map map-name] Configure the following parameters: • • level-1, level-1-2, or level-2: assign all redistributed routes to a level. The default is level-2. • metric-value the range is from 0 to 16777215. The default is 0. • metric-type: choose either external or internal. The default is internal.
• metric value: the range is from 0 to 16777215. The default is 0. • match external: the range is 1 or 2. • match internal • metric-type: external or internal. • map-name: name of a configured route map. To view the IS-IS configuration globally (including both IPv4 and IPv6 settings), use the show running-config isis command in EXEC Privilege mode. To view the current IPv4 IS-IS configuration, use the show config command in ROUTER ISIS mode.
ROUTER ISIS mode no set-overload-bit Example of Viewing the Overload Bit Setting When the bit is set, a 1 is placed in the OL column in the show isis database command output. The overload bit is set in both the Level-1 and Level-2 database because the IS type for the router is Level-1-2. Dell#show isis database IS-IS Level-1 Link State Database LSPID LSP Seq Num LSP Checksum B233.00-00 0x00000003 0x07BF eljefe.00-00 * 0x0000000A 0xF963 eljefe.01-00 * 0x00000001 0x68DF eljefe.
• View sent and received LSPs. EXEC Privilege mode debug isis update-packets [interface] To view specific information, enter the following optional parameter: • interface: Enter the type of interface and slot/port information to view IS-IS information on that interface only. Dell Networking OS displays debug messages on the console. To view which debugging commands are enabled, use the show debugging command in EXEC Privilege mode.
Maximum Values in the Routing Table IS-IS metric styles support different cost ranges for the route. The cost range for the narrow metric style is 0 to 1023, while all other metric styles support a range of 0 to 0xFE000000. Change the IS-IS Metric Style in One Level Only By default, the IS-IS metric style is narrow. When you change from one IS-IS metric style to another, the IS-IS metric value (configured with the isis metric command) could be affected.
Beginning Metric Style Final Metric Style Resulting IS-IS Metric Value narrow transition transition original value wide transition wide original value wide transition narrow default value (10) if the original value is greater than 63. A message is sent to the console. wide transition narrow transition default value (10) if the original value is greater than 63. A message is sent to the console. wide transition transition truncated value (the truncated value appears in the LSP only).
Level-1 Metric Style Level-2 Metric Style Resulting Metric Value wide transition truncated value narrow transition wide original value narrow transition narrow original value narrow transition wide transition original value narrow transition transition original value transition wide original value transition narrow original value transition wide transition original value transition narrow transition original value wide transition wide original value wide transition narrow
Figure 59. IPv6 IS-IS Sample Topography IS-IS Sample Configuration — Congruent Topology IS-IS Sample Configuration — Multi-topology IS-IS Sample Configuration — Multi-topology Transition The following is a sample configuration for enabling IPv6 IS-IS. Dell(conf-if-te-1/1/1/1)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/1 ip address 24.3.1.
exit-address-family Dell (conf-router_isis)# Dell (conf-if-te-1/1/1/1)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/1 ipv6 address 24:3::1/76 ipv6 router isis no shutdown Dell (conf-if-te-1/1/1/1)# Dell (conf-router_isis)#show config ! router isis net 34.0000.0000.AAAA.
24 Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) A link aggregation group (LAG), referred to as a port channel by the Dell Networking OS, can provide both load-sharing and port redundancy across line cards. You can enable LAGs as static or dynamic. Introduction to Dynamic LAGs and LACP A link aggregation group (LAG), referred to as a port channel by Dell Networking OS, can provide both load-sharing and port redundancy across line cards. You can enable LAGs as static or dynamic.
LACP Modes Dell Networking OS provides three modes for configuration of LACP — Off, Active, and Passive. • Off — In this state, an interface is not capable of being part of a dynamic LAG. LACP does not run on any port that is configured to be in this state. • Active — In this state, the interface is said to be in the “active negotiating state.” LACP runs on any link that is configured to be in this state.
The default is 32768. LACP Configuration Tasks The following configuration tasks apply to LACP. • Creating a LAG • Configuring the LAG Interfaces as Dynamic • Setting the LACP Long Timeout • Monitoring and Debugging LACP • Configuring Shared LAG State Tracking Creating a LAG To create a dynamic port channel (LAG), use the following command. First you define the LAG and then the LAG interfaces. • Create a dynamic port channel (LAG).
Dell(conf)#interface TenGigabitethernet 1/1/1/2 Dell(conf-if-te-1/1/1/2)#no shutdown Dell(conf-if-te-1/1/1/2)#port-channel-protocol lacp Dell(conf-if-te-1/1/1/2-lacp)#port-channel 32 mode active ...
• Debug LACP, including configuration and events. EXEC mode [no] debug lacp [config | events | pdu [in | out | [interface [in | out]]]] Shared LAG State Tracking Shared LAG state tracking provides the flexibility to bring down a port channel (LAG) based on the operational state of another LAG. At any time, only two LAGs can be a part of a group such that the fate (status) of one LAG depends on the other LAG.
Example of LAGs in the Same Failover Group Dell#config Dell(conf)#port-channel failover-group Dell(conf-po-failover-grp)#group 1 port-channel 1 port-channel 2 To view the failover group configuration, use the show running-configuration po-failover-group command. Dell#show running-config po-failover-group ! port-channel failover-group group 1 port-channel 1 port-channel 2 As shown in the following illustration, LAGs 1 and 2 are members of a failover group.
Important Points about Shared LAG State Tracking The following is more information about shared LAG state tracking. • • • • • This feature is available for static and dynamic LAGs. Only a LAG can be a member of a failover group. You can configure shared LAG state tracking on one side of a link or on both sides. If a LAG that is part of a failover group is deleted, the failover group is deleted. If a LAG moves to the Down state due to this feature, its members may still be in the Up state.
Port is part of Port-channel 10 Hardware is Force10Eth, address is 00:01:e8:06:95:c0 Current address is 00:01:e8:06:95:c0 Interface Index is 109101113 Port will not be disabled on partial SFM failure Internet address is not set MTU 1554 bytes, IP MTU 1500 bytes LineSpeed 10000 Mbit, Mode full duplex, Slave Flowcontrol rx on tx on ARP type: ARPA, ARP Timeout 04:00:00 Last clearing of "show interface" counters 00:02:11 Queueing strategy: fifo Input statistics: 132 packets, 163668 bytes 0 Vlans 0 64-byte pkts,
Figure 63.
Figure 64.
Figure 65.
Summary of the LAG Configuration on Bravo Bravo(conf-if-te-1/1/1/3)#int port-channel 10 Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#no ip add Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#switch Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#no shut Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#show config ! interface Port-channel 10 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#exit Bravo(conf)#int tengig 1/1/1/3 Bravo(conf)#no ip address Bravo(conf)#no switchport Bravo(conf)#shutdown Bravo(conf-if-te-1/1/1/3)#port-channel-protocol lacp Bravo(conf-if-te-1/1/1/3-lacp)#port-channel 10 mode a
Figure 66.
Figure 67.
Figure 68. Inspecting the LAG Status Using the show lacp command The point-to-point protocol (PPP) is a connection-oriented protocol that enables layer two links over various different physical layer connections. It is supported on both synchronous and asynchronous lines, and can operate in Half-Duplex or Full-Duplex mode. It was designed to carry IP traffic but is general enough to allow any type of network layer datagram to be sent over a PPP connection.
25 Layer 2 This chapter describes the Layer 2 features supported on the device. Manage the MAC Address Table You can perform the following management tasks in the MAC address table. • Clearing the MAC Address Table • Setting the Aging Time for Dynamic Entries • Configuring a Static MAC Address • Displaying the MAC Address Table Clearing the MAC Address Table You may clear the MAC address table of dynamic entries. To clear a MAC address table, use the following command.
Configuring a Static MAC Address A static entry is one that is not subject to aging. Enter static entries manually. To create a static MAC address entry, use the following command. • Create a static MAC address entry in the MAC address table. CONFIGURATION mode mac-address-table static Displaying the MAC Address Table To display the MAC address table, use the following command. • Display the contents of the MAC address table.
In this case, the configuration is still present in the running-config and show output. Remove the configuration before re-applying a MAC learning limit with a lower value. Also, ensure that you can view the Syslog messages on your session. NOTE: The CAM-check failure message beginning in Dell Networking OS version 8.3.1.0 is different from versions 8.2.1.
When you enable sticky mac on an interface, dynamically-learned MAC addresses do not age, even if you enabled mac-learninglimit dynamic. If you configured mac-learning-limit and mac-learning-limit dynamic and you disabled sticky MAC, any dynamically-learned MAC addresses ages. mac learning-limit station-move The mac learning-limit station-move command allows a MAC address already in the table to be learned from another interface.
Setting Station Move Violation Actions no-station-move is the default behavior. You can configure the system to take an action if a station move occurs using one the following options with the mac learning-limit command. To display a list of interfaces configured with MAC learning limit or station move violation actions, use the following commands. • Generate a system log message indicating a station move. INTERFACE mode station-move-violation log • Shut down the first port to learn the MAC address.
Disabling MAC Address Learning on the System You can configure the system to not learn MAC addresses from LACP and LLDP BPDUs. To disable source MAC address learning from LACP and LLDP BPDUs, follow this procedure: • Disable source MAC address learning from LACP BPDUs. CONFIGURATION mode • mac-address-table disable-learning lacp Disable source MAC address learning from LLDP BPDUs. CONFIGURATION mode • mac-address-table disable-learning lldp Disable source MAC address learning from LACP and LLDP BPDUs.
NOTE: If you have configured the no mac-address-table station-move refresh-arp command, traffic continues to be forwarded to the failed NIC until the ARP entry on the switch times out. Figure 70.
Figure 71. Configuring Redundant Layer 2 Pairs without Spanning Tree You configure a redundant pair by assigning a backup interface to a primary interface with the switchport backup interface command. Initially, the primary interface is active and transmits traffic and the backup interface remains down. If the primary fails for any reason, the backup transitions to an active Up state. If the primary interface fails and later comes back up, it remains as the backup interface for the redundant pair.
Important Points about Configuring Redundant Pairs • • • • You may not configure any interface to be a backup for more than one interface, no interface can have more than one backup, and a backup interface may not have a backup interface. The active or backup interface may not be a member of a LAG. The active and standby do not have to be of the same type (1G, 10G, and so on). You may not enable any Layer 2 protocol on any interface of a redundant pair or to ports connected to them.
Apr 9 00:15:13: %STKUNIT0-M:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_DN: Changed interface state to down: Po 2 Apr 9 00:15:13: %STKUNIT0-M:CP %IFMGR-5-STATE_ACT_STBY: Changed interface state to standby: Po 2 Dell(conf-if-po-1)# Dell# Dell#show interfaces switchport backup Interface Status Paired Interface Status Port-channel 1 Active Port-chato mannel 2 Standby Port-channel 2 Standby Port-channel 1 Active Dell# Dell(conf-if-po-1)#switchport backup interface tengigabitethernet 1/2/1 Apr 9 00:16:29: %STKUNIT0-M:CP %IFMGR-5-L2BKUP_
FEFD State Changes FEFD has two operational modes, Normal and Aggressive. When you enable Normal mode on an interface and a far-end failure is detected, no intervention is required to reset the interface to bring it back to an FEFD operational state. When you enable Aggressive mode on an interface in the same state, manual intervention is required to reset the interface.
Configuring FEFD You can configure FEFD for all interfaces from CONFIGURATION mode, or on individual interfaces from INTERFACE mode. To enable FEFD globally on all interfaces, use the following command. • Enable FEFD globally on all interfaces. CONFIGURATION mode fefd-global To report interval frequency and mode adjustments, use the following commands. 1 Setup two or more connected interfaces for Layer 2 or Layer 3.
fefd [mode {aggressive | normal}] • Disable FEFD protocol on one interface. INTERFACE mode fefd disable Disabling an interface shuts down all protocols working on that interface’s connected line. It does not delete your previous FEFD configuration which you can enable again at any time. To set up and activate two or more connected interfaces, use the following commands. 1 Setup two or more connected interfaces for Layer 2 or Layer 3.
2w1d22h: %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-INACTIVE: Changed Vlan interface state to inactive: Vl 1 2w1d22h : FEFD state on Te 4/1/1 changed from Bi-directional to Unknown Dell#debug fefd packets Dell#2w1d22h : FEFD packet sent via interface Te 1/1/1 Sender state -- Bi-directional Sender info -- Mgmt Mac(00:01:e8:14:89:25), Slot-Port-Subport(Te 1/1/1) Peer info -- Mgmt Mac (00:01:e8:14:89:25), Slot-Port-Subport(Te 4/1/1) Sender hold time -- 3 (second) 2w1d22h : FEFD packet received on interface Te 4/1/1 Sender state -- B
26 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) This chapter describes how to configure and use the link layer discovery protocol (LLDP). 802.1AB (LLDP) Overview LLDP — defined by IEEE 802.1AB — is a protocol that enables a local area network (LAN) device to advertise its configuration and receive configuration information from adjacent LLDP-enabled LAN infrastructure devices.
Table 46. Type, Length, Value (TLV) Types Type TLV Description 0 End of LLDPDU Marks the end of an LLDPDU. 1 Chassis ID An administratively assigned name that identifies the LLDP agent. 2 Port ID An administratively assigned name that identifies a port through which TLVs are sent and received. 3 Time to Live An administratively assigned name that identifies a port through which TLVs are sent and received.
Figure 75. Organizationally Specific TLV IEEE Organizationally Specific TLVs Eight TLV types have been defined by the IEEE 802.1 and 802.3 working groups as a basic part of LLDP; the IEEE OUI is 00-80-C2. You can configure the Dell Networking system to advertise any or all of these TLVs. Table 47. Optional TLV Types Type TLV Description 4 Port description A user-defined alphanumeric string that describes the port. Dell Networking OS does not currently support this TLV.
Type TLV Description LLDP, but is available and mandatory (nonconfigurable) in the LLDP-MED implementation. 127 Link Aggregation Indicates whether the link is capable of being aggregated, whether it is currently in a LAG, and the port identification of the LAG. Dell Networking OS does not currently support this TLV. 127 Maximum Frame Size Indicates the maximum frame size capability of the MAC and PHY.
Type SubType TLV Description • LLDP device class 127 2 Network Policy Indicates the application type, VLAN ID, Layer 2 Priority, and DSCP value. 127 3 Location Identification Indicates that the physical location of the device expressed in one of three possible formats: • • • 127 4 Inventory Management TLVs Implementation of this set of TLVs is optional in LLDP-MED devices. None or all TLVs must be supported. Dell Networking OS does not currently support these TLVs.
When you enable LLDP-MED in Dell Networking OS (using the advertise med command), the system begins transmitting this TLV. Figure 76. LLDP-MED Capabilities TLV Table 49. Dell Networking OS LLDP-MED Capabilities Bit Position TLV Dell Networking OS Support 0 LLDP-MED Capabilities Yes 1 Network Policy Yes 2 Location Identification Yes 3 Extended Power via MDI-PSE Yes 4 Extended Power via MDI-PD No 5 Inventory No 6–15 reserved No Table 50.
NOTE: As shown in the following table, signaling is a series of control packets that are exchanged between an endpoint device and a network connectivity device to establish and maintain a connection. These signal packets might require a different network policy than the media packets for which a connection is made. In this case, configure the signaling application. Table 51.
• Power Value — Dell Networking advertises the maximum amount of power that can be supplied on the port. By default the power is 15.4W, which corresponds to a power value of 130, based on the TIA-1057 specification. You can advertise a different power value using the max-milliwatts option with the power inline auto | static command. Dell Networking also honors the power value (power requirement) the powered device sends when the port is configured for power inline auto. Figure 78.
• Configurations made at the INTERFACE level affect only the specific interface; they override CONFIGURATION level configurations.
Enabling LLDP on Management Ports LLDP on management ports is enabled by default. To enable LLDP on management ports, use the following command. 1 Enter Protocol LLDP mode. CONFIGURATION mode protocol lldp 2 Enter LLDP management-interface mode. LLDP-MANAGEMENT-INTERFACE mode management-interface 3 Enable LLDP. PROTOCOL LLDP mode no disable Disabling and Undoing LLDP on Management Ports To disable or undo LLDP on management ports, use the following command. 1 Enter Protocol LLDP mode.
advertise {dcbx-appln-tlv | dcbx-tlv | dot3-tlv | interface-port-desc | management-tlv | med } Include the keyword for each TLV you want to advertise. • For management TLVs: system-capabilities, system-description. • For 802.1 TLVs: port-protocol-vlan-id, port-vlan-id . • For 802.3 TLVs: max-frame-size.
advertise dot1-tlv port-protocol-vlan-id port-vlan-id advertise dot3-tlv max-frame-size advertise management-tlv system-capabilities system-description hello 10 no disable Dell(conf-lldp)# Dell(conf-lldp)#exit Dell(conf)#interface tengigabitethernet 1/1/5/1 Dell(conf-if-te-1/1/5/1)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/5/1 no ip address switchport no shutdown Dell(conf-if-te-1/1/5/1)#protocol lldp Dell(conf-if-te-1/1/5/1-lldp)#show config ! protocol lldp Dell(conf-if-te-1/1/5/1-lldp)# Viewing Info
Remote MTU: 1554 Remote System Desc: Dell Networks Real Time Operating System Software Dell Operating System Version: 1.0. Dell Application Software Version: 9.8(1.0).
• Receive only. CONFIGURATION mode or INTERFACE mode • mode rx Return to the default setting.
R1(conf-lldp)#multiplier ? <2-10> Multiplier (default=4) R1(conf-lldp)#multiplier 5 R1(conf-lldp)#show config ! protocol lldp advertise dot1-tlv port-protocol-vlan-id port-vlan-id advertise dot3-tlv max-frame-size advertise management-tlv system-capabilities system-description multiplier 5 no disable R1(conf-lldp)#no multiplier R1(conf-lldp)#show config ! protocol lldp advertise dot1-tlv port-protocol-vlan-id port-vlan-id advertise dot3-tlv max-frame-size advertise management-tlv system-capabilities system-
Figure 80. The debug lldp detail Command — LLDPDU Packet Dissection Relevant Management Objects Dell Networking OS supports all IEEE 802.1AB MIB objects. The following tables list the objects associated with: • received and transmitted TLVs • the LLDP configuration on the local agent • IEEE 802.1AB Organizationally Specific TLVs • received and transmitted LLDP-MED TLVs Table 52.
MIB Object Category LLDP Variable LLDP MIB Object Description Basic TLV Selection mibBasicTLVsTxEnable lldpPortConfigTLVsTxEnable Indicates which management TLVs are enabled for system ports. mibMgmtAddrInstanceTxEnable lldpManAddrPortsTxEnable The management addresses defined for the system and the ports through which they are enabled for transmission.
TLV Type TLV Name TLV Variable System LLDP MIB Object 7 System Capabilities system capabilities Local lldpLocSysCapSupported Remote lldpRemSysCapSupported Local lldpLocSysCapEnabled Remote lldpRemSysCapEnabled Local lldpLocManAddrLen Remote lldpRemManAddrLen Local lldpLocManAddrSubtype Remote lldpRemManAddrSubtype Local lldpLocManAddr Remote lldpRemManAddr Local lldpLocManAddrIfSubtype Remote lldpRemManAddrIfSubtype Local lldpLocManAddrIfId Remote lldpRemManAddrIfId Local
TLV Type TLV Name TLV Variable System LLDP MIB Object VLAN name Local lldpXdot1LocVlanName Remote lldpXdot1RemVlanName Table 55.
TLV Sub-Type TLV Name TLV Variable Location ID Data 512 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) System LLDP-MED MIB Object Remote lldpXMedRemLocationSubt ype Local lldpXMedLocLocationInfo Remote lldpXMedRemLocationInfo
27 Microsoft Network Load Balancing Network load balancing (NLB) is a clustering functionality that is implemented by Microsoft on Windows 2000 Server and Windows Server 2003 operating systems (OSs). NLB uses a distributed methodology or pattern to equally split and balance the network traffic load across a set of servers that are part of the cluster or group.
With Multicast NLB mode, the data forwards to all the servers based on the port specified using the following Layer 2 multicast command in CONFIGURATION MODE: mac-address-table static multicast vlan output-range , Limitations of the NLB Feature The following limitations apply to switches on which you configure NLB: • The NLB Unicast mode uses switch flooding to transmit all packets to all the servers that are part of the VLAN.
• Enter the ip vlan-flooding command to specify that all Layer 3 unicast routed data traffic going through a VLAN member port floods across all the member ports of that VLAN. CONFIGURATION mode ip vlan-flooding There might be some ARP table entries that are resolved through ARP packets, which had the Ethernet MAC SA different from the MAC information inside the ARP packet. This unicast data traffic flooding occurs only for those packets that use these ARP entries.
28 Multicast Source Discovery Protocol (MSDP) Multicast source discovery protocol (MSDP) is supported on Dell Networking OS. Protocol Overview MSDP is a Layer 3 protocol that connects IPv4 protocol-independent multicast-sparse mode (PIM-SM) domains. A domain in the context of MSDP is a contiguous set of routers operating PIM within a common boundary defined by an exterior gateway protocol, such as border gateway protocol (BGP).
RPs advertise each (S,G) in its domain in type, length, value (TLV) format. The total number of TLVs contained in the SA is indicated in the “Entry Count” field. SA messages are transmitted every 60 seconds, and immediately when a new source is detected. Figure 82.
With Anycast RP, all the RPs are configured to be MSDP peers of each other. When a source registers with one RP, an SA message is sent to the other RPs informing them that there is an active source for a particular multicast group. The result is that each RP is aware of the active sources in the area of the other RPs. If any of the RPs fail, IP routing converges and one of the RPs becomes the active RP in more than one area. New sources register with the backup RP.
Figure 83.
Figure 84.
Figure 85.
Figure 86. Configuring MSDP Enable MSDP Enable MSDP by peering RPs in different administrative domains. 1 Enable MSDP. CONFIGURATION mode ip multicast-msdp 2 Peer PIM systems in different administrative domains. CONFIGURATION mode ip msdp peer connect-source Examples of Configuring and Viewing MSDP R3(conf)#ip multicast-msdp R3(conf)#ip msdp peer 192.168.0.
R3(conf)#do show ip msdp summary Peer Addr Description Local Addr State Source SA Up/Down To view details about a peer, use the show ip msdp peer command in EXEC privilege mode. Multicast sources in remote domains are stored on the RP in the source-active cache (SA cache). The system does not create entries in the multicast routing table until there is a local receiver for the corresponding multicast group. R3#show ip msdp peer Peer Addr: 192.168.0.1 Local Addr: 192.168.0.
show ip msdp sa-limit If the total number of active sources is already larger than the limit when limiting is applied, the sources that are already in Dell Networking OS are not discarded. To enforce the limit in such a situation, use the clear ip msdp sa-cache command to clear all existing entries. Clearing the Source-Active Cache To clear the source-active cache, use the following command. • Clear the SA cache of all, local, or rejected entries, or entries for a specific group.
Figure 87.
Figure 88.
Figure 89. MSDP Default Peer, Scenario 4 Specifying Source-Active Messages To specify messages, use the following command. • Specify the forwarding-peer and originating-RP from which all active sources are accepted without regard for the RPF check. CONFIGURATION mode ip msdp default-peer ip-address list If you do not specify an access list, the peer accepts all sources that peer advertises. All sources from RPs that the ACL denies are subject to the normal RPF check.
GroupAddr 229.0.50.2 229.0.50.3 229.0.50.4 SourceAddr 24.0.50.2 24.0.50.3 24.0.50.4 RPAddr 200.0.0.50 200.0.0.50 200.0.0.50 LearnedFrom 10.0.50.2 10.0.50.2 10.0.50.2 Dell#ip msdp sa-cache rejected-sa MSDP Rejected SA Cache 3 rejected SAs received, cache-size 32766 UpTime GroupAddr SourceAddr RPAddr 00:33:18 229.0.50.64 24.0.50.64 200.0.1.50 00:33:18 229.0.50.65 24.0.50.65 200.0.1.50 00:33:18 229.0.50.66 24.0.50.66 200.0.1.50 Expire 73 73 73 UpTime 00:13:49 00:13:49 00:13:49 LearnedFrom 10.0.50.2 10.
R1_E600(conf)#do show ip msdp sa-cache R1_E600(conf)#do show ip msdp sa-cache rejected-sa MSDP Rejected SA Cache 1 rejected SAs received, cache-size 1000 UpTime GroupAddr SourceAddr RPAddr LearnedFrom 00:02:20 239.0.0.1 10.11.4.2 192.168.0.1 local Reason Redistribute Preventing MSDP from Caching a Remote Source To prevent MSDP from caching a remote source, use the following commands. 1 OPTIONAL: Cache sources that the SA filter denies in the rejected SA cache.
Example of Verifying the System is not Advertising Local Sources In the following example, R1 stops advertising source 10.11.4.2. Because it is already in the SA cache of R3, the entry remains there until it expires. [Router 1] R1(conf)#do show run msdp ! ip multicast-msdp ip msdp peer 192.168.0.3 connect-source Loopback 0 ip msdp sa-filter out 192.168.0.3 list mylocalfilter R1(conf)#do show run acl ! ip access-list extended mylocalfilter seq 5 deny ip host 239.0.0.1 host 10.11.4.
Output (S,G) filter: none [Router 1] R1(conf)#do show ip msdp peer Peer Addr: 192.168.0.3 Local Addr: 0.0.0.0(0) Connect Source: Lo 0 State: Inactive Up/Down Time: 00:00:03 Timers: KeepAlive 30 sec, Hold time 75 sec SourceActive packet count (in/out): 0/0 SAs learned from this peer: 0 SA Filtering: Clearing Peer Statistics To clear the peer statistics, use the following command. • Reset the TCP connection to the peer and clear all peer statistics.
03:17:10 : MSDP-0: Peer 192.168.0.3, 03:17:27 : MSDP-0: Peer 192.168.0.3, Input (S,G) filter: none Output (S,G) filter: none rcvd Keepalive msg sent Source Active msg MSDP with Anycast RP Anycast RP uses MSDP with PIM-SM to allow more than one active group to use RP mapping.
Figure 90. MSDP with Anycast RP Configuring Anycast RP To configure anycast RP, use the following commands. 1 In each routing domain that has multiple RPs serving a group, create a Loopback interface on each RP serving the group with the same IP address. CONFIGURATION mode interface loopback 2 Make this address the RP for the group.
4 Peer each RP with every other RP using MSDP, specifying the unique Loopback address as the connect-source. CONFIGURATION mode ip msdp peer 5 Advertise the network of each of the unique Loopback addresses throughout the network. ROUTER OSPF mode network Reducing Source-Active Message Flooding RPs flood source-active messages to all of their peers away from the RP.
interface Loopback 1 ip address 192.168.0.11/32 no shutdown ! router ospf 1 network 10.11.2.0/24 area 0 network 10.11.1.0/24 area 0 network 10.11.3.0/24 area 0 network 192.168.0.11/32 area 0 ! ip multicast-msdp ip msdp peer 192.168.0.3 connect-source Loopback 1 ip msdp peer 192.168.0.22 connect-source Loopback 1 ip msdp mesh-group AS100 192.168.0.22 ip msdp originator-id Loopback 1! ip pim rp-address 192.168.0.1 group-address 224.0.0.
The following example shows an R3 configuration for MSDP with Anycast RP. ip multicast-routing ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/4/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.0.32/24 no shutdown interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/5/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.6.34/24 no shutdown ! interface Loopback 0 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 192.168.0.3/32 no shutdown ! router ospf 1 network 10.11.6.0/24 area 0 network 192.168.0.
interface Loopback 0 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 192.168.0.1/32 no shutdown ! router ospf 1 network 10.11.2.0/24 area 0 network 10.11.1.0/24 area 0 network 192.168.0.1/32 area 0 network 10.11.3.0/24 area 0 ! ip multicast-msdp ip msdp peer 192.168.0.3 connect-source Loopback 0 ! ip pim rp-address 192.168.0.1 group-address 224.0.0.0/4 MSDP Sample Configuration: R2 Running-Config ip multicast-routing ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.4.
ip address 10.11.6.34/24 no shutdown ! interface ManagementEthernet 1/1 ip address 10.11.80.3/24 no shutdown ! interface Loopback 0 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 192.168.0.3/32 no shutdown ! router ospf 1 network 10.11.6.0/24 area 0 network 192.168.0.3/32 area 0 redistribute static redistribute connected redistribute bgp 200 ! router bgp 200 redistribute ospf 1 neighbor 192.168.0.2 remote-as 100 neighbor 192.168.0.2 ebgp-multihop 255 neighbor 192.168.0.2 update-source Loopback 0 neighbor 192.168.0.
29 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) Multiple spanning tree protocol (MSTP) — specified in IEEE 802.1Q-2003 — is a rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP)-based spanning tree variation that improves per-VLAN spanning tree plus (PVST+). MSTP allows multiple spanning tree instances and allows you to map many VLANs to one spanning tree instance to reduce the total number of required instances. Protocol Overview MSTP — specified in IEEE 802.
• Enable Multiple Spanning Tree Globally • Adding and Removing Interfaces • Creating Multiple Spanning Tree Instances • Influencing MSTP Root Selection • Interoperate with Non-Dell Bridges • Changing the Region Name or Revision • Modifying Global Parameters • Modifying the Interface Parameters • Configuring an EdgePort • Flush MAC Addresses after a Topology Change • MSTP Sample Configurations • Debugging and Verifying MSTP Configurations Spanning Tree Variations The Dell Networking O
Related Configuration Tasks The following are the related configuration tasks for MSTP.
• spanning-tree 0 To remove an interface from the MSTP topology, use the no spanning-tree 0 command. Creating Multiple Spanning Tree Instances To create multiple spanning tree instances, use the following command. A single MSTI provides no more benefit than RSTP. To take full advantage of MSTP, create multiple MSTIs and map VLANs to them. • Create an MSTI. PROTOCOL MSTP mode msti Specify the keyword vlan then the VLANs that you want to participate in the MSTI.
Example of Assigning and Verifying the Root Bridge Priority By default, the simple configuration shown previously yields the same forwarding path for both MSTIs. The following example shows how R3 is assigned bridge priority 0 for MSTI 2, which elects a different root bridge than MSTI 2. To view the bridge priority, use the show config command from PROTOCOL MSTP mode. R3(conf-mstp)#msti 2 bridge-priority 0 1d2h51m: %RPM0-P:RP2 %SPANMGR-5-STP_ROOT_CHANGE: MSTP root changed for instance 2.
Modifying Global Parameters The root bridge sets the values for forward-delay, hello-time, max-age, and max-hops and overwrites the values set on other MSTP bridges. • Forward-delay — the amount of time an interface waits in the Listening state and the Learning state before it transitions to the Forwarding state. • Hello-time — the time interval in which the bridge sends MSTP bridge protocol data units (BPDUs).
Example of the forward-delay Parameter To view the current values for MSTP parameters, use the show running-config spanning-tree mstp command from EXEC privilege mode.
For the default, refer to the default values shown in the table.. 2 Change the port priority of an interface. INTERFACE mode spanning-tree msti number priority priority The range is from 0 to 240, in increments of 16. The default is 128. To view the current values for these interface parameters, use the show config command from INTERFACE mode. Configuring an EdgePort The EdgePort feature enables interfaces to begin forwarding traffic approximately 30 seconds sooner.
Flush MAC Addresses after a Topology Change Dell Networking OS has an optimized MAC address flush mechanism for RSTP, MSTP, and PVST+ that flushes addresses only when necessary, which allows for faster convergence during topology changes. However, you may activate the flushing mechanism defined by 802.1Q-2003 using the tc-flush-standard command, which flushes MAC addresses after every topology change notification.
no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/2 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! (Step 3) interface Vlan 100 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/1,1/1/1/2 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 200 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/1,1/1/1/2 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 300 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/1,1/1/1/2 no shutdown Router 2 Running-Configuration This example uses the following steps: 1 Enable MSTP globally and set the region name and
(Step 2) interface 1/0/31 no shutdown spanning-tree port mode enable switchport protected 0 exit interface 1/0/32 no shutdown spanning-tree port mode enable switchport protected 0 exit (Step 3) interface vlan 100 tagged 1/0/31 tagged 1/0/32 exit interface vlan 200 tagged 1/0/31 tagged 1/0/32 exit interface vlan 300 tagged 1/0/31 tagged 1/0/32 exit Debugging and Verifying MSTP Configurations To debut and verify MSTP configuration, use the following commands. • Display BPDUs.
• • Is the Region name blank? That may mean that a name was configured on one router and but was not configured or was configured differently on another router (spelling and capitalization counts). MSTP Instances. • To verify the VLAN to MSTP instance mapping, use the show commands. • Are there “extra” MSTP instances in the Sending or Received logs? This may mean that an additional MSTP instance was configured on one router but not the others.
30 Multicast Features NOTE: Multicast routing is supported on secondary IP addresses; it is not supported on IPv6. NOTE: Multicast routing is supported across default and non-default virtual routing and forwarding (VRFs).
Protocol Ethernet Address VRRP 01:00:5e:00:00:12 PIM-SM 01:00:5e:00:00:0d • The Dell Networking OS implementation of MTRACE is in accordance with IETF draft draft-fenner-traceroute-ipm. • Multicast is not supported on secondary IP addresses. • If you enable multicast routing, egress Layer 3 ACL is not applied to multicast data traffic. Multicast Policies The Dell Networking OS supports multicast features for IPv4. IPv4 Multicast Policies The following sections describe IPv4 multicast policies.
NOTE: The IN-L3-McastFib CAM partition stores multicast routes and is a separate hardware limit that exists per port-pipe. Any software-configured limit may supersede this hardware space limitation. The opposite is also true, the CAM partition might not be exhausted at the time the system-wide route limit is reached using the ip multicast-limit command.
Figure 93. Preventing a Host from Joining a Group The following table lists the location and description shown in the previous illustration. Table 58. Preventing a Host from Joining a Group — Description Location Description 1/21/1 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/21/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.1/24 no shutdown 1/31/1 • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/31/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.13.
Location Description • no shutdown 2/1/1 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/1/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.1.1/24 no shutdown 2/11/1 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/11/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.2/24 no shutdown 2/31/1 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/31/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.23.1/24 no shutdown 3/1/1 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/1/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.5.
Preventing a PIM Router from Forming an Adjacency To prevent a router from participating in PIM (for example, to configure stub multicast routing), use the following command. • Prevent a router from participating in PIM. INTERFACE mode ip pim neighbor-filter Setting a Threshold for Switching to the SPT The functionality to specify a threshold for switchover to the shortest path trees (SPTs) is available on the system.
Figure 94. Preventing a Source from Transmitting to a Group The following table lists the location and description shown in the previous illustration. Table 60. Preventing a Source from Transmitting to a Group — Description Location Description 1/21/1 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/21/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.1/24 no shutdown 1/31/1 • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/31/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.13.
Location Description • no shutdown 2/1/1 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/1/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.1.1/24 no shutdown 2/11/1 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/11/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.2/24 no shutdown 2/31/1 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/31 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.23.1/24 no shutdown 3/1/1 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/1/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.5.
Preventing a PIM Router from Processing a Join To permit or deny PIM Join/Prune messages on an interface using an extended IP access list, use the following command. NOTE: Dell Networking recommends not using the ip pim join-filter command on an interface between a source and the RP router. Using this command in this scenario could cause problems with the PIM-SM source registration process resulting in excessive traffic being sent to the CPU of both the RP and PIM DR of the source.
31 Object Tracking IPv4 or IPv6 object tracking is available on Dell Networking OS. Object tracking allows the Dell Networking OS client processes, such as virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP), to monitor tracked objects (for example, interface or link status) and take appropriate action when the state of an object changes. NOTE: In Dell Networking OS release version 8.4.1.0, object tracking is supported only on VRRP.
Figure 95. Object Tracking Example When you configure a tracked object, such as an IPv4/IPv6 a route or interface, you specify an object number to identify the object. Optionally, you can also specify: • UP and DOWN thresholds used to report changes in a route metric. • A time delay before changes in a tracked object’s state are reported to a client. Track Layer 2 Interfaces You can create an object to track the line-protocol state of a Layer 2 interface.
Track IPv4 and IPv6 Routes You can create an object that tracks an IPv4 or IPv6 route entry in the routing table. Specify a tracked route by its IPv4 or IPv6 address and prefix-length. Optionally specify a tracked route by a virtual routing and forwarding (VRF) instance name if the route to be tracked is part of a VRF. The next-hop address is not part of the definition of the tracked object.
Set Tracking Delays You can configure an optional UP and/or DOWN timer for each tracked object to set the time delay before a change in the state of a tracked object is communicated to clients. The configured time delay starts when the state changes from UP to DOWN or the opposite way. If the state of an object changes back to its former UP/DOWN state before the timer expires, the timer is cancelled and the client is not notified.
To configure object tracking on the status of a Layer 2 interface, use the following commands. 1 Configure object tracking on the line-protocol state of a Layer 2 interface. CONFIGURATION mode track object-id interface interface line-protocol Valid object IDs are from 1 to 65535. 2 (Optional) Configure the time delay used before communicating a change in the status of a tracked interface. OBJECT TRACKING mode delay {[up seconds] [down seconds]} Valid delay times are from 0 to 180 seconds.
• The Layer 3 status of an IPv4 interface goes DOWN when its Layer 2 status goes down (for a Layer 3 VLAN, all VLAN ports must be down) or the IP address is removed from the routing table. For an IPv6 interface, a routing object only tracks the UP/DOWN status of the specified IPv6 interface (the track interface ipv6routing command). • The status of an IPv6 interface is UP only if the Layer 2 status of the interface is UP and the interface has a valid IPv6 address.
Track 103 Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/2/1 ipv6 routing Description: Austin access point Track an IPv4/IPv6 Route You can create an object that tracks the reachability or metric of an IPv4 or IPv6 route. You specify the route to be tracked by its address and prefix-length values. Optionally, for an IPv4 route, you can enter a VRF instance name if the route is part of a VPN routing and forwarding (VRF) table. The next-hop address is not part of the definition of a tracked IPv4/ IPv6 route.
Tracking Route Reachability Use the following commands to configure object tracking on the reachability of an IPv4 or IPv6 route. To remove object tracking, use the no track object-id command. 1 Configure object tracking on the reachability of an IPv4 or IPv6 route. CONFIGURATION mode track object-id {ip route ip-address/prefix-len | ipv6 route ipv6-address/prefix-len} reachability [vrf vrf-name] Valid object IDs are from 1 to 65535.
The following example configures object tracking on the reachability of an IPv6 route: Dell(conf)#track 105 ipv6 route 1234::/64 reachability Dell(conf-track-105)#delay down 5 Dell(conf-track-105)#description Headquarters Dell(conf-track-105)#end Dell#show track 105 Track 105 IPv6 route 1234::/64 reachability Description: Headquarters Reachability is Down (route not in route table) 2 changes, last change 00:03:03 Tracking a Metric Threshold Use the following commands to configure object tracking on the met
threshold metric {[up number] [down number]} The default UP threshold is 254. The routing state is UP if the scaled route metric is less than or equal to the UP threshold. The defult DOWN threshold is 255. The routing state is DOWN if the scaled route metric is greater than or equal to the DOWN threshold. 6 (Optional) Display the tracking configuration.
First-hop interface is TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/2/1 Tracked by: VRRP TenGigabitEthernet 2/30/1 IPv6 VRID 1 Track 3 IPv6 route 2050::/64 reachability Reachability is Up (STATIC) 5 changes, last change 00:02:16 First-hop interface is TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/2/1 Tracked by: VRRP TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/4/1 IPv6 VRID 1 Track 4 Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/5/1 ip routing IP routing is Up 3 changes, last change 00:03:30 Tracked by: Example of the show track brief Command Router# show track brief ResId State 1 Re
32 Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3) Open shortest path first (OSPFv2 for IPv4) and OSPF version 3 (OSPF for IPv6) are supported on Dell Networking OS. This chapter provides a general description of OSPFv2 (OSPF for IPv4) and OSPFv3 (OSPF for IPv6) as supported in the Dell Networking Operating System (OS). NOTE: The fundamental mechanisms of OSPF (flooding, DR election, area support, SPF calculations, and so on) are the same between OSPFv2 and OSPFv3.
Areas allow you to further organize your routers within in the AS. One or more areas are required within the AS. Areas are valuable in that they allow sub-networks to "hide" within the AS, thus minimizing the size of the routing tables on all routers. An area within the AS may not see the details of another area’s topology. AS areas are known by their area number or the router’s IP address. Figure 96. Autonomous System Areas Area Types The backbone of the network is Area 0. It is also called Area 0.0.0.
• A not-so-stubby area (NSSA) can import AS external route information and send it to the backbone. It cannot receive external AS information from the backbone or other areas. • Totally stubby areas are referred to as no summary areas in the Dell Networking OS. Networks and Neighbors As a link-state protocol, OSPF sends routing information to other OSPF routers concerning the state of the links between them. The state (up or down) of those links is important.
Figure 97. OSPF Routing Examples Backbone Router (BR) A backbone router (BR) is part of the OSPF Backbone, Area 0. This includes all ABRs. It can also include any routers that connect only to the backbone and another ABR, but are only part of Area 0, such as Router I in the previous example. Area Border Router (ABR) Within an AS, an area border router (ABR) connects one or more areas to the backbone.
An ABR can connect to many areas in an AS, and is considered a member of each area it connects to. Autonomous System Border Router (ASBR) The autonomous system border area router (ASBR) connects to more than one AS and exchanges information with the routers in other ASs. Generally, the ASBR connects to a non-interior gate protocol (IGP) such as BGP or uses static routes.
• Type 7: External LSA — Routers in an NSSA do not receive external LSAs from ABRs, but are allowed to send external routing information for redistribution. They use Type 7 LSAs to tell the ABRs about these external routes, which the ABR then translates to Type 5 external LSAs and floods as normal to the rest of the OSPF network. • Type 8: Link LSA (OSPFv3) — This LSA carries the IPv6 address information of the local links.
Figure 98. Priority and Cost Examples OSPF with Dell Networking OS The Dell Networking OS supports up to 128,000 OSPF routes for OSPFv2. Dell Networking OS version 9.4(0.0) and later support only one OSPFv2 process per VRF. Dell Networking OS version 9.7(0.0) and later support OSPFv3 in VRF. Also, on OSPFv3, Dell Networking OS supports only one OSPFv3 process per VRF. OSPFv2 and OSPFv3 can co-exist but you must configure them individually.
Graceful Restart When a router goes down without a graceful restart, there is a possibility for loss of access to parts of the network due to ongoing network topology changes. Additionally, LSA flooding and reconvergence can cause substantial delays. It is, therefore, desirable that the network maintains a stable topology if it is possible for data flow to continue uninterrupted.
Fast Convergence (OSPFv2, IPv4 Only) Fast convergence allows you to define the speeds at which LSAs are originated and accepted, and reduce OSPFv2 end-to-end convergence time. Dell Networking OS allows you to accept and originate LSAs as soon as they are available to speed up route information propagation. NOTE: The faster the convergence, the more frequent the route calculations and updates. This impacts CPU utilization and may impact adjacency stability in larger topologies.
ACKs 2 (shown in bold) is printed only for ACK packets. The following example shows no change in the updated packets (shown in bold). ACKs 2 (shown in bold) is printed only for ACK packets. 00:10:41 : OSPF(1000:00): Rcv. v:2 t:5(LSAck) l:64 Acks 2 rid:2.2.2.2 aid:1500 chk:0xdbee aut:0 auk: keyid:0 from:Vl 1000 LSType:Type-5 AS External id:160.1.1.0 adv:6.1.0.0 seq:0x8000000c LSType:Type-5 AS External id:160.1.2.0 adv:6.1.0.0 seq:0x8000000c 00:10:41 : OSPF(1000:00): Rcv. v:2 t:5(LSAck) l:64 Acks 2 rid:2.2.2.
Examples of Setting and Viewing a Dead Interval In the following example, the dead interval is set at 4x the hello interval (shown in bold). Dell(conf)#int tengigabitethernet 1/1/1/1 Dell(conf-if-te-1/1/1/1)#ip ospf hello-interval 20 Dell(conf-if-te-1/1/1/1)#ip ospf dead-interval 80 Dell(conf-if-te-1/1/1/1)# In the following example, the dead interval is set at 4x the hello interval (shown in bold).
• Troubleshooting OSPFv2 1 Configure a physical interface. Assign an IP address, physical or Loopback, to the interface to enable Layer 3 routing. 2 Enable OSPF globally. Assign network area and neighbors. 3 Add interfaces or configure other attributes. 4 Set the time interval between when the switch receives a topology change and starts a shortest path first (SPF) calculation.
After the OSPF process and the VRF are tied together, the OSPF process ID cannot be used again in the system. If you try to enter an OSPF process ID, or if you try to enable more OSPF processes than available Layer 3 interfaces, prior to assigning an IP address to an interface and setting the no shutdown command, the following message displays: Dell(conf)#router ospf 1 % Error: No router ID available. Assigning a Router ID In CONFIGURATION ROUTER OSPF mode, assign the router ID.
network ip-address mask area area-id The IP Address Format is A.B.C.D/M. The area ID range is from 0 to 65535 or A.B.C.D/M. Enable OSPFv2 on Interfaces Enable and configure OSPFv2 on each interface (configure for Layer 3 protocol), and not shutdown. You can also assign OSPFv2 to a Loopback interface as a virtual interface. OSPF functions and features, such as MD5 Authentication, Grace Period, Authentication Wait Time, are assigned on a per interface basis.
Backup Designated Router (ID) 11.1.2.1, Interface address 10.2.3.1 Timer intervals configured, Hello 10, Dead 40, Wait 40, Retransmit 5 Hello due in 00:00:05 Neighbor Count is 1, Adjacent neighbor count is 1 Adjacent with neighbor 13.1.1.1 (Designated Router) Dell> Loopback interfaces also help the OSPF process. OSPF picks the highest interface address as the router-id and a Loopback interface address has a higher precedence than other interface addresses.
Use the keywords no-summary to prevent transmission into the area of summary ASBR LSAs. Area ID is the number or IP address assigned when creating the area. Example of the show ip ospf database database-summary Command To view which LSAs are transmitted, use the show ip ospf database process-id database-summary command in EXEC Privilege mode. Dell#show ip ospf 34 database database-summary OSPF Router with ID (10.1.2.100) (Process ID 34) Area 2.2.2.2 3.3.3.
Transmit Delay is 1 sec, State DOWN, Priority 1 Designated Router (ID) 10.1.2.100, Interface address 0.0.0.0 Backup Designated Router (ID) 0.0.0.0, Interface address 0.0.0.0 Timer intervals configured, Hello 10, Dead 40, Wait 40, Retransmit 5 Hello due in 13:39:46 Neighbor Count is 0, Adjacent neighbor count is 0 TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/2 is up, line protocol is down Internet Address 10.1.3.100/24, Area 2.2.2.2 Process ID 34, Router ID 10.1.2.
The following examples shows how to disable fast-convergence. Dell#(conf-router_ospf-1)#no fast-converge Dell#(conf-router_ospf-1)#ex Dell#(conf)#ex Dell##show ip ospf 1 Routing Process ospf 1 with ID 192.168.67.
• Change the priority of the interface, which is used to determine the Designated Router for the OSPF broadcast network. CONFIG-INTERFACE mode ip ospf priority number • • number: the range is from 0 to 255 (the default is 1). Change the retransmission interval between LSAs. CONFIG-INTERFACE mode ip ospf retransmit-interval seconds • • seconds: the range is from 1 to 65535 (the default is 5 seconds). The retransmit interval must be the same on all routers in the OSPF network.
• All neighboring routers must share password to exchange OSPF information. Set the authentication change wait time in seconds between 0 and 300 for the interface. CONFIG-INTERFACE mode ip ospf auth-change-wait-time seconds This setting is the amount of time OSPF has available to change its interface authentication type. When you configure the auth-change-wait-time, OSPF sends out only the old authentication scheme until the wait timer expires.
graceful-restart role [helper-only | restart-only] Dell Networking OS supports the following options: • Helper-only: the OSPFv2 router supports graceful-restart only as a helper router. • Restart-only: the OSPFv2 router supports graceful-restart only during unplanned restarts. By default, OSPFv2 supports both restarting and helper roles. Selecting one or the other role restricts OSPFv2 to the single selected role.
Applying Prefix Lists To apply prefix lists to incoming or outgoing OSPF routes, use the following commands. • Apply a configured prefix list to incoming OSPF routes. CONFIG-ROUTEROSPF-id mode distribute-list prefix-list-name in [interface] • Assign a configured prefix list to outgoing OSPF routes. CONFIG-ROUTEROSPF-id distribute-list prefix-list-name out [connected | isis | rip | static] Redistributing Routes You can add routes from other routing instances or protocols to the OSPF process.
• Have you enabled OSPF globally? • Is the OSPF process active on the interface? • Are adjacencies established correctly? • Are the interfaces configured for Layer 3 correctly? • Is the router in the correct area type? • Have the routes been included in the OSPF database? • Have the OSPF routes been included in the routing table (not just the OSPF database)? Some useful troubleshooting commands are: • show interfaces • show protocols • debug IP OSPF events and/or packets • show neighbor
Example of Viewing OSPF Configuration Dell#show run ospf ! router ospf 4 router-id 4.4.4.4 network 4.4.4.0/28 area 1 ! ipv6 router ospf 999 default-information originate always router-id 10.10.10.10 Dell# Sample Configurations for OSPFv2 The following configurations are examples for enabling OSPFv2. These examples are not comprehensive directions. They are intended to give you some guidance with typical configurations. You can copy and paste from these examples to your CLI.
interface Loopback 10 ip address 192.168.100.100/24 no shutdown OSPF Area 0 — Te 3/1 and 3/2 router ospf 33333 network 192.168.100.0/24 area 0 network 10.0.13.0/24 area 0 network 10.0.23.0/24 area 0 ! interface Loopback 30 ip address 192.168.100.100/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/1 ip address 10.1.13.3/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/2/1 ip address 10.2.13.3/24 no shutdown OSPF Area 0 — Te 2/1 and 2/2 router ospf 22222 network 192.168.100.0/24 area 0 network 10.2.21.
Enable OSPFv3 for IPv6 by specifying an OSPF process ID and an area in INTERFACE mode. If you have not created an OSPFv3 process, it is created automatically. All IPv6 addresses configured on the interface are included in the specified OSPF process. NOTE: IPv6 and OSPFv3 do not support Multi-Process OSPF. You can only enable a single OSPFv3 process. To create multiple OSPF processes you need to have multiple VRFs on a switch.
Assigning Area ID on an Interface To assign the OSPFv3 process to an interface, use the following command. The ipv6 ospf area command enables OSPFv3 on an interface and places the interface in the specified area. Additionally, the command creates the OSPFv3 process with ID on the router. OSPFv2 requires two commands to accomplish the same tasks — the router ospf command to create the OSPF process, then the network area command to enable OSPFv2 on an interface.
Assigning OSPFv3 Process ID and Router ID to a VRF To assign, disable, or reset OSPFv3 on a non-default VRF, use the following commands. • Enable the OSPFv3 process on a non-default VRF and enter OSPFv3 mode. CONFIGURATION mode ipv6 router ospf {process ID}} • The process ID range is from 0 to 65535. Assign the router ID for this OSPFv3 process. CONF-IPV6-ROUTER-OSPF mode router-id {number} • number: the IPv4 address. The format is A.B.C.D.
Configuring Stub Areas To configure IPv6 stub areas, use the following command. • Configure the area as a stub area. CONF-IPV6-ROUTER-OSPF mode area area-id stub [no-summary] • no-summary: use these keywords to prevent transmission in to the area of summary ASBR LSAs. • Area ID: a number or IP address assigned when creating the area. You can represent the area ID as a number from 0 to 65536 if you assign a dotted decimal format rather than an IP address.
Configure the following required and optional parameters: • bgp | connected | static: enter one of the keywords to redistribute those routes. • metric metric-value: The range is from 0 to 4294967295. • metric-type metric-type: enter 1 for OSPFv3 external route type 1 OR 2 for OSPFv3 external route type 2. • route-map map-name: enter a name of a configured route map. • tag tag-value: The range is from 0 to 4294967295.
By default, OSPFv3 graceful restart is disabled and functions only in a helper role to help restarting neighbor routers in their graceful restarts when it receives a Grace LSA. To enable OSPFv3 graceful restart, enter the ipv6 router ospf process-id command to enter OSPFv3 configuration mode. Then configure a grace period using the graceful-restart grace-period command. The grace period is the time that the OSPFv3 neighbors continue to advertise the restarting router as though it is fully adjacent.
show ipv6 ospf database database-summary Examples of the Graceful Restart show Commands The following example shows the show run ospf command. Dell#show run ospf ! router ospf 1 router-id 200.1.1.1 log-adjacency-changes graceful-restart grace-period 180 network 20.1.1.0/24 area 0 network 30.1.1.0/24 area 0 ! ipv6 router ospf 1 log-adjacency-changes graceful-restart grace-period 180 The following example shows the show ipv6 ospf database database-summary command.
OSPFv3 Authentication Using IPsec OSPFv3 uses IPsec to provide authentication for OSPFv3 packets. IPsec authentication ensures security in the transmission of OSPFv3 packets between IPsec-enabled routers. IPsec is a set of protocols developed by the internet engineering task force (IETF) to support secure exchange of packets at the IP layer. IPsec supports two encryption modes: transport and tunnel. • Transport mode — encrypts only the data portion (payload) of each packet, but leaves the header untouched.
• Manual key configuration is supported in an authentication or encryption policy (dynamic key configuration using the internet key exchange [IKE] protocol is not supported). • In an OSPFv3 authentication policy: • • AH is used to authenticate OSPFv3 headers and certain fields in IPv6 headers and extension headers. • MD5 and SHA1 authentication types are supported; encrypted and unencrypted keys are supported. In an OSPFv3 encryption policy: • Both encryption and authentication are used.
• show crypto ipsec policy Display the security associations set up for OSPFv3 interfaces in authentication policies. show crypto ipsec sa ipv6 Configuring IPsec Encryption on an Interface To configure, remove, or display IPsec encryption on an interface, use the following commands.
If you have enabled IPSec encryption in an OSPFv3 area using the area encryption command, you cannot use the area authentication command in the area at the same time. The configuration of IPSec authentication on an interface-level takes precedence over an area-level configuration. If you remove an interface configuration, an area authentication policy that has been configured is applied to the interface. • Enable IPSec authentication for OSPFv3 packets in an area.
• • • key: specifies the text string used in the encryption. All neighboring OSPFv3 routers must share the same key to decrypt information. The required lengths of a non-encrypted or encrypted key are: 3DES - 48 or 96 hex digits; DES - 16 or 32 hex digits; AES-CBC - 32 or 64 hex digits for AES-128 and 48 or 96 hex digits for AES-192. • key-encryption-type: (optional) specifies if the key is encrypted. Valid values: 0 (key is not encrypted) or 7 (key is encrypted).
Inbound ESP Cipher Key : 123456789a123456789b123456789c123456789d12345678 Outbound ESP Cipher Key : 123456789a123456789b123456789c123456789d12345678 Transform set : esp-3des esp-md5-hmac Crypto IPSec client security policy data Policy name Policy refcount Inbound AH SPI Outbound AH SPI Inbound AH Key Outbound AH Key Transform set : : : : : : : OSPFv3-1-500 2 500 (0x1F4) 500 (0x1F4) bbdd96e6eb4828e2e27bc3f9ff541e43faa759c9ef5706ba8ed8bb5efe91e97e bbdd96e6eb4828e2e27bc3f9ff541e43faa759c9ef5706ba8ed8bb5efe91
outbound esp sas spi : 600 (0x258) transform : esp-des esp-sha1-hmac in use settings : {Transport, } replay detection support : N STATUS : ACTIVE Troubleshooting OSPFv3 The system provides several tools to troubleshoot OSPFv3 operation on the switch. This section describes typical, OSPFv3 troubleshooting scenarios. NOTE: The following troubleshooting section is meant to be a comprehensive list, but only to provide some examples of typical troubleshooting checks.
• For a 25-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword twentyFiveGigE then the stack/slot/port/subport information. • For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the stack/slot/port[/subport] information. • For a 50-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fiftyGigE then the stack/slot/port/subport information. • For a 100-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword hundredGigE then the stack/slot/port information.
33 Policy-based Routing (PBR) Policy-based routing (PBR) allows a switch to make routing decisions based on policies applied to an interface. Overview When a router receives a packet, the router decides where to forward the packet based on the destination address in the packet, which is used to look up an entry in a routing table. However, in some cases, there may be a need to forward the packet based on other criteria: size, source, protocol type, destination, and so on.
• Destination port • TCP Flags After you apply a redirect-list to an interface, all traffic passing through it is subjected to the rules defined in the redirect-list. Traffic is forwarded based on the following: • Next-hop addresses are verified. If the specified next hop is reachable, traffic is forwarded to the specified next-hop. • If the specified next-hops are not reachable, the normal routing table is used to forward the traffic.
• Apply a Redirect-list to an Interface using a Redirect-group PBR Exceptions (Permit) To create an exception to a redirect list, use thepermit command. Exceptions are used when a forwarding decision should be based on the routing table rather than a routing policy. The Dell Networking OS assigns the first available sequence number to a rule configured without a sequence number and inserts the rule into the PBR CAM region next to the existing entries.
• number is the number in sequence to initiate this rule • ip-address is the Forwarding router’s address • tunnel is used to configure the tunnel settings • tunnel-id is used to redirect the traffic • track is used to track the object-id • track is to enable the tracking • FORMAT: A.B.C.
You can apply multiple rules to a single redirect-list. The rules are applied in ascending order, starting with the rule that has the lowest sequence number in a redirect-list displays the correct method for applying multiple rules to one list.
Dell(conf-if-te-1/1/1/1)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/1 no ip address ip redirect-group test ip redirect-group xyz shutdown In addition to supporting multiple redirect-lists in a redirect-group, multiple redirect-groups are supported on a single interface. Dell Networking OS has the capability to support multiple groups on an interface for backup purposes. Show Redirect List Configuration To view the configuration redirect list configuration, use the following commands.
Defined as: seq 5 permit ip 200.200.200.200 200.200.200.200 199.199.199.199 199.199.199.199 seq 10 redirect 1.1.1.2 tcp 234.224.234.234 255.234.234.234 222.222.222.222/24 eq 40 ack, Next-hop reachable (via Te 1/1/1/1), Applied interfaces: Te 1/1/1/2 NOTE: If you apply the redirect-list to an interface, the output of the show ip redirect-list redirect-listname command displays reachability status for the specified next-hop.
Create the Redirect-List GOLD EDGE_ROUTER(conf-if-Te-2/23/1)#ip redirect-list GOLD EDGE_ROUTER(conf-redirect-list)#description Route GOLD traffic to ISP_GOLD. EDGE_ROUTER(conf-redirect-list)#direct 10.99.99.254 ip 192.168.1.0/24 any EDGE_ROUTER(conf-redirect-list)#redirect 10.99.99.254 ip 192.168.2.0/24 any EDGE_ROUTER(conf-redirect-list)# seq 15 permit ip any any EDGE_ROUTER(conf-redirect-list)#show config ! ip redirect-list GOLD description Route GOLD traffic to ISP_GOLD. seq 5 redirect 10.99.99.
View Redirect-List GOLD EDGE_ROUTER#show ip redirect-list IP redirect-list GOLD: Defined as: seq 5 redirect 10.99.99.254 ip 192.168.1.0/24 any, Next-hop reachable (via Te 3/23/1), ARP resolved seq 10 redirect 10.99.99.254 ip 192.168.2.
seq 15 redirect 42.1.1.2 track 3 udp 155.55.0.0/16 host 144.144.144.144, Track 3 [up], Nexthop reachable (via Vl 20) seq 20 redirect 42.1.1.2 track 3 udp any host 144.144.144.144, Track 3 [up], Next-hop reachable (via Vl 20) seq 25 redirect 43.1.1.2 track 4 ip host 7.7.7.7 host 144.144.144.
Apply the Redirect Rule to an Interface: Dell#configure terminal Dell(conf)#interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/28 Dell(conf-if-te-2/28)#ip redirect-group explicit_tunnel Dell(conf-if-te-2/28)#exit Dell(conf)#end Verify the Applied Redirect Rules: Dell#show ip redirect-list explicit_tunnel IP redirect-list explicit_tunnel: Defined as: seq 5 redirect tunnel 1 track 1 tcp 155.55.2.0/24 222.22.2.
34 PIM Sparse-Mode (PIM-SM) Protocol-independent multicast sparse-mode (PIM-SM) is a multicast protocol that forwards multicast traffic to a subnet only after a request using a PIM Join message; this behavior is the opposite of PIM-Dense mode, which forwards multicast traffic to all subnets until a request to stop. Implementation Information The following information is necessary for implementing PIM-SM.
Refuse Multicast Traffic A host requesting to leave a multicast group sends an IGMP Leave message to the last-hop DR. If the host is the only remaining receiver for that group on the subnet, the last-hop DR is responsible for sending a PIM Prune message up the RPT to prune its branch to the RP. 1 After receiving an IGMP Leave message, the gateway removes the interface on which it is received from the outgoing interface list of the (*,G) entry.
ip multicast-routing Related Configuration Tasks The following are related PIM-SM configuration tasks. • Configuring S,G Expiry Timers • Configuring a Static Rendezvous Point • Configuring a Designated Router • Creating Multicast Boundaries and Domains Enable PIM-SM You must enable PIM-SM on each participating interface. 1 Enable multicast routing on the system. CONFIGURATION mode ip multicast-routing 2 Enable PIM-Sparse mode.
Outgoing interface list: TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/1 TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/3/1 (10.87.31.5, 192.1.2.1), uptime 00:01:24, expires 00:02:26, flags: FT Incoming interface: TenGigabitEthernet 2/1/1/1, RPF neighbor 0.0.0.0 Outgoing interface list: TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/1 TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/2/1 TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/3/1 --More-- Configuring S,G Expiry Timers By default, S, G entries expire in 210 seconds.
Configuring a Static Rendezvous Point The rendezvous point (RP) is a PIM-enabled interface on a router that acts as the root a group-specific tree; every group must have an RP. • Identify an RP by the IP address of a PIM-enabled or Loopback interface. ip pim rp-address Example of Viewing an RP on a Loopback Interface Dell#sh run int loop0 ! interface Loopback 0 ip address 1.1.1.1/32 ip pim sparse-mode no shutdown Dell#sh run pim ! ip pim rp-address 1.1.1.1 group-address 224.0.0.
• Change the interval at which a router sends hello messages. INTERFACE mode ip pim query-interval seconds • Display the current value of these parameter. EXEC Privilege mode show ip pim interface Creating Multicast Boundaries and Domains A PIM domain is a contiguous set of routers that all implement PIM and are configured to operate within a common boundary defined by PIM multicast border routers (PMBRs). PMBRs connect each PIM domain to the rest of the Internet.
35 PIM Source-Specific Mode (PIM-SSM) PIM source-specific mode (PIM-SSM) is a multicast protocol that forwards multicast traffic from a single source to a subnet. In the other versions of protocol independent multicast (PIM), a receiver subscribes to a group only. The receiver receives traffic not just from the source in which it is interested but from all sources sending to that group.
2 Enable PIM-SSM for a range of addresses. Related Configuration Tasks • Use PIM-SSM with IGMP Version 2 Hosts Enabling PIM-SSM To enable PIM-SSM, follow these steps. 1 Create an ACL that uses permit rules to specify what range of addresses should use SSM. CONFIGURATION mode ip access-list standard name 2 Enter the ip pim ssm-range command and specify the ACL you created.
Configuring PIM-SSM with IGMPv2 R1(conf)#do show run pim ! ip pim rp-address 10.11.12.2 group-address 224.0.0.0/4 ip pim ssm-range ssm R1(conf)#do show run acl ! ip access-list standard map seq 5 permit host 239.0.0.2 ! ip access-list standard ssm seq 5 permit host 239.0.0.2 R1(conf)#ip igmp ssm-map map 10.11.5.2 R1(conf)#do show ip igmp groups Total Number of Groups: 2 IGMP Connected Group Membership Group Address Interface Mode Uptime Expires 239.0.0.
36 Port Monitoring Port monitoring (also referred to as mirroring ) allows you to monitor ingress and/or egress traffic on specified ports. The mirrored traffic can be sent to a port to which a network analyzer is connected to inspect or troubleshoot the traffic. Mirroring is used for monitoring Ingress or Egress or both Ingress and Egress traffic on a specific port(s). This mirrored traffic can be sent to a port where a network sniffer can connect and monitor the traffic.
• Single MD can be monitored on max. of 4 MG ports. Port Monitoring Port monitoring is supported on both physical and logical interfaces, such as VLAN and port-channel interfaces. The source port (MD) with monitored traffic and the destination ports (MG) to which an analyzer can be attached must be on the same switch. You can configure up to 128 source ports in a monitoring session. Only one destination port is supported in a monitoring session.
TeGig 11/6/2 direction tx, if the MD port TenGig 11/6/1 is an untagged member of any VLAN, all monitored frames that the MG port TeGig 11/6/2 receives are tagged with the VLAN ID of the MD port. Similarly, if BPDUs are transmitted, the MG port receives them tagged with the VLAN ID 4095. This behavior might result in a difference between the number of egress packets on the MD port and monitored packets on the MG port.
Dell(conf)#do show monitor session SessID Source Destination Dir Gre-Protocol FcMonitor ------ ---------------------------- --------0 Te 1/1/1/1 Te 1/1/1/2 rx A N/A No 0 Po 10 Te 1/1/1/2 rx A N/A No 1 Vl 40 Te 1/1/1/3 rx A N/A No Mode Source IP Dest IP DSCP TTL Drop Rate ---- --------- -------- ---- --- ---- ---- Port 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0 0 No N/ Port 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0 0 No N/ Flow 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0 0 No N/ NOTE: Source as VLAN is achieved via Flow based mirroring.
EXEC Privilege mode show run monitor session Dell#show run monitor session ! monitor multicast-queue 7 Dell# Enabling Flow-Based Monitoring Flow-based monitoring conserves bandwidth by monitoring only specified traffic instead of all traffic on the interface. This feature is particularly useful when looking for malicious traffic. It is available for Layer 2 and Layer 3 ingress traffic. You can specify traffic using standard or extended access-lists.
Remote Port Mirroring Example Remote port mirroring uses the analyzers shown in the aggregation network in Site A. The VLAN traffic on monitored links from the access network is tagged and assigned to a dedicated L2 VLAN. Monitored links are configured in two source sessions shown with orange and green circles. Each source session uses a separate reserved VLAN to transmit mirrored packets (mirrored source-session traffic is shown with an orange or green circle with a blue border).
• You can configure any switch in the network with source ports and destination ports, and allow it to function in an intermediate transport session for a reserved VLAN at the same time for multiple remote-port mirroring sessions. You can enable and disable individual mirroring sessions. • BPDU monitoring is not required to use remote port mirroring.
Restrictions When you configure remote port mirroring, the following restrictions apply: • You can configure the same source port to be used in multiple source sessions. • You cannot configure a source port channel or source VLAN in a source session if the port channel or VLAN has a member port that is configured as a destination port in a remote-port mirroring session.
Configuring the Sample Remote Port Mirroring Remote port mirroring requires a source session (monitored ports on different source switches), a reserved tagged VLAN for transporting mirrored traffic (configured on source, intermediate, and destination switches), and a destination session (destination ports connected to analyzers on destination switches). Table 61. Configuration Steps for RPM Step Command Purpose 1 configure terminal Enter global configuration mode.
Dell(conf)#inte te 1/1/3/1 Dell(conf-if-te-1/30)#no shutdown Dell(conf-if-te-1/30)#switchport Dell(conf-if-te-1/30)#exit Dell(conf)#interface vlan 30 Dell(conf-if-vl-30)#mode remote-port-mirroring Dell(conf-if-vl-30)#tagged te 1/1/3/1 Dell(conf-if-vl-30)#exit Dell(conf)#interface port-channel 10 Dell(conf-if-po-10)#channel-member te 1/1/8/1 - 1/1/8/2 Dell(conf-if-po-10)#no shutdown Dell(conf-if-po-10)#exit Dell(conf)#monitor session 3 type rpm Dell(conf-mon-sess-3)#source port-channel 10 dest remote-vlan 30
Dell(conf-mon-sess-2)#tagged destination te 1/5/1 Dell(conf-mon-sess-2)#exit Dell(conf)#monitor session 3 type rpm Dell(conf-mon-sess-3)#source remote-vlan 30 destination te 1/6/1 Dell(conf-mon-sess-3)#tagged destination te 1/6/1 Dell(conf-mon-sess-3)#end Dell# Dell#show monitor session SessID Source Destination Dir Mode Source IP ------ ------------------ ---- --------1 remote-vlan 10 Te 1/4/1 N/A N/A N/A 2 remote-vlan 20 Te 1/5/1 N/A N/A N/A 3 remote-vlan 30 Te 1/6/1 N/A N/A N/A Dell# Dest IP -------N/A
Encapsulated Remote Port Monitoring Encapsulated Remote Port Monitoring (ERPM) copies traffic from source ports/port-channels or source VLANs and forwards the traffic using routable GRE-encapsulated packets to the destination IP address specified in the session. NOTE: When configuring ERPM, follow these guidelines • The Dell Networking OS supports ERPM source session only. Encapsulated packets terminate at the destination IP address or at the analyzer.
6 Enter the no disable command to enable the ERPM session. no disable The following example shows an ERPM configuration: Dell(conf)#monitor session 0 type erpm Dell(conf-mon-sess-0)#source tengigabitethernet 1/1/1/1 direction rx Dell(conf-mon-sess-0)#source port-channel 1 direction tx Dell(conf-mon-sess-0)#erpm source-ip 1.1.1.1 dest-ip 7.1.1.
ERPM Behavior on a typical Dell Networking OS The Dell Networking OS is designed to support only the Encapsulation of the data received / transmitted at the specified source port (Port A). An ERPM destination session / decapsulation of the ERPM packets at the destination Switch are not supported. Figure 102.
• b Some tools support options to edit the capture file. We can make use of such features (for example: editcap ) and chop the ERPM header part and save it to a new trace file. This new file (i.e. the original mirrored packet) can be converted back into stream and fed to any egress interface. Using Python script • Either have a Linux server's ethernet port ip as the ERPM destination ip or connect the ingress interface of the server to the ERPM MirrorToPort.
37 Private VLANs (PVLAN) The private VLAN (PVLAN) feature is supported on Dell Networking OS. For syntax details about the commands described in this chapter, refer to the Private VLANs commands chapter in the Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Private VLANs extend the Dell Networking OS security suite by providing Layer 2 isolation between ports within the same virtual local area network (VLAN).
• • A switch can have one or more primary VLANs, and it can have none. • A primary VLAN has one or more secondary VLANs. • A primary VLAN and each of its secondary VLANs decrement the available number of VLAN IDs in the switch. • A primary VLAN has one or more promiscuous ports. • A primary VLAN might have one or more trunk ports, or none. Secondary VLAN — a subdomain of the primary VLAN. • There are two types of secondary VLAN — community VLAN and isolated VLAN.
• Display PVLANs and/or interfaces that are part of a PVLAN. EXEC mode or EXEC Privilege mode show vlan private-vlan [community | interface | isolated | primary | primary_vlan | interface interface] • Display primary-secondary VLAN mapping. EXEC mode or EXEC Privilege mode show vlan private-vlan mapping • Set the PVLAN mode of the selected port.
• trunk (inter-switch PVLAN hub port) Example of the switchport mode private-vlan Command For interface details, refer to Enabling a Physical Interface in the Interfaces chapter. NOTE: You cannot add interfaces that are configured as PVLAN ports to regular VLANs. You also cannot add “regular” ports (ports not configured as PVLAN ports) to PVLANs. The following example shows the switchport mode private-vlan command on a port and on a port channel.
Add PVLAN trunk ports to the VLAN only as tagged interfaces. You can enter interfaces in numeric or in range format, either comma-delimited (slot/port,port,port) or hyphenated (slot/ port-port). You can only add promiscuous ports or PVLAN trunk ports to the PVLAN (no host or regular ports). 6 (OPTIONAL) Assign an IP address to the VLAN. INTERFACE VLAN mode ip address ip address 7 (OPTIONAL) Enable/disable Layer 3 communication between secondary VLANs.
interface vlan vlan-id 2 Enable the VLAN. INTERFACE VLAN mode no shutdown 3 Set the PVLAN mode of the selected VLAN to isolated. INTERFACE VLAN mode private-vlan mode isolated 4 Add one or more host ports to the VLAN. INTERFACE VLAN mode tagged interface or untagged interface You can enter the interfaces singly or in range format, either comma-delimited (slot/port,port,port) or hyphenated (slot/ port-port). You can only add ports defined as host to the VLAN.
Private VLAN Configuration Example The following example shows a private VLAN topology. Figure 103. Sample Private VLAN Topology The following configuration is based on the example diagram for the Z9500: • Te 1/1 and Te 1/23 are configured as promiscuous ports, assigned to the primary VLAN, VLAN 4000. • Te 1/25 is configured as a PVLAN trunk port, also assigned to the primary VLAN 4000. • Te 1/24 and Te 1/47 are configured as host ports and assigned to the isolated VLAN, VLAN 4003.
In parallel, on S4810: • Te 1/3 is a promiscuous port and Te 1/25 is a PVLAN trunk port, assigned to the primary VLAN 4000. • Te 1/4-6 are host ports. Te 1/4 and Te 1/5 are assigned to the community VLAN 4001, while Te 1/6 is assigned to the isolated VLAN 4003. The result is that: • The S4810 ports would have the same intra-switch communication characteristics as described for the Z9500.
The following example shows using the show vlan private-vlan mapping command. S50-1#show vlan private-vlan mapping Private Vlan: Primary : 4000 Isolated : 4003 Community : 4001 NOTE: In the following example, notice the addition of the PVLAN codes – P, I, and C – in the left column. The following example shows viewing the VLAN status.
38 Per-VLAN Spanning Tree Plus (PVST+) Per-VLAN spanning tree plus (PVST+) is a variation of spanning tree — developed by a third party — that allows you to configure a separate spanning tree instance for each virtual local area network (VLAN). Protocol Overview PVST+ is a variation of spanning tree — developed by a third party — that allows you to configure a separate spanning tree instance for each virtual local area network (VLAN).
Table 63. Spanning Tree Variations Dell Networking OS Supports Dell Networking Term IEEE Specification Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) 802 .1d Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) 802 .1w Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) 802 .1s Per-VLAN Spanning Tree Plus (PVST+) Third Party Implementation Information • The Dell Networking OS implementation of PVST+ is based on IEEE Standard 802.1w. • The Dell Networking OS implementation of PVST+ uses IEEE 802.
no disable Disabling PVST+ To disable PVST+ globally or on an interface, use the following commands. • Disable PVST+ globally. PROTOCOL PVST mode disable • Disable PVST+ on an interface, or remove a PVST+ parameter configuration. INTERFACE mode no spanning-tree pvst Example of Viewing PVST+ Configuration To display your PVST+ configuration, use the show config command from PROTOCOL PVST mode.
Figure 105. Load Balancing with PVST+ The bridge with the bridge value for bridge priority is elected root. Because all bridges use the default priority (until configured otherwise), the lowest MAC address is used as a tie-breaker. To increase the likelihood that a bridge is selected as the STP root, assign bridges a low non-default value for bridge priority. To assign a bridge priority, use the following command. • Assign a bridge priority.
Number of topology changes 5, last change occurred 00:34:37 ago on Te 1/1/1/1 Port 375 (TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/2/1) is designated Forwarding Port path cost 20000, Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.375 Designated root has priority 4096, address 0001.e80d.b6:d6 Designated bridge has priority 4096, address 0001.e80d.b6:d6 Designated port id is 128.
Modifying Interface PVST+ Parameters You can adjust two interface parameters (port cost and port priority) to increase or decrease the probability that a port becomes a forwarding port. • Port cost — a value that is based on the interface type. The greater the port cost, the less likely the port is selected to be a forwarding port. • Port priority — influences the likelihood that a port is selected to be a forwarding port in case that several ports have the same port cost.
The values for interface PVST+ parameters are given in the output of the show spanning-tree pvst command, as previously shown. Configuring an EdgePort The EdgePort feature enables interfaces to begin forwarding traffic approximately 30 seconds sooner. In this mode an interface forwards frames by default until it receives a BPDU that indicates that it should behave otherwise; it does not go through the Learning and Listening states.
Figure 106. PVST+ with Extend System ID • Augment the bridge ID with the VLAN ID. PROTOCOL PVST mode extend system-id Example of Viewing the Extend System ID in a PVST+ Configuration Dell(conf-pvst)#do show spanning-tree pvst vlan 5 brief VLAN 5 Executing IEEE compatible Spanning Tree Protocol Root ID Priority 32773, Address 0001.e832.73f7 Root Bridge hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15 Bridge ID Priority 32773 (priority 32768 sys-id-ext 5), Address 0001.e832.
no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/1,1/1/1/2 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 300 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/1,1/1/1/2 no shutdown ! protocol spanning-tree pvst no disable vlan 100 bridge-priority 4096 Example of PVST+ Configuration (R2) interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/1 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/2/1 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface Vlan 100 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/1,1/1/2/1 no shutdown ! interf
protocol spanning-tree pvst no disable vlan 300 bridge-priority 4096 664 Per-VLAN Spanning Tree Plus (PVST+)
39 Quality of Service (QoS) This chapter describes how to use and configure Quality of Service service (QoS) features on the switch. Differentiated service is accomplished by classifying and queuing traffic, and assigning priorities to those queues. Table 65.
Feature Direction Create Policy Maps Ingress + Egress Create Input Policy Maps Ingress Honor DSCP Values on Ingress Packets Ingress Honoring dot1p Values on Ingress Packets Ingress Create Output Policy Maps Egress Specify an Aggregate QoS Policy Egress Create Output Policy Maps Egress Enabling QoS Rate Adjustment Enabling Strict-Priority Queueing Weighted Random Early Detection Egress Create WRED Profiles Egress Figure 107.
• Implementation Information • Port-Based QoS Configurations • Policy-Based QoS Configurations • Enabling QoS Rate Adjustment • Enabling Strict-Priority Queueing • Queue Classification Requirements for PFC Functionality • Support for marking dot1p value in L3 Input Qos Policy • Weighted Random Early Detection • Pre-Calculating Available QoS CAM Space • Specifying Policy-Based Rate Shaping in Packets Per Second • Configuring Policy-Based Rate Shaping • Configuring Weights and ECN for W
Table 66. dot1p-priority Values and Queue Numbers dot1p Queue Number 0 1 1 0 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 • Change the priority of incoming traffic on the interface.
When priority-tagged frames ingress an untagged port or hybrid port, the frames are classified to the default VLAN of the port and to a queue according to their dot1p priority if you configure service-class dynamic dotp or trust dot1p. When priority-tagged frames ingress a tagged port, the frames are dropped because, for a tagged port, the default VLAN is 0. Dell Networking OS Behavior: Hybrid ports can receive untagged, tagged, and priority tagged frames.
Policy-Based QoS Configurations Policy-based QoS configurations consist of the components shown in the following example. Figure 108. Constructing Policy-Based QoS Configurations Classify Traffic Class maps differentiate traffic so that you can apply separate quality of service policies to different types of traffic. For both class maps, Layer 2 and Layer 3, Dell Networking OS matches packets against match criteria in the order that you configure them.
Use step 1 or step 2 to start creating a Layer 3 class map. 1 Create a match-any class map. CONFIGURATION mode class-map match-any 2 Create a match-all class map. CONFIGURATION mode class-map match-all 3 Specify your match criteria. CLASS MAP mode match {ip | ipv6 | ip-any} After you create a class-map, Dell Networking OS places you in CLASS MAP mode. Match-any class maps allow up to five ACLs. Match-all class-maps allow only one ACL. 4 Link the class-map to a queue.
Use Step 1 or Step 2 to start creating a Layer 2 class map. 1 Create a match-any class map. CONFIGURATION mode class-map match-any 2 Create a match-all class map. CONFIGURATION mode class-map match-all 3 Specify your match criteria. CLASS MAP mode match mac After you create a class-map, Dell Networking OS places you in CLASS MAP mode. Match-any class maps allow up to five access-lists. Match-all class-maps allow only one. You can match against only one VLAN ID. 4 Link the class-map to a queue.
Examples of Traffic Classifications The following example shows incorrect traffic classifications.
• PSH • RST • URG In the existing software, ECE/CWR TCP flag qualifiers are not supported. • Because this functionality forcibly marks all the packets matching the specific match criteria as ‘yellow’, Dell Networking OS does not support Policer based coloring and this feature concurrently.
Setting a dot1p Value for Egress Packets Configuring Policy-Based Rate Policing To configure policy-based rate policing, use the following command. • Configure rate police ingress traffic. QOS-POLICY-IN mode rate-police Setting a dot1p Value for Egress Packets To set a dot1p value for egress packets, use the following command. • Set a dscp or dot1p value for egress packets.
Allocating Bandwidth to Queue The switch schedules packets for egress based on Deficit Round Robin (DRR). This strategy offers a guaranteed data rate. Allocate bandwidth to queues only in terms of percentage in 4-queue and 8-queue systems. The following table shows the default bandwidth percentage for each queue. The following table lists the default bandwidth weights for each queue, and their equivalent percentage which is derived by dividing the bandwidth weight by the sum of all queue weights. Table 67.
Creating a DSCP Color Map You can create a DSCP color map to outline the differentiated services codepoint (DSCP) mappings to the appropriate color mapping (green, yellow, red) for the input traffic. The system uses this information to classify input traffic on an interface based on the DSCP value of each packet and assigns it an initial drop precedence of green, yellow, or red The default setting for each DSCP value (0-63) is green (low drop precedence).
Examples for Creating a DSCP Color Map Display all DSCP color maps. Dell# show qos dscp-color-map Dscp-color-map mapONE yellow 4,7 red 20,30 Dscp-color-map mapTWO yellow 16,55 Display a specific DSCP color map. Dell# show qos dscp-color-map mapTWO Dscp-color-map mapTWO yellow 16,55 Displaying a DSCP Color Policy Configuration To display the DSCP color policy configuration for one or all interfaces, use the show qos dscp-color-policy {summary [interface] | detail {interface}} command in EXEC mode.
Honoring DSCP Values on Ingress Packets Honoring dot1p Values on Ingress Packets 3 Apply the input policy map to an interface. Applying a Class-Map or Input QoS Policy to a Queue To apply a class-map or input QoS policy to a queue, use the following command. • Assign an input QoS policy to a queue. POLICY-MAP-IN mode service-queue Applying an Input QoS Policy to an Input Policy Map To apply an input QoS policy to an input policy map, use the following command.
Honoring dot1p Values on Ingress Packets Dell Networking OS honors dot1p values on ingress packets with the Trust dot1p feature. The following table specifies the queue to which the classified traffic is sent based on the dot1p value. Table 69. Default dot1p to Queue Mapping dot1p Queue ID 0 1 1 0 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 The dot1p value is also honored for frames on the default VLAN. For more information, refer to Priority-Tagged Frames on the Default VLAN.
Applying an Input Policy Map to an Interface To apply an input policy map to an interface, use the following command. You can apply the same policy map to multiple interfaces, and you can modify a policy map after you apply it. • You cannot apply a class-map and QoS policies to the same interface. • You cannot apply an input Layer 2 QoS policy on an interface you also configure with vlan-stack access.
Applying an Output Policy Map to an Interface To apply an output policy map to an interface, use the following command. • Apply an input policy map to an interface. INTERFACE mode service-policy output You can apply the same policy map to multiple interfaces, and you can modify a policy map after you apply it. Enabling QoS Rate Adjustment By default while rate limiting, policing, and shaping, Dell Networking OS does not include the Preamble, SFD, or the IFG fields.
The range is from 1 to 3. Queue Classification Requirements for PFC Functionality Queue classification requirements for PFC functionality are mentioned below: • On untagged ports, Queue classification must be based on DSCP. • On tagged ports, Queue classification must be based on Dot1p. Layer 3 classification configurations should not be present on the port. • On hybrid ports, Queue classification can be based on either Dot1p (for tagged packets) or DSCP (for untagged packets) but not both.
Dell(conf-qos-policy-in)# You will also be able to mark both DSCP and Dot1p in the L3 Input Qos Policy: Dell(conf)#qos-policy-input qos-input Dell(conf-qos-policy-in)#set mac-dot1p 2 Dell(conf-qos-policy-in)#set ip-dscp 5 Dell Dell(conf-qos-policy-in)# Weighted Random Early Detection Weighted random early detection (WRED) is a congestion avoidance mechanism that drops packets to prevent buffering resources from being consumed.
CONFIGURATION mode wred-profile 2 Specify the minimum and maximum threshold values. WRED mode threshold Applying a WRED Profile to Traffic After you create a WRED profile, you must specify to which traffic Dell Networking OS should apply the profile. Dell Networking OS assigns a color (also called drop precedence) — red, yellow, or green — to each packet based on it DSCP value before queuing it. DSCP is a 6–bit field.
Displaying egress–queue Statistics To display the number of transmitted and dropped packets and their rate on the egress queues of an interface, use the following command: • Display the number of packets and number of bytes on the egress-queue profile.
• Estimated CAM — the estimated number of CAM entries that the policy will consume when it is applied to an interface. • Status — indicates whether the specified policy-map can be completely applied to an interface in the port-pipe. • Allowed — indicates that the policy-map can be applied because the estimated number of CAM entries is less or equal to the available number of CAM entries. The number of interfaces in the port-pipe to which the policy-map can be applied is given in parentheses.
Configuring Policy-Based Rate Shaping You can configure the rate shaping for QoS output policies in packets per second (pps). You can explicitly specify the rate shaping functionality for QoS output policies as peak rate and committed rate attributes. You can also configure the peak burst and committed burst sizes. All of these settings can be configured in Kbps, Mbps, or pps.
The weight factor is set to zero by default, which causes the same behavior as dropping of packets by WRED during network loads or also called instantaneous ECN marking. In a topology in which congestion of the network varies over time, you can specify a weight to enable a smooth, seamless averaging of packets to handle the sudden overload of packets based on the previous time sampling performed. You can specify the weight parameter for front-end and backplane ports separately in the range of 0 through 15.
Queue Configuration Service-Pool Configuration 1 X WRED Threshold Expected Functionality Relationship Q threshold = Q-T, Service pool threshold = SP-T Q-T < SP-T ECN marking to shared buffer limits of the service-pool and then packets are tail dropped. SP-T < Q-T Same as above but ECN marking starts above SP-T. Configuring WRED and ECN Attributes The functionality to configure a weight factor for the WRED and ECN functionality for backplane ports is supported on the platform.
• FIN • SYN • PSH • RST • URG In the existing software, ECE/CWR TCP flag qualifiers are not supported. • Because this functionality forcibly marks all the packets matching the specific match criteria as ‘yellow’, Dell Networking OS does not support Policer based coloring and this feature concurrently.
In such a condition, it is necessary that the switch is capable to take differentiated actions for ECN/Non-ECN packets. After classifying packets to ECN/Non-ECN, marking ECN and Non-ECN packets to different color packets is performed. Policy based ingress QOS involves the following three steps to achieve QOS: 1 Classification of incoming traffic. 2 Specify the differentiated actions for different traffic class. 3 Attach the policy-map to the interface.
• Classification based on DSCP only • Classification based on ECN only • Classification based on ECN and DSCP concurrently You can now use the set-color yellow keyword with the match ip access-group command to mark the color of the traffic as ‘yellow’ would be added in the ‘match ip’ sequence of the class-map configuration.
match ip access-group dscp_50_non_ecn set-color yellow match ip access-group dscp_50 ! policy-map-input pmap_dscp_40_50 service-queue 2 class-map class_dscp_40 service-queue 3 class-map class_dscp_50 Approach with explicit ECN match qualifiers for ECN packets: ! ip access-list standard dscp_50_ecn seq 5 permit any dscp 50 ecn 1 seq 10 permit any dscp 50 ecn 2 seq 15 permit any dscp 50 ecn 3 ! ip access-list standard dscp_40_ecn seq 5 permit any dscp 40 ecn 1 seq 10 permit any dscp 40 ecn 2 seq 15 permit a
3 Apply the Layer 2 policy on a Layer 3 interface. INTERFACE mode Dell(conf-if-fo-1/4)# service-policy input l2p layer2 Managing Hardware Buffer Statistics The memory management unit (MMU) is 12.2 MB in size. It contains approximately 60,000 cells, each of which is 208 bytes in size. MMU also has another portion of 3 MB allocated to it.
Dell(conf)#buffer-stats-snapshot Dell(conf)#no disable Enable this utility to be able to configure the parameters for buffer statistics tracking. By default, buffer statistics tracking is disabled. 3 Use show hardware buffer-stats-snapshot resource interface interface{priority-group { id | all } | queue { ucast{id | all}{ mcast {id | all} | all} to view buffer statistics tracking resource information for a specific interface.
40 Routing Information Protocol (RIP) The Routing Information Protocol (RIP) tracks distances or hop counts to nearby routers when establishing network connections and is based on a distance-vector algorithm. RIP is based on a distance-vector algorithm; it tracks distances or hop counts to nearby routers when establishing network connections. RIP protocol standards are listed in the Standards Compliance chapter.
Implementation Information Dell Networking OS supports both versions of RIP and allows you to configure one version globally and the other version on interfaces or both versions on the interfaces. The following table lists the defaults for RIP in Dell Networking OS. Table 71.
Enabling RIP Globally By default, RIP is not enabled in Dell Networking OS. To enable RIP globally, use the following commands. 1 Enter ROUTER RIP mode and enable the RIP process on Dell Networking OS. CONFIGURATION mode router rip 2 Assign an IP network address as a RIP network to exchange routing information.
192.161.1.0/24 auto-summary 192.162.3.0/24 [120/1] via 29.10.10.12, 00:01:22, Fa 1/4 192.162.3.0/24 auto-summary Dell#show ip rip database Total number of routes in RIP database: 978 160.160.0.0/16 [120/1] via 29.10.10.12, 00:00:26, Fa 1/49 160.160.0.0/16 auto-summary 2.0.0.0/8 [120/1] via 29.10.10.12, 00:01:22, Fa 1/49 2.0.0.0/8 auto-summary 4.0.0.0/8 [120/1] via 29.10.10.12, 00:01:22, Fa 1/49 4.0.0.0/8 auto-summary 8.0.0.0/8 [120/1] via 29.10.10.12, 00:00:26, Fa 1/49 8.0.0.0/8 auto-summary 12.0.0.
neighbor ip-address • You can use this command multiple times to exchange RIP information with as many RIP networks as you want. Disable a specific interface from sending or receiving RIP routing information. ROUTER RIP mode passive-interface interface Assigning a Prefix List to RIP Routes Another method of controlling RIP (or any routing protocol) routing information is to filter the information through a prefix list. A prefix list is applied to incoming or outgoing routes.
• map-name: the name of a configured route map. To view the current RIP configuration, use the show running-config command in EXEC mode or the show config command in ROUTER RIP mode. Setting the Send and Receive Version To change the RIP version globally or on an interface in Dell Networking OS, use the following command. To specify the RIP version, use the version command in ROUTER RIP mode.
• always: Enter the keyword always to always generate a default route. • value The range is from 1 to 16. • route-map-name: The name of a configured route map. To confirm that the default route configuration is completed, use the show config command in ROUTER RIP mode. Summarize Routes Routes in the RIPv2 routing table are summarized by default, thus reducing the size of the routing table and improving routing efficiency in large networks.
• interface: the type, slot, and number of an interface. To view the configuration changes, use the show config command in ROUTER RIP mode. Debugging RIP The debug ip rip command enables RIP debugging. When you enable debugging, you can view information on RIP protocol changes or RIP routes. To enable RIP debugging, use the following command. • debug ip rip [interface | database | events | trigger] EXEC privilege mode Enable debugging of RIP.
RIP Configuration on Core2 The following example shows how to configure RIPv2 on a host named Core2. Example of Configuring RIPv2 on Core 2 Core2(conf-if-te-1/1/2/1)# Core2(conf-if-te-1/1/2/1)#router rip Core2(conf-router_rip)#ver 2 Core2(conf-router_rip)#network 10.200.10.0 Core2(conf-router_rip)#network 10.300.10.0 Core2(conf-router_rip)#network 10.11.10.0 Core2(conf-router_rip)#network 10.11.20.0 Core2(conf-router_rip)#show config ! router rip network 10.0.0.
Destination Gateway Dist/Metric Last Change ----------- ------- ----------- ----------C 10.11.10.0/24 Direct, Te 2/11/1 0/0 00:02:26 C 10.11.20.0/24 Direct, Te 2/3/1 0/0 00:02:02 R 10.11.30.0/24 via 10.11.20.1, Te 1/1/1/1 120/1 00:01:20 C 10.200.10.0/24 Direct, Te 2/4/1 0/0 00:03:03 C 10.300.10.0/24 Direct, Te 2/5/1 0/0 00:02:42 R 192.168.1.0/24 via 10.11.20.1, Te 1/1/1/1 120/1 00:01:20 R 192.168.2.0/24 via 10.11.20.1, Te 1/1/1/1 120/1 00:01:20 Core2# R 192.168.1.0/24 via 10.11.20.
Core 3 RIP Output The examples in this section show the core 2 RIP output. • To display Core 3 RIP database, use the show ip rip database command. • To display Core 3 RIP setup, use the show ip route command. • To display Core 3 RIP activity, use the show ip protocols command. Examples of the show ip Commands to View Learned RIP Routes on Core 3 The following example shows the show ip rip database command to view the learned RIP routes on Core 3.
Default version control: receive Interface Recv Send TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/1 2 TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/2 2 TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/3 2 TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/4 2 Routing for Networks: 10.11.20.0 10.11.30.0 192.168.2.0 192.168.1.0 version 2, send version 2 2 2 2 2 Routing Information Sources: Gateway Distance Last Update 10.11.20.
ip address 192.168.2.1/24 no shutdown ! router rip version 2 network 10.11.20.0 network 10.11.30.0 network 192.168.1.0 network 192.168.2.
41 Remote Monitoring (RMON) RMON is an industry-standard implementation that monitors network traffic by sharing network monitoring information. RMON provides both 32-bit and 64-bit monitoring facility and long-term statistics collection on Dell Networking Ethernet interfaces. RMON operates with the simple network management protocol (SNMP) and monitors all nodes on a local area network (LAN) segment. RMON monitors traffic passing through the router and segment traffic not destined for the router.
Setting the RMON Alarm To set an alarm on any MIB object, use the rmon alarm or rmon hc-alarm command in GLOBAL CONFIGURATION mode. • Set an alarm on any MIB object.
CONFIGURATION mode [no] rmon event number [log] [trap community] [description string] [owner string] • number: assigned event number, which is identical to the eventIndex in the eventTable in the RMON MIB. The value must be an integer from 1 to 65,535 and be unique in the RMON Event Table. • log: (Optional) generates an RMON log entry when the event is triggered and sets the eventType in the RMON MIB to log or logand-trap. Default is no log.
[no] rmon collection history {controlEntry integer} [owner ownername] [buckets bucket-number] [interval seconds] • controlEntry: specifies the RMON group of statistics using a value. • integer: a value from 1 to 65,535 that identifies the RMON group of statistics. The value must be a unique index in the RMON History Table. • owner: (Optional) specifies the name of the owner of the RMON group of statistics. The default is a null-terminated string.
42 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) The Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) is a Layer 2 protocol — specified by IEEE 802.1w — that is essentially the same as spanningtree protocol (STP) but provides faster convergence and interoperability with switches configured with STP and multiple spanning tree protocol (MSTP). Protocol Overview RSTP is a Layer 2 protocol — specified by IEEE 802.
• Dell Networking OS supports only one Rapid Spanning Tree (RST) instance. • All interfaces in virtual local area networks (VLANs) and all enabled interfaces in Layer 2 mode are automatically added to the RST topology. • Adding a group of ports to a range of VLANs sends multiple messages to the rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP) task, avoid using the range command. When using the range command, Dell Networking recommends limiting the range to five ports and 40 VLANs.
Enabling Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Globally Enable RSTP globally on all participating bridges; it is not enabled by default. When you enable RSTP, all physical and port-channel interfaces that are enabled and in Layer 2 mode are automatically part of the RST topology. • Only one path from any bridge to any other bridge is enabled. • Bridges block a redundant path by disabling one of the link ports. To enable RSTP globally for all Layer 2 interfaces, use the following commands.
Figure 111. Rapid Spanning Tree Enabled Globally To view the interfaces participating in RSTP, use the show spanning-tree rstp command from EXEC privilege mode. If a physical interface is part of a port channel, only the port channel is listed in the command output. Dell#show spanning-tree rstp Root Identifier has priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.cbb4 Root Bridge hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15, max hops 0 Bridge Identifier has priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.
Designated bridge has priority 32768, address 0001.e801.cbb4 Designated port id is 128.379, designated path cost 0 Number of transitions to forwarding state 1 BPDU : sent 121, received 5 The port is not in the Edge port mode Port 380 (TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/5/1) is designated Forwarding Port path cost 20000, Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.380 Designated root has priority 32768, address 0001.e801.cbb4 Designated bridge has priority 32768, address 0001.e801.cbb4 Designated port id is 128.
The following table displays the default values for RSTP. Table 73.
The default is 20 seconds. To view the current values for global parameters, use the show spanning-tree rstp command from EXEC privilege mode. Enabling SNMP Traps for Root Elections and Topology Changes To enable SNMP traps, use the following command. • Enable SNMP traps for RSTP, MSTP, and PVST+ collectively. snmp-server enable traps xstp Modifying Interface Parameters On interfaces in Layer 2 mode, you can set the port cost and port priority values.
snmp-server enable traps xstp Influencing RSTP Root Selection RSTP determines the root bridge, but you can assign one bridge a lower priority to increase the likelihood that it is selected as the root bridge. To change the bridge priority, use the following command. • Assign a number as the bridge priority or designate it as the primary or secondary root. PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE RSTP mode bridge-priority priority-value • priority-value The range is from 0 to 65535.
Example of Verifying an EdgePort is Enabled on an Interface To verify that EdgePort is enabled on a port, use the show spanning-tree rstp command from EXEC privilege mode or the show config command from INTERFACE mode. NOTE: Dell Networking recommends using the show config command from INTERFACE mode. In the following example, the bold line indicates that the interface is in EdgePort mode.
43 Software-Defined Networking (SDN) The Dell Networking OS supports software-defined networking (SDN). For more information, see the SDN Deployment Guide.
44 Security This chapter describes several ways to provide security to the Dell Networking system. For details about all the commands described in this chapter, refer to the Security chapter in the Dell Networking OS Command Reference Guide.
Enabling AAA Accounting The aaa accounting command allows you to create a record for any or all of the accounting functions monitored. To enable AAA accounting, use the following command. • Enable AAA accounting and create a record for monitoring the accounting function. CONFIGURATION mode aaa accounting {commands | exec | suppress | system level} {default | name} {start-stop | wait-start | stop-only} {tacacs+} The variables are: • system: sends accounting information of any other AAA configuration.
Example of Configuring AAA Accounting to Track EXEC and EXEC Privilege Level Command Use In the following sample configuration, AAA accounting is set to track all usage of EXEC commands and commands on privilege level 15.
NOTE: If a console user logs in with RADIUS authentication, the privilege level is applied from the RADIUS server if the privilege level is configured for that user in RADIUS, whether you configure RADIUS authorization. Configuration Task List for AAA Authentication The following sections provide the configuration tasks.
login authentication {method-list-name | default} To view the configuration, use the show config command in LINE mode or the show running-config in EXEC Privilege mode. NOTE: Dell Networking recommends using the none method only as a backup. This method does not authenticate users. The none and enable methods do not work with secure shell (SSH). You can create multiple method lists and assign them to different terminal lines.
The following example shows enabling local authentication for console and remote authentication for the VTY lines. Dell(config)# aaa authentication enable mymethodlist radius tacacs Dell(config)# line vty 0 9 Dell(config-line-vty)# enable authentication mymethodlist Server-Side Configuration Using AAA authentication, the switch acts as a RADIUS or TACACS+ client to send authentication requests to a TACACS+ or RADIUS server.
Privilege Levels Overview Limiting access to the system is one method of protecting the system and your network. However, at times, you might need to allow others access to the router and you can limit that access to a subset of commands. In Dell Networking OS, you can configure a privilege level for users who need limited access to the system. Every command in Dell Networking OS is assigned a privilege level of 0, 1, or 15. You can configure up to 16 privilege levels in Dell Networking OS.
username name [access-class access-list-name] [nopassword | password [encryption-type] password] [privilege level][secret] Configure the optional and required parameters: • name: Enter a text string up to 63 characters long. • access-class access-list-name: Enter the name of a configured IP ACL. • nopassword: Do not require the user to enter a password. • encryption-type: Enter 0 for plain text or 7 for encrypted text. • password: Enter a string. • privilege level The range is from 0 to 15.
CONFIGURATION mode username name [access-class access-list-name] [privilege level] [nopassword | password [encryption-type] password Secret] Configure the optional and required parameters: 2 • name: Enter a text string up to 63 characters(maximum) long. • access-class access-list-name: Restrict access by access-class.. • privilege level: The range is from 0 to 15. • nopassword: No password is required for the user to log in. • encryption-type: Enter 0 for plain text or 7 for encrypted text.
Dell(conf)#privilege config level 8 snmp-server Dell(conf)#end Dell#show running-config Current Configuration ... ! hostname Force10 ! enable password level 8 notjohn enable password Force10 ! username admin password 0 admin username john password 0 john privilege 8 ! The following example shows the Telnet session for user john. The show privilege command output confirms that john is in privilege level 8. In EXEC Privilege mode, john can access only the commands listed.
Configure the following optional and required parameters: • encryption-type: Enter 0 for plain text or 7 for encrypted text. • password: Enter a text string up to 32 characters long. To view the password configured for a terminal, use the show config command in LINE mode. Enabling and Disabling Privilege Levels To enable and disable privilege levels, use the following commands. • Set a user’s security level.
• ACL Configuration Information • Auto-Command • Privilege Levels After gaining authorization for the first time, you may configure these attributes. NOTE: RADIUS authentication/authorization is done for every login. There is no difference between first-time login and subsequent logins. Idle Time Every session line has its own idle-time. If the idle-time value is not changed, the default value of 30 minutes is used. RADIUS specifies idle-time allow for a user during a session before timeout.
Configuration Task List for RADIUS To authenticate users using RADIUS, you must specify at least one RADIUS server so that the system can communicate with and configure RADIUS as one of your authentication methods. The following list includes the configuration tasks for RADIUS.
login authentication {method-list-name | default} • This procedure is mandatory if you are not using default lists. To use the method list. CONFIGURATION mode authorization exec methodlist Specifying a RADIUS Server Host When configuring a RADIUS server host, you can set different communication parameters, such as the UDP port, the key password, the number of retries, and the timeout. To specify a RADIUS server host and configure its communication parameters, use the following command.
CONFIGURATION mode radius-server key [encryption-type] key • • encryption-type: enter 7 to encrypt the password. Enter 0 to keep the password as plain text. • key: enter a string. The key can be up to 42 characters long. You cannot use spaces in the key. Configure the number of times Dell Networking OS retransmits RADIUS requests. CONFIGURATION mode radius-server retransmit retries • • retries: the range is from 0 to 100. Default is 3 retries.
To select TACACS+ as the login authentication method, use the following commands. 1 Configure a TACACS+ server host. CONFIGURATION mode tacacs-server host {ip-address | host} Enter the IP address or host name of the TACACS+ server. Use this command multiple times to configure multiple TACACS+ server hosts. 2 Enter a text string (up to 16 characters long) as the name of the method list you wish to use with the TACAS+ authentication method.
Dell(conf)#username angeline password angeline Dell(conf)#%RPM0-P:CP %SEC-5-LOGIN_SUCCESS: Login successful for user angeline on vty0 (10.11.9.209) %RPM0-P:CP %SEC-3-AUTHENTICATION_ENABLE_SUCCESS: Enable password authentication success on vty0 ( 10.11.9.209 ) Monitoring TACACS+ To view information on TACACS+ transactions, use the following command. • View TACACS+ transactions to troubleshoot problems.
Example of Connecting with a TACACS+ Server Host To specify multiple TACACS+ server hosts, configure the tacacs-server host command multiple times. If you configure multiple TACACS+ server hosts, Dell Networking OS attempts to connect with them in the order in which they were configured. To view the TACACS+ configuration, use the show running-config tacacs+ command in EXEC Privilege mode. To delete a TACACS+ server host, use the no tacacs-server host {hostname | ip-address} command.
EXEC Privilege mode ssh {hostname} [-l username | -p port-number | -v {1 | 2}| -c encryption cipher | -m HMAC algorithm hostname is the IP address or host name of the remote device. Enter an IPv4 or IPv6 address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D). • • SSH V2 is enabled by default on all the modes. Display SSH connection information.
Example of Using SCP to Copy from an SSH Server on Another Switch The following example shows the use of SCP and SSH to copy a software image from one switch running SSH server on UDP port 99 to the local switch. Other SSH related command include: • crypto key generate : generate keys for the SSH server. • debug ip ssh : enables collecting SSH debug information. • ip scp topdir : identify a location for files used in secure copy transfer.
• rekey-limit: volume-based rekey threshold for an SSH session. The range is from 1 to 4096 to megabytes. The default is 1024 megabytes. Examples The following example configures the time-based rekey threshold for an SSH session to 30 minutes. Dell(conf)#ip ssh rekey time 30 The following example configures the volume-based rekey threshold for an SSH session to 4096 megabytes.
• hmac-sha2-256 The default HMAC algorithms are the following: • hmac-sha2-256 • hmac-sha1 • hmac-sha1-96 • hmac-md5 • hmac-md5-96 When FIPS is enabled, the default HMAC algorithm is hmac-sha2-256,hmac-sha1,hmac-sha1-96. Example of Configuring a HMAC Algorithm The following example shows you how to configure a HMAC algorithm list.
• Enable SSH password authentication. CONFIGURATION mode ip ssh password-authentication enable Example of Enabling SSH Password Authentication To view your SSH configuration, use the show ip ssh command from EXEC Privilege mode. Dell(conf)#ip ssh server enable Dell(conf)#ip ssh password-authentication enable Dell# show ip ssh SSH server : enabled. SSH server version : v1 and v2. SSH server vrf : default. SSH server ciphers : 3des-cbc,aes128-cbc,aes192-cbc,aes256-cbc,aes128-ctr,aes192ctr,aes256-ctr.
Configuring Host-Based SSH Authentication Authenticate a particular host. This method uses SSH version 2. To configure host-based authentication, use the following commands. 1 Configure RSA Authentication. Refer to Using RSA Authentication of SSH. 2 Create shosts by copying the public RSA key to the file shosts in the directory .ssh, and write the IP address of the host to the file. cp /etc/ssh/ssh_host_rsa_key.pub /.ssh/shosts Refer to the first example.
Using Client-Based SSH Authentication To SSH from the chassis to the SSH client, use the following command. This method uses SSH version 1 or version 2. If the SSH port is a non-default value, use the ip ssh server port number command to change the default port number. You may only change the port number when SSH is disabled. Then use the -p option with the ssh command. • SSH from the chassis to the SSH client. ssh ip_address Example of Client-Based SSH Authentication Dell#ssh 10.16.127.
Authentication Method VTY access-class support? Username access-class support? Remote authorization support? TACACS+ YES NO YES (with Dell Networking OS version 5.2.1.0 and later) RADIUS YES NO YES (with Dell Networking OS version 6.1.1.
how to deny incoming connections from subnet 10.0.0.0 without displaying a login prompt. The example uses TACACS+ as the authentication mechanism. Example of Configuring VTY Authorization Based on Access Class Retrieved from the Line (Per Network Address) Dell(conf)#ip access-list standard deny10 Dell(conf-ext-nacl)#permit 10.0.0.0/8 Dell(conf-ext-nacl)#deny any Dell(conf)# Dell(conf)#aaa authentication login tacacsmethod tacacs+ Dell(conf)#tacacs-server host 256.1.1.
• Applying an Accounting Method to a Role • Displaying Active Accounting Sessions for Roles • Configuring TACACS+ and RADIUS VSA Attributes for RBAC • Displaying User Roles • Displaying Accounting for User Roles • Displaying Information About Roles Logged into the Switch • Display Role Permissions Assigned to a Command Overview of RBAC With Role-Based Access Control (RBAC), access and authorization is controlled based on a user’s role.
1 Locally define a system administrator user role. This will give you access to login with full permissions even if network connectivity to remote authentication servers is not available. 2 Configure login authentication on the console. This ensures that all users are properly identified through authentication no matter the access point. If you do not configure login the authentication on the console, the system displays an error when you attempt to enable role-based only AAA authorization.
that are available to the system security administrator for cryptography operations, AAA, or the commands reserved solely for the system administrator. • Security Administrator (secadmin): This user role can control the security policy across the systems that are within a domain or network topology. The security administrator commands include FIPS mode enablement, password policies, inactivity timeouts, banner establishment, and cryptographic key operations for secure access paths.
Dell(conf)#do show userroles EXEC Privilege mode 3 After you create a user role, configure permissions for the new user role. Example of Creating a User Role The configuration in the following example creates a new user role, myrole, which inherits the security administrator (secadmin) permissions. Create a new user role, myrole and inherit security administrator permissions.
Dell#show role mode exec show users Role access: secadmin,sysadmin Example: Allow Security Administrator to Configure Spanning Tree The following example allows the security administrator (secadmin) to configure the spanning tree protocol. Note command is protocol spanning-tree. Dell(conf)#role configure addrole secadmin protocol spanning-tree Example: Allow Security Administrator to Access Interface Mode The following example allows the security administrator (secadmin) to access Interface mode.
By default, the system defined role, secadmin, is not allowed to configure protocols. The following example first grants the secadmin role to configure protocols and then removes access to configure protocols. Dell(conf)#role configure addrole secadmin protocol Dell(conf)#role configure deleterole secadmin protocol Example: Resets Only the Security Administrator role to its original setting. The following example resets only the secadmin role to its original setting.
denied access to the system because they do not have a role. For information about role only mode, see Configuring Role-based Only AAA Authorization. NOTE: Authentication services only validate the user ID and password combination. To determine which commands are permitted for users, configure authorization. For information about how to configure authorization for roles, see Configure AAA Authorization for Roles. To configure AAA authentication, use the aaa authentication command in CONFIGURATION mode.
authorization exec ucraaa accounting commands role netadmin line vty 2 login authentication ucraaa authorization exec ucraaa accounting commands role netadmin line vty 3 login authentication ucraaa authorization exec ucraaa accounting commands role netadmin line vty 4 login authentication ucraaa authorization exec ucraaa accounting commands role netadmin line vty 5 login authentication ucraaa authorization exec ucraaa accounting commands role netadmin line vty 6 login authentication ucraaa authorization exe
In the following example, you create an AV pair for a system-defined role, sysadmin. Force10-avpair= "shell:role=sysadmin" In the following example, you create an AV pair for a user-defined role. You must also define a role, using the userrole myrole inherit command on the switch to associate it with this AV pair. Force10-avpair= ”shell:role=myrole“ The string, “myrole”, is associated with a TACACS+ user group. The user IDs are associated with the user group.
Active accounted actions on tty3, User admin Priv 15 Role sysadmin Task ID 2, EXEC Accounting record, 00:00:26 Elapsed, service=shell Display Information About User Roles This section describes how to display information about user roles.
Displaying Information About Users Logged into the Switch To display information on all users logged into the switch, using the show users command in EXEC Privilege mode. The output displays privilege level and/or user role. The mode is displayed at the start of the output and both the privilege and roles for all users is also displayed. If the role is not defined, the system displays "unassigned" .
45 Service Provider Bridging Service provider bridging provides the ability to add a second VLAN ID tag in an Ethernet frame and is referred to as VLAN stacking in the Dell Networking OS. VLAN Stacking VLAN stacking, also called Q-in-Q, is defined in IEEE 802.1ad — Provider Bridges, which is an amendment to IEEE 802.1Q — Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks. It enables service providers to use 802.
Figure 112. VLAN Stacking in a Service Provider Network Important Points to Remember • Interfaces that are members of the Default VLAN and are configured as VLAN-Stack access or trunk ports do not switch untagged traffic. To switch traffic, add these interfaces to a non-default VLAN-Stack-enabled VLAN. • Dell Networking cautions against using the same MAC address on different customer VLANs, on the same VLAN-Stack VLAN.
3 Enabling VLAN-Stacking for a VLAN. Related Configuration Tasks • Configuring the Protocol Type Value for the Outer VLAN Tag • Configuring Dell Networking OS Options for Trunk Ports • Debugging VLAN Stacking • VLAN Stacking in Multi-Vendor Networks Creating Access and Trunk Ports To create access and trunk ports, use the following commands. • Access port — a port on the service provider edge that directly connects to the customer. An access port may belong to only one service provider VLAN.
Enable VLAN-Stacking for a VLAN To enable VLAN-Stacking for a VLAN, use the following command. • Enable VLAN-Stacking for the VLAN. INTERFACE VLAN mode vlan-stack compatible Example of Viewing VLAN Stack Member Status To display the status and members of a VLAN, use the show vlan command from EXEC Privilege mode. Members of a VLAN-Stackingenabled VLAN are marked with an M in column Q.
interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/1 no ip address portmode hybrid switchport vlan-stack trunk shutdown Dell(conf-if-te-1/1/1/1)#interface vlan 100 Dell(conf-if-vl-100)#untagged tengigabitethernet 1/1/1/1 Dell(conf-if-vl-100)#interface vlan 101 Dell(conf-if-vl-101)#tagged tengigabitethernet 1/1/1/1 Dell(conf-if-vl-101)#interface vlan 103 Dell(conf-if-vl-103)#vlan-stack compatible Dell(conf-if-vl-103-stack)#member tengigabitethernet 1/1/1/1 Dell(conf-if-vl-103-stack)#do show vlan Codes: Q: U x G - * - Defau
If the next-hop system’s TPID does not match the outer-tag TPID of the incoming frame, the system drops the frame. For example, as shown in the following, the frame originating from Building A is tagged VLAN RED, and then double-tagged VLAN PURPLE on egress at R4. The TPID on the outer tag is 0x9100. R2’s TPID must also be 0x9100, and it is, so R2 forwards the frame.
Figure 113.
Figure 114.
Figure 115. Single and Double-Tag TPID Mismatch VLAN Stacking Packet Drop Precedence VLAN stacking packet-drop precedence is supported on the switch. The drop eligible indicator (DEI) bit in the S-Tag indicates to a service provider bridge which packets it should prefer to drop when congested. Enabling Drop Eligibility Enable drop eligibility globally before you can honor or mark the DEI value. When you enable drop eligibility, DEI mapping or marking takes place according to the defaults.
Table 75. Drop Eligibility Behavior Ingress Egress DEI Disabled DEI Enabled Normal Port Normal Port Retain CFI Set CFI to 0. Trunk Port Trunk Port Retain inner tag CFI Retain inner tag CFI. Retain outer tag CFI Set outer tag CFI to 0. Retain inner tag CFI Retain inner tag CFI Set outer tag CFI to 0 Set outer tag CFI to 0 Access Port Trunk Port To enable drop eligibility globally, use the following command. • Make packets eligible for dropping based on their DEI value.
Marking Egress Packets with a DEI Value On egress, you can set the DEI value according to a different mapping than ingress. For ingress information, refer to Honoring the Incoming DEI Value. To mark egress packets, use the following command. • Set the DEI value on egress according to the color currently assigned to the packet.
NOTE: The ability to map incoming C-Tag dot1p to any S-Tag dot1p requires installing up to eight entries in the Layer 2 QoS and Layer 2 ACL table for each configured customer VLAN. The scalability of this feature is limited by the impact of the 1:8 expansion in these content addressable memory (CAM) tables.
• vman-qos-dual-fp: mark the S-Tag dot1p and queue the frame according to the S-Tag dot1p. This method requires twice as many CAM entries as vman-qos and FP blocks in multiples of 2. The default is: 0 FP blocks for vman-qos and vman-qos-dual-fp. 2 The new CAM configuration is stored in NVRAM and takes effect only after a save and reload. EXEC Privilege mode copy running-config startup-config 3 Reload the system. reload 4 Map C-Tag dot1p values to a S-Tag dot1p value.
Figure 117. VLAN Stacking without L2PT You might need to transport control traffic transparently through the intermediate network to the other region. Layer 2 protocol tunneling enables BPDUs to traverse the intermediate network by identifying frames with the Bridge Group Address, rewriting the destination MAC to a user-configured non-reserved address, and forwarding the frames.
Figure 118. VLAN Stacking with L2PT Implementation Information • L2PT is available for STP, RSTP, MSTP, and PVST+ BPDUs. • No protocol packets are tunneled when you enable VLAN stacking. • L2PT requires the default CAM profile. Enabling Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling To enable Layer 2 protocol tunneling, use the following command. 1 Verify that the system is running the default CAM profile. Use this CAM profile for L2PT.
show cam-profile 2 Enable protocol tunneling globally on the system. CONFIGURATION mode protocol-tunnel enable 3 Tunnel BPDUs the VLAN. INTERFACE VLAN mode protocol-tunnel stp Specifying a Destination MAC Address for BPDUs By default, Dell Networking OS uses a Dell Networking-unique MAC address for tunneling BPDUs. You can configure another value. To specify a destination MAC address for BPDUs, use the following command.
Debugging Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling To debug Layer 2 protocol tunneling, use the following command. • Display debugging information for L2PT. EXEC Privilege mode debug protocol-tunnel Provider Backbone Bridging IEEE 802.1ad—Provider Bridges amends 802.1Q—Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks so that service providers can use 802.1Q architecture to offer separate VLANs to customers with no coordination between customers, and minimal coordination between customers and the provider. 802.
46 sFlow sFlow is a standard-based sampling technology embedded within switches and routers which is used to monitor network traffic. It is designed to provide traffic monitoring for high-speed networks with many switches and routers.
hardware sampling rate is backed-off from 512 to 1024. Note that port 1 maintains its sampling rate of 16384; port 1 is unaffected because it maintains its configured sampling rate of 16384.: • If the interface states are up and the sampling rate is not configured on the port, the default sampling rate is calculated based on the line speed. • If the interface states are shut down, the sampling rate is set using the global sampling rate.
Egress Management Interface sFlow services are disabled Global default sampling rate: 32768 Global default counter polling interval: 20 Global default extended maximum header size: 128 bytes Global extended information enabled: switch 1 collectors configured Collector IP addr: 100.1.1.1, Agent IP addr: 1.1.1.
Example of the show sflow command when the sflow max-header-size extended is configured globally Example of viewing the sflow max-header-size extended on an Interface Mode Example of the show running-config sflow Command sFlow Show Commands Dell Networking OS includes the following sFlow display commands. • • • Displaying Show sFlow Globally Displaying Show sFlow on an Interface Displaying Show sFlow on a Line Card Displaying Show sFlow Global To view sFlow statistics, use the following command.
Configured sampling rate Actual sampling rate Counter polling interval Extended max header size Samples rcvd from h/w :16384 :16384 :20 :128 :0 The following example shows the show running-config interface command.
CONFIGURATION mode or INTERFACE mode sflow polling-interval interval value • interval value: in seconds. The range is from 15 to 86400 seconds. The default is 20 seconds. Back-Off Mechanism If the sampling rate for an interface is set to a very low value, the CPU can get overloaded with flow samples under high-traffic conditions. In such a scenario, a binary back-off mechanism gets triggered, which doubles the sampling-rate (halves the number of samples per second) for all interfaces.
0 sFlow samples collected stack-unit 1 Port set 0 Hu 1/2/1: configured rate 131072, actual rate 131072 Dell# If you did not enable any extended information, the show output displays the following (shown in bold).
IP SA IP DA srcAS and srcPeerAS dstAS and dstPeerAS Description BGP BGP Exported Exported Extended gateway data is packed.
47 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is designed to manage devices on IP networks by monitoring device operation, which might require administrator intervention. NOTE: On Dell Networking routers, standard and private SNMP management information bases (MIBs) are supported, including all Get and a limited number of Set operations (such as set vlan and copy cmd).
Implementation Information The following describes SNMP implementation information. • • • • Dell Networking OS supports SNMP version 1 as defined by RFC 1155, 1157, and 1212, SNMP version 2c as defined by RFC 1901, and SNMP version 3 as defined by RFC 2571. Dell Networking OS supports up to 16 trap receivers. Dell Networking OS implementation of the sFlow MIB supports sFlow configuration via SNMP sets.
1 SNMPv3 authentication provides only the sha option when the FIPS mode is enabled. 2 SNMPv3 privacy provides only the aes128 privacy option when the FIPS mode is enabled. 3 If you attempt to enable or disable FIPS mode and if any SNMPv3 users are previously configured, an error message is displayed stating you must delete all of the SNMP users before changing the FIPS mode. 4 A message is logged indicating whether FIPS mode is enabled for SNMPv3.
Creating a Community For SNMPv1 and SNMPv2, create a community to enable the community-based security in Dell Networking OS. The management station generates requests to either retrieve or alter the value of a management object and is called the SNMP manager. A network element that processes SNMP requests is called an SNMP agent. An SNMP community is a group of SNMP agents and managers that are allowed to interact.
• Configure the user with an authorization password (password privileges only). CONFIGURATION mode snmp-server user name group-name 3 noauth auth md5 auth-password • Configure an SNMP group (password privileges only). CONFIGURATION mode snmp-server group groupname {oid-tree} auth read name write name • Configure an SNMPv3 view. CONFIGURATION mode snmp-server view view-name 3 noauth {included | excluded} NOTE: To give a user read and write privileges, repeat this step for each privilege type.
The following example shows reading the value of the next managed object. > snmpgetnext -v 2c -c mycommunity 10.11.131.161 .1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3.0 SNMPv2-MIB::sysContact.0 = STRING: > snmpgetnext -v 2c -c mycommunity 10.11.131.161 sysContact.0 The following example shows reading the value of the many managed objects at one time. > snmpwalk -v 2c -c mycommunity 10.11.131.161 .1.3.6.1.2.1.1 SNMPv2-MIB::sysDescr.0 = STRING: Dell Real Time Operating System Software Dell Operating System Version: 1.
CONFIGURATION mode snmpset -v version -c community agent-ip sysContact.0 s “contact-info” You may use up to 55 characters. • The default is None. (From a management station) Identify the physical location of the system (for example, San Jose, 350 Holger Way, 1st floor lab, rack A1-1). CONFIGURATION mode snmpset -v version -c community agent-ip sysLocation.0 s “location-info” You may use up to 55 characters. The default is None.
Example of RFC-Defined SNMP Traps and Related Enable Commands The following example lists the RFC-defined SNMP traps and the command used to enable each. The coldStart and warmStart traps are enabled using a single command. snmp authentication string. snmp coldstart snmp linkdown snmp linkup SNMP_AUTH_FAIL:SNMP Authentication failed.Request with invalid community SNMP_COLD_START: Agent Initialized - SNMP COLD_START. SNMP_WARM_START:Agent Initialized - SNMP WARM_START.
SMI::enterprises.6027.3.30.1.1.1 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.30.1.1 = STRING: "NOT_REACHABLE: Syslog server 10.11.226.121 (port: 9140) is not reachable" SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.6.1.1.2.0 = INTEGER: 2 Following is the sample audit log message that other syslog servers that are reachable receive: Oct 21 00:46:13: dv-fedgov-s4810-6: %EVL-6-NOT_REACHABLE:Syslog server 10.11.226.
MIB Object OID Object Values Description copySrcFileName .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.5.1.1.1.1.4 Path (if the file is not in the current directory) and filename. Specifies name of the file. 1 = Dell Networking OS file Specifies the type of file to copy to. copyDestFileType .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.5.1.1.1.1.5 2 = running-config 3 = startup-config • • • copyDestFileLocation .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.5.1.1.1.1.
CONFIGURATION mode snmp-server community community-name rw 2 Copy the f10-copy-config.mib MIB from the Dell iSupport web page to the server to which you are copying the configuration file. 3 On the server, use the snmpset command as shown in the following example. snmpset -v snmp-version -c community-name -m mib_path/f10-copy-config.mib force10system-ipaddress mib-object.index {i | a | s} object-value... • Every specified object must have an object value and must precede with the keyword i.
FTOS-COPY-CONFIG-MIB::copySrcFileType.100 = INTEGER: runningConfig(2) FTOS-COPY-CONFIG-MIB::copyDestFileType.100 = INTEGER: startupConfig(3) Copying the Startup-Config Files to the Running-Config To copy the startup-config to the running-config from a UNIX machine, use the following command. • Copy the startup-config to the running-config from a UNIX machine. snmpset -c private -v 2c force10system-ip-address copySrcFileType.index i 3 copyDestFileType.
• Copy the startup-config to the server via TFTP from the UNIX machine. snmpset -v 2c -c public -m ./f10-copy-config.mib force10system-ip-address copySrcFileType.index i 3 copyDestFileType.index i 1 copyDestFileName.index s filepath/ filename copyDestFileLocation.index i 3 copyServerAddress.index a server-ip-address Example of Copying Configuration Files via TFTP From a UNIX Machine .snmpset -v 2c -c private -m ./f10-copy-config.mib 10.10.10.10 copySrcFileType.4 i 3 copyDestFileType.
MIB Object OID Values Description 4 = file exists 5 = file not found 6 = timeout 7 = unknown copyEntryRowStatus .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.5.1.1.1.1.15 Row status Specifies the state of the copy operation. Uses CreateAndGo when you are performing the copy. The state is set to active when the copy is completed. Obtaining a Value for MIB Objects To obtain a value for any of the MIB objects, use the following command. • Get a copy-config MIB object value. snmpset -v 2c -c public -m ./f10-copy-config.
MIB Support to Display the Available Memory Size on Flash Dell Networking provides more MIB objects to display the available memory size on flash memory. The following table lists the MIB object that contains the available memory size on flash memory. Table 81. MIB Objects for Displaying the Available Memory Size on Flash via SNMP MIB Object OID Description chStackUnitFlashUsageUtil Contains flash memory usage in percentage.
MIB Object OID chSysCoresProcess Description Contains information that includes the process names that generated each core file. Viewing the Software Core Files Generated by the System • To view the software core files generated by the system, use the following command. snmpwalk -v2c -c public 192.168.60.120 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.10.1.2.10 enterprises.6027.3.10.1.2.10.1.1.1.1 = 1 enterprises.6027.3.10.1.2.10.1.1.1.2 = 2 enterprises.6027.3.10.1.2.10.1.1.1.3 = 3 enterprises.6027.3.10.1.2.10.1.1.2.
> snmpset -v2c -c mycommunity 10.11.131.185 .1.3.6.1.2.1.17.7.1.4.3.1.1.1107787786 s "My VLAN" SNMPv2-SMI::mib-2.17.7.1.4.3.1.1.
SNMPv2-SMI::mib-2.17.7.1.4.3.1.2.1107787786 = Hex-STRING: 40 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 SNMPv2-SMI::mib-2.17.7.1.4.3.1.4.
Fetch Dynamic MAC Entries using SNMP Dell Networking supports the RFC 1493 dot1d table for the default VLAN and the dot1q table for all other VLANs. NOTE: The 802.1q Q-BRIDGE MIB defines VLANs regarding 802.1d, as 802.1d itself does not define them. As a switchport must belong a VLAN (the default VLAN or a configured VLAN), all MAC address learned on a switchport are associated with a VLAN. For this reason, the Q-Bridge MIB is used for MAC address query.
Example of Fetching MAC Addresses Learned on a Port-Channel Using SNMP Use dot3aCurAggFdbTable to fetch the learned MAC address of a port-channel. The instance number is the decimal conversion of the MAC address concatenated with the port-channel number.
Table 84. MIB Objects for Viewing the System Image on Flash Partitions MIB Object OID Description MIB chSysSwInPartitionAImgVers 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.10.1.2.8.1.11 List the version string of the system image in Flash Partition A. Chassis MIB chSysSwInPartitionBImgVers 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.10.1.2.8.1.12 List the version string of the system image in Flash Partition B.
Example of Viewing Changed Interface State for Monitored Ports Layer 3 LAG does not include this support. SNMP trap works for the Layer 2 / Layer 3 / default mode LAG. SNMPv2-MIB::sysUpTime.0 = Timeticks: (8500842) 23:36:48.42 SNMPv2-MIB::snmpTrapOID.0 = OID: IF-MIB::linkDown IF-MIB::ifIndex.33865785 = INTEGER: 33865785 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.1.1.4.1.2 = STRING: "OSTATE_DN: Changed interface state Te 1/1/1" 2010-02-10 14:22:39 10.16.130.4 [10.16.130.4]: SNMPv2-MIB::sysUpTime.
48 Storm Control Storm control allows you to control unknown-unicast, muticast, and broadcast traffic on Layer 2 and Layer 3 physical interfaces. Dell Networking Operating System (OS) Behavior: Dell Networking OS supports unknown-unicast, muticast, and broadcast control for Layer 2 and Layer 3 traffic. To view the storm control broadcast configuration show storm-control broadcast | multicast | unknown-unicast | pfc-llfc[interface] command.
• The storm control is calculated in packets per second. • Configure storm control. • INTERFACE mode Configure the packets per second of broadcast traffic allowed on an interface (ingress only). INTERFACE mode storm-control broadcast packets_per_second in • Configure the packets per second of multicast traffic allowed on C-Series or S-Series interface (ingress only) network only.
Detect PFC Storm The following section explains the procedure to detect the PFC storm. You can detect the PFC storm by polling the lossless queues in a port or priority periodically. When the queue depth is not equal to zero or when the queue has traffic after subsequent number of polling, then the port or priority is detected to have the PFC storm. • • • Use the polling—interval {interval in milli-seconds} command to set the polling interval. The queue traffic and egress counters are polled.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------Te 0/0 3 2 0 0 4 2 0 0 5 2 0 0 6 2 0 0 Te 0/1 3 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 Te 0/2 3 2 0 0 4 2 0 0 5 2 0 0 6 2 0 0 Te 0/3 3 2 0 0 4 2 0 0 5 2 0 0 6 2 0 0 Te 0/4 3 2 0 0 4 2 0 0 5 2 0 0 6 2 0 0 Te 0/5 3 2 0 0 4 2 0 0 5 2 0 0 6 2 0 0 Te 0/80 3 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 Dell# 812 Storm Control
49 Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) The spanning tree protocol (STP) is supported on Dell Networking OS.
Configure Spanning Tree Configuring spanning tree is a two-step process.
Configuring Interfaces for Layer 2 Mode All interfaces on all switches that participate in spanning tree must be in Layer 2 mode and enabled. Figure 119. Example of Configuring Interfaces for Layer 2 Mode To configure and enable the interfaces for Layer 2, use the following command. 1 If the interface has been assigned an IP address, remove it. INTERFACE mode no ip address 2 Place the interface in Layer 2 mode. INTERFACE switchport 3 Enable the interface.
Example of the show config Command To verify that an interface is in Layer 2 mode and enabled, use the show config command from INTERFACE mode. Dell(conf-if-te-1/1/1/1)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/1 no ip address switchport no shutdown Dell(conf-if-te-1/1/1/1)# Enabling Spanning Tree Protocol Globally Enable the spanning tree protocol globally; it is not enabled by default.
no disable Examples of Verifying Spanning Tree Information To disable STP globally for all Layer 2 interfaces, use the disable command from PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE mode. To verify that STP is enabled, use the show config command from PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE mode.
Adding an Interface to the Spanning Tree Group To add a Layer 2 interface to the spanning tree topology, use the following command. • Enable spanning tree on a Layer 2 interface. INTERFACE mode spanning-tree 0 Modifying Global Parameters You can modify the spanning tree parameters. The root bridge sets the values for forward-delay, hello-time, and max-age and overwrites the values set on other bridges participating in STP.
PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE mode hello-time seconds NOTE: With large configurations (especially those with more ports) Dell Networking recommends increasing the hellotime. The range is from 1 to 10. • the default is 2 seconds. Change the max-age parameter (the refresh interval for configuration information that is generated by recomputing the spanning tree topology). PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE mode max-age seconds The range is from 6 to 40. The default is 20 seconds.
Enabling PortFast The PortFast feature enables interfaces to begin forwarding traffic approximately 30 seconds sooner. Interfaces forward frames by default until they receive a BPDU that indicates that they should behave otherwise; they do not go through the Learning and Listening states. The bpduguard shutdown-on-violation option causes the interface hardware to be shut down when it receives a BPDU.
• When you add a physical port to a port channel already in the Error Disable state, the new member port is also disabled in the hardware. • When you remove a physical port from a port channel in the Error Disable state, the Error Disabled state is cleared on this physical port (the physical port is enabled in the hardware). • You can clear the Error Disabled state with any of the following methods: • Perform a shutdown command on the interface.
Configured hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15 Interface Designated Name PortID Prio Cost Sts Cost Bridge ID PortID ------------ -------- ---- ------- --- ------- -------------------Te 1/1/6/1 128.263 128 20000 FWD 20000 32768 0001.e805.fb07 128.653 Te 1/1/7/1 128.264 128 20000 EDS 20000 32768 0001.e85d.0e90 128.264 Interface Name Role PortID Prio Cost Sts Cost Link-type Edge ------------ ------ -------- ---- ------- --- ---------------Te 1/1/6/1 Root 128.
Root Guard Scenario For example, as shown in the following illustration (STP topology 1, upper left) Switch A is the root bridge in the network core. Switch C functions as an access switch connected to an external device. The link between Switch C and Switch B is in a Blocking state. The flow of STP BPDUs is shown in the illustration. In STP topology 2 (shown in the upper right), STP is enabled on device D on which a software bridge application is started to connect to the network.
• Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) • Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) • Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) • Per-VLAN Spanning Tree Plus (PVST+) • When enabled on a port, root guard applies to all VLANs configured on the port. • You cannot enable root guard and loop guard at the same time on an STP port. For example, if you configure root guard on a port on which loop guard is already configured, the following error message displays: • % Error: LoopGuard is configured.
Example of Configuring all Spanning Tree Types to be Hitless Dell(conf)#redundancy protocol xstp Dell#show running-config redundancy ! redundancy protocol xstp Dell# STP Loop Guard The STP loop guard feature provides protection against Layer 2 forwarding loops (STP loops) caused by a hardware failure, such as a cable failure or an interface fault.
Figure 123. STP Loop Guard Prevents Forwarding Loops Configuring Loop Guard Enable STP loop guard on a per-port or per-port channel basis. The following conditions apply to a port enabled with loop guard: • Loop guard is supported on any STP-enabled port or port-channel interface.
• • Enabling Portfast BPDU guard and loop guard at the same time on a port results in a port that remains in a blocking state and prevents traffic from flowing through it. For example, when Portfast BPDU guard and loop guard are both configured: • If a BPDU is received from a remote device, BPDU guard places the port in an Err-Disabled Blocking state and no traffic is forwarded on the port.
50 SupportAssist SupportAssist sends troubleshooting data securely to Dell. SupportAssist in this Dell Networking OS release does not support automated email notification at the time of hardware fault alert, automatic case creation, automatic part dispatch, or reports. SupportAssist requires Dell Networking OS 9.9(0.0) and SmartScripts 9.7 or later to be installed on the Dell Networking device. For more information on SmartScripts, see Dell Networking Open Automation guide. Figure 124.
Configuring SupportAssist Using a Configuration Wizard You are guided through a series of queries to configure SupportAssist. The generated commands are added to the running configuration, including the DNS resolve commands, if configured. This command starts the configuration wizard for the SupportAssist. At any time, you can exit by entering Ctrl-C. If necessary, you can skip some data entry. Enable the SupportAssist service.
making such transfers, Dell shall ensure appropriate protection is in place to safeguard the Collected Data being transferred in connection with SupportAssist. If you are downloading SupportAssist on behalf of a company or other legal entity, you are further certifying to Dell that you have appropriate authority to provide this consent on behalf of that entity.
support-assist activity {full-transfer | core-transfer} start now Dell#support-assist activity full-transfer start now Dell#support-assist activity core-transfer start now Configuring SupportAssist Activity SupportAssist Activity mode allows you to configure and view the action-manifest file for a specific activity. To configure SupportAssist activity, use the following commands. 1 Move to the SupportAssist Activity mode for an activity. Allows you to configure customized details for a specific activity.
action-manifest remove Dell(conf-supportassist-act-full-transfer)#action-manifest remove custom_file1.json Dell(conf-supportassist-act-full-transfer)# Dell(conf-supportassist-act-event-transfer)#action-manifest remove custom_event_file1.json Dell(conf-supportassist-act-event-transfer)# 6 Enable a specific SupportAssist activity. By default, the full transfer includes the core files. When you disable the core transfer activity, the full transfer excludes the core files.
Configuring SupportAssist Person SupportAssist Person mode allows you to configure name, email addresses, phone, method and time zone for contacting the person. SupportAssist Person configurations are optional for the SupportAssist service. To configure SupportAssist person, use the following commands. 1 Configure the contact name for an individual.
SUPPORTASSIST SERVER mode [no] proxy-ip-address {ipv4-address | ipv6-address}port port-number [ username userid password [encryption-type] password ] Dell(conf-supportassist-serv-default)#proxy-ip-address 10.0.0.1 port 90 username test password 0 test1 Dell(conf-supportassist-serv-default)# 3 Enable communication with the SupportAssist server.
activity event-transfer enable action-manifest install default ! activity core-transfer enable ! contact-company name Dell street-address F lane , Sector 30 address city Brussels state HeadState country Belgium postalcode S328J3 ! contact-person first Fred last Nash email-address primary des@sed.com alternate sed@dol.com phone primary 123422 alternate 8395729 preferred-method email time-zone zone +05:30 start-time 12:23 end-time 15:23 ! server Dell enable url http://1.1.1.
51 System Time and Date System time and date settings and the network time protocol (NTP) are supported on Dell Networking OS. You can set system times and dates and maintained through the NTP. They are also set through the Dell Networking Operating System (OS) command line interfaces (CLIs) and hardware settings. The Dell Networking OS supports reaching an NTP server through different VRFs. You can configure a maximum of eight logging servers across different VRFs or the same VRF.
Following conventions established by the telephone industry [BEL86], the accuracy of each server is defined by a number called the stratum, with the topmost level (primary servers) assigned as one and each level downwards (secondary servers) in the hierarchy assigned as one greater than the preceding level. Dell Networking OS synchronizes with a time-serving host to get the correct time. You can set Dell Networking OS to poll specific NTP time-serving hosts for the current time.
Related Configuration Tasks • Configuring NTP Broadcasts • Disabling NTP on an Interface • Configuring a Source IP Address for NTP Packets (optional) Enabling NTP NTP is disabled by default. To enable NTP, specify an NTP server to which the Dell Networking system synchronizes. To specify multiple servers, enter the command multiple times. You may specify an unlimited number of servers at the expense of CPU resources. • Specify the NTP server to which the Dell Networking system synchronizes.
Disabling NTP on an Interface By default, NTP is enabled on all active interfaces. If you disable NTP on an interface, Dell Networking OS drops any NTP packets sent to that interface. To disable NTP on an interface, use the following command. • Disable NTP on the interface. INTERFACE mode ntp disable To view whether NTP is configured on the interface, use the show config command in INTERFACE mode. If ntp disable is not listed in the show config command output, NTP is enabled.
To configure NTP authentication, use the following commands. 1 Enable NTP authentication. CONFIGURATION mode ntp authenticate 2 Set an authentication key. CONFIGURATION mode ntp authentication-key number md5 key Configure the following parameters: • • 3 number: the range is from 1 to 4294967295. This number must be the same as the number in the ntp trusted-key command. key: enter a text string. This text string is encrypted. Define a trusted key.
1w6d23h : NTP: rcv packet from 192.168.1.1 leap 0, mode 4, version 3, stratum 1, ppoll 1024 rtdel 0000 (0.000000), rtdsp AF587 (10959.090820), refid 4C4F434C (76.79.67.76) ref CD7E14FD.43F7CED9 (16:29:49.265 UTC Wed Apr 1 2009) org CD7F5368.D0535000 (15:8:24.813 UTC Thu Apr 2 2009) rec CD7F5368.D0000000 (15:8:24.812 UTC Thu Apr 2 2009) xmt CD7F5368.D0000000 (15:8:24.812 UTC Thu Apr 2 2009) inp CD7F5368.D1974000 (15:8:24.
Configuring a Custom-defined Period for NTP time Synchronization You can configure the system to send an audit log message to a syslog server if the time difference from the NTP server is greater than a threshold value (offset-threshold). However, time synchronization still occurs. To configure the offset-threshold, follow this procedure. • Specify the threshold time interval before which the system generates an NTP audit log message if the system time deviates from the NTP server.
Setting the Timezone Universal time coordinated (UTC) is the time standard based on the International Atomic Time standard, commonly known as Greenwich Mean time. When determining system time, include the differentiator between UTC and your local timezone. For example, San Jose, CA is the Pacific Timezone with a UTC offset of -8. To set the clock timezone, use the following command. • Set the clock to the appropriate timezone.
• end-day: enter the number of the day. The range is from 1 to 31. You can enter the name of a month to change the order of the display to time day month year. • end-year: enter a four-digit number as the year. The range is from 1993 to 2035. • end-time: enter the time in hours:minutes. For the hour variable, use the 24-hour format; example, 17:15 is 5:15 pm. • offset: (OPTIONAL) enter the number of minutes to add during the summer-time period. The range is from 1 to1440. The default is 60 minutes.
Examples of the clock summer-time recurring Command The following example shows the clock summer-time recurring command.
52 Uplink Failure Detection (UFD) Uplink failure detection (UFD) provides detection of the loss of upstream connectivity and, if used with network interface controller (NIC) teaming, automatic recovery from a failed link. Feature Description A switch provides upstream connectivity for devices, such as servers. If a switch loses its upstream connectivity, downstream devices also lose their connectivity.
Figure 126. Uplink Failure Detection How Uplink Failure Detection Works UFD creates an association between upstream and downstream interfaces. The association of uplink and downlink interfaces is called an uplink-state group. An interface in an uplink-state group can be a physical interface or a port-channel (LAG) aggregation of physical interfaces. An enabled uplink-state group tracks the state of all assigned upstream interfaces.
Figure 127. Uplink Failure Detection Example If only one of the upstream interfaces in an uplink-state group goes down, a specified number of downstream ports associated with the upstream interface are put into a Link-Down state. You can configure this number and is calculated by the ratio of the upstream port bandwidth to the downstream port bandwidth in the same uplink-state group.
• If one of the upstream interfaces in an uplink-state group goes down, either a user-configurable set of downstream ports or all the downstream ports in the group are put in an Operationally Down state with an UFD Disabled error. The order in which downstream ports are disabled is from the lowest numbered port to the highest.
NOTE: Downstream interfaces in an uplink-state group are put into a Link-Down state with an UFD-Disabled error message only when all upstream interfaces in the group go down. To revert to the default setting, use the no downstream disable links command. 4 (Optional) Enable auto-recovery so that UFD-disabled downstream ports in the uplink-state group come up when a disabled upstream port in the group comes back up.
Example of Syslog Messages Before and After Entering the clear ufd-disable uplink-state-group Command (S50) The following example message shows the Syslog messages that display when you clear the UFD-Disabled state from all disabled downstream interfaces in an uplink-state group by using the clear ufd-disable uplink-state-group group-id command. All downstream interfaces return to an operationally up state.
• • For a 50-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fiftyGigE then the slot/port/subport information. • For a 100-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword hundredGigE then the slot/port/subport information. • For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. If a downstream interface in an uplink-state group is disabled (Oper Down state) by uplink-state tracking because an upstream port is down, the message error-disabled[UFD] displays in the output.
Sample Configuration: Uplink Failure Detection The following example shows a sample configuration of UFD on a switch/router in which you configure as follows. • Configure uplink-state group 3. • Add downstream links Tengigabitethernet 1/1/1, 1/2/1, 1/5/1, 1/9/1, 1/11/1, and 1/12/1. • Configure two downstream links to be disabled if an upstream link fails. • Add upstream links Tengigabitethernet 1/3/1 and 1/4/1. • Add a text description for the group.
53 Tunneling Tunnel interfaces create a logical tunnel for IPv4 or IPv6 traffic. Tunneling supports RFC 2003, RFC 2473, and 4213. DSCP, hop-limits, flow label values, open shortest path first (OSPF) v2, and OSPFv3 are supported. Internet control message protocol (ICMP) error relay, PATH MTU transmission, and fragmented packets are not supported.
Dell(conf-if-tu-2)#show config ! interface Tunnel 2 no ip address ipv6 address 2::1/64 tunnel destination 90.1.1.1 tunnel source 60.1.1.1 tunnel mode ipv6ip no shutdown The following sample configuration shows a tunnel configured in IPIP mode (IPv4 tunnel carries IPv4 and IPv6 traffic): Dell(conf)#interface tunnel 3 Dell(conf-if-tu-3)#tunnel source 5::5 Dell(conf-if-tu-3)#tunnel destination 8::9 Dell(conf-if-tu-3)#tunnel mode ipv6 Dell(conf-if-tu-3)#ip address 3.1.1.
Configuring a Tunnel Interface You can configure the tunnel interface using the ip unnumbered and ipv6 unnumbered commands. To configure the tunnel interface to operate without a unique explicit IP or IPv6 address, select the interface from which the tunnel borrows its address. The following sample configuration shows how to use the interface tunnel configuration commands. Dell(conf-if-te-1/1/1/1)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/1 ip address 20.1.1.
Configuring Tunnel source anylocal Decapsulation The tunnel source anylocal command allows a multipoint receive-only tunnel to decapsulate tunnel packets addressed to any IPv4 or IPv6 (depending on the tunnel mode) address configured on the switch that is operationally UP. The source anylocal parameters can be used for packet decapsulation instead of the ip address or interface (tunnel allowremote command), but only on multipoint receive-only mode tunnels.
54 Upgrade Procedures To find the upgrade procedures, go to the Dell Networking OS Release Notes for your system type to see all the requirements needed to upgrade to the desired Dell Networking OS version. To upgrade your system type, follow the procedures in the Dell Networking OS Release Notes. Get Help with Upgrades Direct any questions or concerns about the Dell Networking OS upgrade procedures to the Dell Technical Support Center. You can reach Technical Support: • On the web: http://www.dell.
55 Virtual LANs (VLANs) Virtual LANs (VLANs) are a logical broadcast domain or logical grouping of interfaces in a local area network (LAN) in which all data received is kept locally and broadcast to all members of the group. When in Layer 2 mode, VLANs move traffic at wire speed and can span multiple devices. The system supports up to 4093 port-based VLANs and one default VLAN, as specified in IEEE 802.1Q.
Default VLAN When you configure interfaces for Layer 2 mode, they are automatically placed in the Default VLAN as untagged interfaces. Only untagged interfaces can belong to the Default VLAN. The following example displays the outcome of placing an interface in Layer 2 mode. To configure an interface for Layer 2 mode, use the switchport command.
VLANs and Port Tagging To add an interface to a VLAN, the interface must be in Layer 2 mode. After you place an interface in Layer 2 mode, the interface is automatically placed in the Default VLAN. Dell Networking OS supports IEEE 802.1Q tagging at the interface level to filter traffic. When you enable tagging, a tag header is added to the frame after the destination and source MAC addresses. That information is preserved as the frame moves through the network.
• Configure a port-based VLAN (if the VLAN-ID is different from the Default VLAN ID) and enter INTERFACE VLAN mode. CONFIGURATION mode interface vlan vlan-id To activate the VLAN, after you create a VLAN, assign interfaces in Layer 2 mode to the VLAN. Example of Verifying a Port-Based VLAN To view the configured VLANs, use the show vlan command in EXEC Privilege mode.
Codes: * - Default VLAN, G - GVRP VLANs NUM Status Q * 1 Inactive 2 Active T T 3 Active T T Ports Po1(So 0/0-1) Te 1/1/1 Po1(So 0/0-1) Te 1/2/1 Dell#config Dell(conf)#interface vlan 4 Dell(conf-if-vlan)#tagged po 1 Dell(conf-if-vlan)#show conf ! interface Vlan 4 no ip address tagged Port-channel 1 Dell(conf-if-vlan)#end Dell#show vlan Codes: * - Default VLAN, G - GVRP VLANs NUM Status Q * 1 Inactive 2 Active T T 3 Active T T 4 Active T Ports Po1(So 0/0-1) Te 1/1/1 Po1(So 0/0-1) Te 1/2/1 Po1(So 0/0-1) Wh
Codes: * - Default VLAN, G - GVRP VLANs NUM * 1 2 Status Active Active 3 Active Q U T T T T Ports Te 1/1/2/1 Po1(So 0/0-1) Te 1/1/3/1 Po1(So 0/0-1) Te 1/1/1/1 4 Inactive Dell#conf Dell(conf)#interface vlan 4 Dell(conf-if-vlan)#untagged tengigabitethernet 1/1/2/1 Dell(conf-if-vlan)#show config ! interface Vlan 4 no ip address untagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/2/1 Dell(conf-if-vlan)#end Dell#show vlan Codes: * - Default VLAN, G - GVRP VLANs NUM * 1 2 3 4 Status Q Inactive Active T T Active T T Active U
Native VLAN support breaks this barrier so that you can connect a port to both VLAN-aware and VLAN-unaware stations. Such ports are referred to as hybrid ports. Physical and port-channel interfaces may be hybrid ports. Native VLAN is useful in deployments where a Layer 2 port can receive both tagged and untagged traffic on the same physical port. The classic example is connecting a voice-over-IP (VOIP) phone and a PC to the same port of the switch.
56 VLT Proxy Gateway The virtual link trucking (VLT) proxy gateway feature allows a VLT domain to locally terminate and route L3 packets that are destined to a Layer 3 (L3) end point in another VLT domain. Enable the VLT proxy gateway using the link layer discover protocol (LLDP) method or the static configuration. For more information, see the Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
Figure 129. Sample Configuration for a VLT Proxy Gateway Guidelines for Enabling the VLT Proxy Gateway Keep the following points in mind when you enable a VLT proxy gateway: • Proxy gateway is supported only for VLT; for example, across a VLT domain. • You must enable the VLT peer-routing command for the VLT proxy gateway to function.
• You cannot change the VLT LAG to a legacy LAG when it is part of proxy-gateway. • You cannot change the link layer discovery protocol (LLDP) port channel interface to a legacy LAG when you enable a proxy gateway. • Dell Networking recommends the vlt-peer-mac transmit command only for square VLTs without diagonal links. • The virtual router redundancy (VRRP) protocol and IPv6 routing is not supported. • Private VLANs (PVLANs) are not supported.
• You must configure the interface proxy gateway LLDP to enable or disable a proxy-gateway LLDP TLV on specific interfaces. • The interface is typically a VLT port-channel that connects to a remote VLT domain. • The new proxy gateway TLV is carried on the physical links under the port channel only. • You must have at least one link connection to each unit of the VLT domain. Following are the prerequisites for Proxy Gateway LLDP configuration: • You must globally enable LLDP.
LLDP VLT Proxy Gateway in a Square VLT Topology Figure 130. Sample Configuration for a VLT Proxy Gateway • The preceding figure shows a sample square VLT Proxy gateway topology. There are no diagonal links in the square VLT connection between the C and D in VLT domain 1 and C1 and D1 in the VLT domain 2. This causes sub-optimal routing.
• Any L3 packet, when it gets an L3 hit and is routed, it has a time to live (TTL) decrement as expected. • You can disable the VLT Proxy Gateway for a particular VLAN using an "Exclude-VLAN" configuration. The configuration has to be done in both the VLT domains [C and D in VLT domain 1 and C1 and D1 in VLT domain 2].
57 Virtual Link Trunking (VLT) Virtual link trunking (VLT) allows physical links between two Dell switches to appear as a single virtual link to the network core or other switches such as Edge, Access, or top-of-rack (ToR). As a result, the two physical switches appear as a single switch to the connected devices. Overview In a traditional switched topology as shown below, spanning tree protocols (STPs) are used to block one or more links to prevent loops in the network.
Figure 132. VLT providing multipath VLT reduces the role of spanning tree protocols (STPs) by allowing link aggregation group (LAG) terminations on two separate distribution or core switches and supporting a loop-free topology. To prevent the initial loop that may occur prior to VLT being established, use a spanning tree protocol. After VLT is established, you may use rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP) to prevent loops from forming with new links that are incorrectly connected and outside the VLT domain.
Figure 133. Example of VLT Deployment VLT offers the following benefits: • Allows a single device to use a LAG across two upstream devices. • Eliminates STP-blocked ports. • Provides a loop-free topology. • Uses all available uplink bandwidth. • Provides fast convergence if either the link or a device fails. • Optimized forwarding with virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP). • Provides link-level resiliency. • Assures high availability. • Active-Active load sharing with VRRP.
VLT on Core Switches Uplinks from servers to the access layer and from access layer to the aggregation layer are bundled in LAG groups with end-to-end Layer 2 multipathing. This set up requires “horizontal” stacking at the access layer and VLT at the aggregation layer such that all the uplinks from servers to access and access to aggregation are in Active-Active Load Sharing mode. This example provides the highest form of resiliency, scaling, and load balancing in data center switching networks.
Figure 135. Enhanced VLT VLT Terminology The following are key VLT terms. • Virtual link trunk (VLT) — The combined port channel between an attached device and the VLT peer switches. • VLT backup link — The backup link monitors the connectivity between the VLT peer switches. The backup link sends configurable, periodic keep alive messages between the VLT peer switches. • VLT interconnect (VLTi) — The link used to synchronize states between the VLT peer switches.
• With peer routing, you need not use VRRP. • You can use routing protocols in a VLT domain or between VLT domains (eVLT). • VLT Proxy Gateway enables one VLT domain to act as the default gateway for its peer VLT domain in an eVLT topology. Configure Virtual Link Trunking VLT requires that you enable the feature and then configure the same VLT domain, backup link, and VLT interconnect on both peer switches. Important Points to Remember • You cannot enable stacking simultaneously with VLT.
Peer1, while the remaining half reach Peer2 (because of LAG hashing). The reason for this behavior is that Peer1 ignores the ARP requests that it receives on VLTi (ICL) and updates only the ARP requests that it receives on the local VLT. As a result, the remaining ARP requests still points to the Non-VLT links and traffic does not reach half of the hosts.
• ARP entries configured across the VLTi are the same on both VLT peer nodes. • If you shut down the port channel used in the VLT interconnect on a peer switch in a VLT domain in which you did not configure a backup link, the switch’s role displays in the show vlt brief command output as Primary instead of Standalone. • When you change the default VLAN ID on a VLT peer switch, the VLT interconnect may flap.
• Software features supported on VLT port-channels • In a VLT domain, the following software features are supported on VLT port-channels: 802.1p, ingress and egress ACLs, BGP, DHCP relay, IS-IS, OSPF, active-active PIM-SM, PIM-SSM, VRRP, Layer 3 VLANs, LLDP, flow control, port monitoring, jumbo frames, IGMP snooping, sFlow, ingress and egress ACLs, and Layer 2 control protocols RSTP and PVST only. NOTE: Peer VLAN spanning tree plus (PVST+) passthrough is supported in a VLT domain.
• • If the primary chassis fails, the secondary chassis takes on the operational role of the primary. The SNMP MIB reports VLT statistics. Primary and Secondary VLT Peers To prevent issues when connectivity between peers is lost, you can designate Primary and Secondary roles for VLT peers . You can elect or configure the Primary Peer. By default, the peer with the lowest MAC address is selected as the Primary Peer.
VLT and IGMP Snooping When configuring IGMP Snooping with VLT, ensure the configurations on both sides of the VLT trunk are identical to get the same behavior on both sides of the trunk. When you configure IGMP snooping on a VLT node, the dynamically learned groups and multicast router ports are automatically learned on the VLT peer node. VLT IPv6 The following features have been enhanced to support IPv6: • VLT Sync — Entries learned on the VLT interface are synced on both VLT peers.
Figure 136. PIM-Sparse Mode Support on VLT On each VLAN where the VLT peer nodes act as the first hop or last hop routers, one of the VLT peer nodes is elected as the PIM designated router. If you configured IGMP snooping along with PIM on the VLT VLANs, you must configure VLTi as the static multicast router port on both VLT peer switches. This ensures that for first hop routers, the packets from the source are redirected to the designated router (DR) if they are incorrectly hashed.
Each VLT peer runs its own PIM protocol independently of other VLT peers. To ensure the PIM protocol states or multicast routing information base (MRIB) on the VLT peers are synced, if the incoming interface (IIF) and outgoing interface (OIF) are Spanned, the multicast route table is synced between the VLT peers. To verify the PIM neighbors on the VLT VLAN and on the multicast port, use the show ip pim neighbor, show ip igmp snooping mrouter, and show running config commands.
NOTE: The peer routing and peer-routing-timeout is applicable for both IPv6/ IPv4. Configuring VLT Unicast To enable and configure VLT unicast, follow these steps. 1 Enable VLT on a switch, then configure a VLT domain and enter VLT-domain configuration mode. CONFIGURATION mode vlt domain domain-id 2 Enable peer-routing. VLT DOMAIN mode peer-routing 3 Configure the peer-routing timeout. VLT DOMAIN mode peer-routing—timeout value value: Specify a value (in seconds) from 1 to 65535.
Configuring VLT Multicast To enable and configure VLT multicast, follow these steps. 1 Enable VLT on a switch, then configure a VLT domain and enter VLT-domain configuration mode. CONFIGURATION mode vlt domain domain-id 2 Enable peer-routing. VLT DOMAIN mode peer-routing 3 Configure the multicast peer-routing timeout. VLT DOMAIN mode multicast peer-routing—timeout value value: Specify a value (in seconds) from 1 to 1200. 4 Configure a PIM-SM compatible VLT node as a designated router (DR).
Preventing Forwarding Loops in a VLT Domain During the bootup of VLT peer switches, a forwarding loop may occur until the VLT configurations are applied on each switch and the primary/secondary roles are determined. To prevent the interfaces in the VLT interconnect trunk and RSTP-enabled VLT ports from entering a Forwarding state and creating a traffic loop in a VLT domain, take the following steps.
Before you begin, make sure that both VLT peer switches are running the same Dell Networking OS version and are configured for RSTP as described in the RSTP Configuration section. For VRRP operation, ensure that you configure VRRP groups and L3 routing on each VLT peer as described in VLT and VRRP interoperability in the Configuration Notes section.
Enabling VLT and Creating a VLT Domain To enable VLT and create a VLT domain, use the following steps. 1 Enable VLT on a switch, then configure a VLT domain and enter VLT-domain configuration mode. CONFIGURATION mode vlt domain domain-id The domain ID range is from 1 to 1000. Configure the same domain ID on the peer switch to allow for common peering. VLT uses the domain ID to automatically create a VLT MAC address for the domain.
LACP on VLT ports (on a VLT switch or access device), which are members of the virtual link trunk, is not brought up until the VLT domain is recognized on the access device. 7 Repeat Steps 1 to 5 on the VLT peer switch to configure the IP address of this switch as the endpoint of the VLT backup link and to configure the same port channel for the VLT interconnect. Configuring a VLT Backup Link To configure a VLT backup link, use the following command.
Reconfiguring the Default VLT Settings (Optional) To reconfigure the default VLT settings, use the following commands. 1 Enter VLT-domain configuration mode for a specified VLT domain. CONFIGURATION mode vlt domain domain-id The range of domain IDs is from 1 to 1000. 2 After you configure a VLT domain on each peer switch and connect (cable) the two VLT peers on each side of the VLT interconnect, the system elects a primary and secondary VLT peer device.
interface port-channel id-number 2 Remove an IP address from the interface. INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL mode no ip address 3 Place the interface in Layer 2 mode. INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL mode switchport 4 Add one or more port interfaces to the port channel. INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL mode channel-member interface interface: specify one of the following interface types: 5 • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the stack/slot/port/subport information.
peer-down-vlan vlan interface number Configuring Enhanced VLT (Optional) To configure enhanced VLT (eVLT) between two VLT domains on your network, use the following procedure. For a sample configuration, refer to eVLT Configuration Example. To set up the VLT domain, use the following commands. 1 Configure the port channel to be used for the VLT interconnect on a VLT switch and enter interface configuration mode.
7 When you create a VLT domain on a switch, Dell Networking OS automatically assigns a unique unit ID (0 or 1) to each peer switch. To explicitly configure the default values on each peer switch, use the following command. VLT DOMAIN CONFIGURATION mode unit-id {0 | 1} The unit IDs are used for internal system operations. Configure a different unit ID (0 or 1) on each peer switch.
18 Repeat steps 1 through 16 for the first VLT node in Domain 2. 19 Repeat steps 1 through 16 for the VLT peer node in Domain 2. To verify the configuration of a VLT domain, use any of the show commands described in . VLT Sample Configuration To review a sample VLT configuration setup, study these steps. 1 Configure the VLT domain with the same ID in VLT peer 1 and VLT peer 2. VLT DOMAIN mode vlt domain domain id 2 Configure the VLTi between VLT peer 1 and VLT peer 2.
EXEC mode or EXEC Privilege mode show interfaces interface Example of Configuring VLT In the following sample VLT configuration steps, VLT peer 1 is Dell-2, VLT peer 2 is Dell-4, and the ToR is S60-1. NOTE: If you use a third-party ToR unit, Dell Networking recommends using static LAGs with VLT peers to avoid potential problems if you reboot the VLT peers. Configure the VLT domain with the same ID in VLT peer 1 and VLT peer 2.
In the ToR unit, configure LACP on the physical ports.
LAG L 2 Mode L2L3 Status up Uptime 03:33:31 Ports Te 1/1/5/1 (Up) PVST+ Configuration PVST+ is supported in a VLT domain. Before you configure VLT on peer switches, configure PVST+ in the network. PVST+ is required for initial loop prevention during the VLT startup phase. You may also use PVST+ for loop prevention in the network outside of the VLT port channel. Run PVST+ on both VLT peer switches. A PVST+ instance is created for every VLAN configured in the system.
eVLT Configuration Example The following example demonstrates the steps to configure enhanced VLT (eVLT) in a network. In this example, you are configuring two domains. Domain 1 consists of Peer 1 and Peer 2; Domain 2 consists of Peer 3 and Peer 4, as shown in the following example. In Domain 1, configure Peer 1 fist, then configure Peer 2. When that is complete, perform the same steps for the peer nodes in Domain 2. The interface used in this example is TenGigabitEthernet. Figure 137.
Next, configure the VLT domain and VLTi on Peer 2. Domain_1_Peer2#configure Domain_1_Peer2(conf)#interface port-channel 1 Domain_1_Peer2(conf-if-po-1)# channel-member TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/8/1-1/1/8/2 Domain_1_Peer2(conf) #vlt domain Domain_1_Peer2(conf-vlt-domain)# Domain_1_Peer2(conf-vlt-domain)# Domain_1_Peer2(conf-vlt-domain)# Domain_1_Peer2(conf-vlt-domain)# Domain_1_Peer2(conf-vlt-domain)# 1000 peer-link port-channel 1 back-up destination 10.16.130.
Configure eVLT on Peer 4. Domain_2_Peer4(conf)#interface port-channel 100 Domain_2_Peer4(conf-if-po-100)# switchport Domain_2_Peer4(conf-if-po-100)# vlt-peer-lag port-channel 100 Domain_2_Peer4(conf-if-po-100)# no shutdown Add links to the eVLT port-channel on Peer 4.
• show vlt backup-link Display general status information about VLT domains currently configured on the switch. EXEC mode • show vlt brief Display detailed information about the VLT-domain configuration, including local and peer port-channel IDs, local VLT switch status, and number of active VLANs on each port channel.
VLT Backup Link ----------------Destination: Peer HeartBeat status: HeartBeat Timer Interval: HeartBeat Timeout: UDP Port: HeartBeat Messages Sent: HeartBeat Messages Received: 10.11.200.20 Up 1 3 34998 1030 1014 The following example shows the show vlt brief command.
Local System MAC address: 00:01:e8:8a:df:e6 Local System Role Priority: 32768 The following example shows the show running-config vlt command. Dell_VLTpeer1# show running-config vlt ! vlt domain 30 peer-link port-channel 60 back-up destination 10.11.200.18 Dell_VLTpeer2# show running-config vlt ! vlt domain 30 peer-link port-channel 60 back-up destination 10.11.200.20 The following example shows the show vlt statistics command.
Configured hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15 Interface Designated Name PortID Prio Cost Sts Cost Bridge ID PortID ---------- -------- ---- ------- -------- - ------- ------------Po 1 128.2 128 200000 DIS 0 0 0001.e88a.dff8 128.2 Po 3 128.4 128 200000 DIS 0 0 0001.e88a.dff8 128.4 Po 4 128.5 128 200000 DIS 0 0 0001.e88a.dff8 128.5 Po 100 128.101 128 800 FWD(VLTi)0 0 0001.e88a.dff8 128.101 Po 110 128.111 128 00 FWD(vlt) 0 0 0001.e88a.dff8 128.111 Po 111 128.112 128 200000 DIS(vlt) 0 0 0001.e88a.
Enable VLT and create a VLT domain with a backup-link VLT interconnect (VLTi). Dell_VLTpeer2(conf)#vlt domain 999 Dell_VLTpeer2(conf-vlt-domain)#peer-link port-channel 100 Dell_VLTpeer2(conf-vlt-domain)#back-up destination 10.11.206.23 Dell_VLTpeer2(conf-vlt-domain)#exit Configure the backup link. Dell_VLTpeer2(conf)#interface ManagementEthernet 1/1 Dell_VLTpeer2(conf-if-ma-1/1)#ip address 10.11.206.
Table 87. Troubleshooting VLT Description Behavior at Peer Up Behavior During Run Time Action to Take Bandwidth monitoring A syslog error message and an SNMP trap is generated when the VLTi bandwidth usage goes above the 80% threshold and when it drops below 80%. A syslog error message and an SNMP trap is generated when the VLTi bandwidth usage goes above its threshold. Depending on the traffic that is received, the traffic can be offloaded inVLTi. Domain ID mismatch The VLT peer does not boot up.
Description Behavior at Peer Up Behavior During Run Time Action to Take VLT LAG ID mismatch The VLT port channel is brought down. The VLT port channel is brought down. Perform a mismatch check after the VLT peer is established. A syslog error message is generated. A syslog error message is generated. Reconfiguring Stacked Switches as VLT To convert switches that have been stacked to VLT peers, use the following procedure. 1 Remove the current configuration from the switches.
• ARP entries are synchronized even when a mismatch occurs in the PVLAN mode of a VLT LAG. Any VLAN that contains at least one VLT port as a member is treated as a VLT VLAN. You can configure a VLT VLAN to be a primary, secondary, or a normal VLAN. However, the VLT VLAN configuration must be symmetrical across peers. If the VLT LAG is tagged to any one of the primary or secondary VLANs of a PVLAN, then both the primary and secondary VLANs are considered as VLT VLANs.
PVLAN Operations When a VLT Peer is Restarted When the VLT peer node is rebooted, the VLAN membership of the VLTi link is preserved and when the peer node comes back online, a verification is performed with the newly received PVLAN configuration from the peer. If any differences are identified, the VLTi link is either added or removed from the VLAN. When the peer node restarts and returns online, all the PVLAN configurations are exchanged across the peers.
VLT LAG Mode PVLAN Mode of VLT VLAN ICL VLAN Membership Mac Synchronization Peer1 Peer2 Peer1 Peer2 Trunk Access Primary Secondary No No Promiscuous Promiscuous Primary Primary Yes Yes Promiscuous Access Primary Secondary No No Promiscuous Promiscuous Primary Primary Yes Yes - Secondary (Community) - Secondary (Isolated) No No Secondary (Community) Secondary (Isolated) No No • • Yes Yes Access Promiscuous Access Promiscuous Primary X Primary X Primary Primar
isolation between ports within the same VLAN. A PVLAN partitions a traditional VLAN into subdomains identified by a primary and secondary VLAN pair. With VLT being a Layer 2 redundancy feature, support for configuration of VLT nodes in a PVLAN enables Layer 2 security functionalities to be achieved. This section describe how to configure a VLT VLAN or a VLT LAG (VLTi link) and assign that VLT interface to a PVLAN.
Associating the VLT LAG or VLT VLAN in a PVLAN 1 Access INTERFACE mode for the port that you want to assign to a PVLAN. CONFIGURATION mode interface interface 2 Enable the port. INTERFACE mode no shutdown 3 Set the port in Layer 2 mode. INTERFACE mode switchport 4 Select the PVLAN mode.
By default, proxy ARP is enabled. To disable proxy ARP, use the no proxy-arp command in Interface mode. To re-enable proxy ARP, use the ip proxy-arp command in Interface mode. To view if proxy ARP is enabled on the interface, use the show config command in INTERFACE mode. If it is not listed in the show config command output, it is enabled. Only nondefault information displays in the show config command output.
ICL down event is triggered on the other VLT node, which in turn starts the proxy ARP application. The VLT node, where the ICL link is deleted, flushes the peer IP addresses and does not perform proxy ARP for the additional LAG hashed ARP requests. VLT Nodes as Rendezvous Points for Multicast Resiliency You can configure VLT peer nodes as rendezvous points (RPs) in a Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM) domain. PIM uses a VLT node as the RP to distribute multicast traffic to a multicast group.
INTERFACE VLAN mode member port-channel port—channel ID 4 Verify the VLAN-stack configurations. EXEC Privilege show running-config Sample configuration of VLAN-stack over VLT (Peer 1) Configure the VLT domain Dell(conf)#vlt domain 1 Dell(conf-vlt-domain)#peer-link port-channel 1 Dell(conf-vlt-domain)#back-up destination 10.16.151.
Configure the VLAN as a VLAN-Stack VLAN and add the VLT LAG as Members to the VLAN Dell(conf)#interface vlan 50 Dell(conf-if-vl-50)#vlan-stack compatible Dell(conf-if-vl-50-stack)#member port-channel 10 Dell(conf-if-vl-50-stack)#member port-channel 20 Dell#show running-config interface vlan 50 ! interface Vlan 50 vlan-stack compatible member Port-channel 10,20 shutdown Dell# Verify that the Port Channels used in the VLT Domain are Assigned to the VLAN-Stack VLAN Dell#show vlan id 50 Codes: * - Default VLAN,
no shutdown Dell# Dell(conf)#interface port-channel 20 Dell(conf-if-po-20)#switchport Dell(conf-if-po-20)#vlt-peer-lag port-channel 20 Dell(conf-if-po-20)#vlan-stack trunk Dell(conf-if-po-20)#no shutdown Dell#show running-config interface port-channel 20 ! interface Port-channel 20 no ip address switchport vlan-stack trunk vlt-peer-lag port-channel 20 no shutdown Dell# Configure the VLAN as a VLAN-Stack VLAN and add the VLT LAG as members to the VLAN Dell(conf)#interface vlan 50 Dell(conf-if-vl-50)#vlan-sta
58 Virtual Extensible LAN (VXLAN) Virtual Extensible LAN (VXLAN) is supported on Dell Networking OS. Overview The switch acts as the VXLAN gateway and performs the VXLAN Tunnel End Point (VTEP) functionality. VXLAN is a technology where in the data traffic from the virtualized servers is transparently transported over an existing legacy network. Figure 138.
Components of VXLAN network VXLAN provides a mechanism to extend an L2 network over an L3 network. In short, VXLAN is an L2 overlay scheme over an L3 network and this overlay is termed as a VXLAN segment.
VXLAN Hypervisor It is the VTEP that connects the Virtual Machines (VM) to the underlay legacy network to the physical infrastructure. Service Node(SN) It is also another VTEP, but it is fully managed by NSX. The purpose of SN is to be the central replication engine for flooded packets Legacy TOR It is a TOR switch, which performs routing or switching decisions.
Components of VXLAN Frame Format Some of the important fields of the VXLAN frame format are described below: Outer Ethernet Header: Outer IP Header: The Outer Ethernet Header consists of the following components: • Destination Address: Generally, it is a first hop router's MAC address when the VTEP is on a different address. • Source Address : It is the source MAC address of the router that routes the packet.
To view the certificate, use the following command: • show file flash://vtep-cert.
You can create a logical network by creating a logical switch. The logical network acts as the forwarding domain for workloads on the physical as well as virtual infrastructure. Figure 142. Create Logical Switch 5 Create Logical Switch Port A logical switch port provides a logical connection point for a VM interface (VIF) and a L2 gateway connection to an external network. It binds the virtual access ports in the GW to logical network (VXLAN) and VLAN. Figure 143.
vxlan-instance instance ID The platform supports only the instance ID 1 in the initial release. 3 controller VxLAN INSTANCE mode controller controller IDip address port port-number tcp|ptcp|pssl|ssl The port number range is from 1 to 6632. The default port number is 6632. The default connection type is ssl. 4 gateway-ip VxLAN INSTANCE mode gateway-ip IP address 5 max-back off (Optional) VxLAN INSTANCE mode max_backoff time The range is from 1000-180000. The default value is 30000 milliseconds.
Dell#$n-instance 1 logical-network n 2a8d5d19-8845-4365-ad04-243f0b6df252 Name : 2a8d5d19-8845-4365-ad04-243f0b6df252 Description : Tunnel Key : 2 VFI : 28674 Unknown Multicast MAC Tunnels: 192.168.122.133 : vxlan_over_ipv4 (up) Port Vlan Bindings: Te 1/1/1/1: VLAN: 0 (0x80000001), Fo 1/4/1 : VLAN: 0 (0x80000004), The following example shows the show vxlan vxlan-instance statistics interface command.
The following example shows the show vxlan vxlan-instance logical-network command. Dell#show vxlan vxlan-instance 1 logical-network Instance : 1 Total LN count : 1 Name bffc3be0-13e6-4745-9f6b-0bcbc5877f01 4656 VNID Dell#$n-instance 1 logical-network n 2a8d5d19-8845-4365-ad04-243f0b6df252 Name : 2a8d5d19-8845-4365-ad04-243f0b6df252 Description : Tunnel Key : 2 VFI : 28674 Unknown Multicast MAC Tunnels: 192.168.122.
Examples of the show bfd neighbors command. To verify that the session is established, use the show bfd neighbors command. Dell_GW1#show bfd neighbors * Ad Dn B C I O O3 R M V VT * * * * * * - Active session role Admin Down BGP CLI ISIS OSPF OSPFv3 Static Route (RTM) MPLS VRRP Vxlan Tunnel LocalAddr 1.0.1.1 3.3.3.3 3.3.3.3 3.3.3.3 3.3.3.3 3.3.3.3 928 RemoteAddr 1.0.1.2 192.168.122.135 192.168.122.136 192.168.122.137 192.168.122.138 192.168.122.
59 Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) allows a physical router to partition itself into multiple Virtual Routers (VRs). The control and data plane are isolated in each VR so that traffic does NOT flow across VRs.Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) allows multiple instances of a routing table to co-exist within the same router at the same time. VRF Overview VRF improves functionality by allowing network paths to be segmented without using multiple devices.
Figure 144. VRF Network Example VRF Configuration Notes Although there is no restriction on the number of VLANs that can be assigned to a VRF instance, the total number of routes supported in VRF is limited by the size of the IPv4 CAM. VRF is implemented in a network device by using Forwarding Information Bases (FIBs). A network device may have the ability to configure different virtual routers, where entries in the FIB that belong to one VRF cannot be accessed by another VRF on the same device.
If the next-hop IP in a static route VRF statement is VRRP IP of another VRF, this static route does not get installed on the VRRP master. VRF supports some routing protocols only on the default VRF (default-vrf) instance. Table 1 displays the software features supported in VRF and whether they are supported on all VRF instances or only the default VRF. NOTE: To configure a router ID in a non-default VRF, configure at least one IP address in both the default as well as the nondefault VRF. Table 89.
Feature/Capability Support Status for Default VRF Support Status for Non-default VRF OSPFv3 Yes Yes IS-IS Yes Yes BGP Yes Yes ACL Yes No Multicast No No NDP Yes Yes RAD Yes Yes DHCP DHCP requests are not forwarded across VRF instances. The DHCP client and server must be on the same VRF instance.
Assigning an Interface to a VRF You must enter the ip vrf forwarding command before you configure the IP address or any other setting on an interface. NOTE: You can configure an IP address or subnet on a physical or VLAN interface that overlaps the same IP address or subnet configured on another interface only if the interfaces are assigned to different VRFs. If two interfaces are assigned to the same VRF, you cannot configure overlapping IP subnets or the same IP address on them.
show ip vrf [vrf-name] Assigning an OSPF Process to a VRF Instance OSPF routes are supported on all VRF instances. See the Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2) chapter for complete OSPF configuration information. Assign an OSPF process to a VRF instance . Return to CONFIGURATION mode to enable the OSPF process. The OSPF Process ID is the identifying number assigned to the OSPF process, and the Router ID is the IP address associated with the OSPF process.
Task Command Syntax Command Mode 10.1.1.1 (local) Hold Down: 0 sec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 1 sec Adv rcvd: 0, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 43, Gratuitous ARP sent: 0 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:01:0a Virtual IP address: 10.1.1.100 Authentication: (none) Configuring Management VRF You can assign a management interface to a management VRF. 1 Create a management VRF. CONFIGURATION ip vrf management 2 Assign a management port to a management VRF.
management route ip-address mask managementethernet ormanagement route ipv6-address prefixlength managementethernet You can also have the management route to point to a front-end port in case of the management VRF. For example: management route 2::/64 tengigabitethernet 1/1/1/1. • Configure a static entry in the IPv6 neighbor discovery.
Figure 146. Setup VRF Interfaces The following example relates to the configuration shown in the above illustrations. Router 1 ip vrf blue 1 ! ip vrf orange 2 ! ip vrf green 3 ! interface TenGigabitEthernet no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet ip vrf forwarding blue ip address 10.0.0.1/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet ip vrf forwarding orange ip address 20.0.0.
ip vrf forwarding green ip address 30.0.0.1/24 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 128 ip vrf forwarding blue ip address 1.0.0.1/24 tagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/3 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 192 ip vrf forwarding orange ip address 2.0.0.1/24 tagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/3 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 256 ip vrf forwarding green ip address 3.0.0.1/24 tagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/3 no shutdown ! router ospf 1 vrf blue router-id 1.0.0.1 network 1.0.0.0/24 area 0 network 10.0.0.
ip address 2.0.0.2/24 tagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/3 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 256 ip vrf forwarding green ip address 3.0.0.2/24 tagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/3 no shutdown ! router ospf 1 vrf blue router-id 1.0.0.2 network 11.0.0.0/24 area 0 network 1.0.0.0/24 area 0 passive-interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/2/1 ! router ospf 2 vrf orange router-id 2.0.0.2 network 21.0.0.0/24 area 0 network 2.0.0.0/24 area 0 passive-interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/2/2 ! ip route vrf green30.0.0.0/24 3.0.0.
Dell#show ip route vrf orange Codes: C - connected, S - static, R - RIP, B - BGP, IN - internal BGP, EX - external BGP,LO - Locally Originated, O - OSPF, IA - OSPF inter area, N1 - OSPF NSSA external type 1, N2 - OSPF NSSA external type 2, E1 - OSPF external type 1, E2 - OSPF external type 2, i - IS-IS, L1 - IS-IS level-1, L2 - IS-IS level-2, IA - IS-IS inter area, * - candidate default, > - non-active route, + - summary route Gateway of last resort is not set C C O Destination ----------2.0.0.0/24 20.0.
Dynamic Route Leaking Route Leaking is a powerful feature that enables communication between isolated (virtual) routing domains by segregating and sharing a set of services such as VOIP, Video, and so on that are available on one routing domain with other virtual domains. Inter-VRF Route Leaking enables a VRF to leak or export routes that are present in its RTM to one or more VRFs.
ip route-export 1:1 3 Configure VRF-red. ip vrf vrf-red interface-type slot/port[/subport] ip vrf forwarding VRF-red ip address ip—address mask A non-default VRF named VRF-red is created and the interface is assigned to this VRF. 4 Configure the import target in VRF-red. ip route-import 1:1 5 Configure the export target in VRF-red. ip route-export 2:2 6 Configure VRF-blue.
! ip vrf ip ip ip VRF-shared route-export route-import route-import 1:1 2:2 3:3 Show routing tables of all the VRFs (without any route-export and route-import tags being configured) Dell# show ip route vrf VRF-Red O 11.1.1.1/32 via 111.1.1.1 110/0 C 111.1.1.0/24 Direct, Te 1/1/1/1 0/0 00:00:10 22:39:59 Dell# show ip route vrf VRF-Blue O 22.2.2.2/32 via 122.2.2.2 110/0 00:00:11 C 122.2.2.0/24 Direct, Te 1/1/2/1 0/0 Dell# show ip route vrf VRF-Green O 33.3.3.3/32 via 133.3.3.3 00:00:11 C 133.3.3.
C 144.4.4.0/24 Direct, Te 1/1/4/1 0/0 00:32:36 Important Points to Remember • If the target VRF conatins the same prefix as either the sourced or Leaked route from some other VRF, then route Leaking for that particular prefix fails and the following error-log is thrown. SYSLOG (“Duplicate prefix found %s in the target VRF %d”, address, import_vrf_id) with The type/level is EVT_LOGWARNING. • The source routes always take precedence over leaked routes.
A non-default VRF named VRF-red is created and the interface is assigned to this VRF. 2 Define a route-map export_ospfbgp_protocol. Dell(config)route-map export_ospfbgp_protocol permit 10 3 Define the matching criteria for the exported routes. Dell(config-route-map)match source-protocol ospf Dell(config-route-map)match source-protocol bgp This action specifies that the route-map contains OSPF and BGP as the matching criteria for exporting routes from vrf-red.
O 44.4.4.4/32 via vrf-red:144.4.4.4 0/0 00:32:36 << only OSPF and BGP leaked from VRF-red Important Points to Remember • Only Active routes are eligible for leaking. For example, if VRF-A has two routes from BGP and OSPF, in which the BGP route is not active. In this scenario, the OSPF route takes precedence over BGP. Even though the Target VRF-B has specified filtering options to match BGP, the BGP route is not leaked as that route is not active in the Source VRF.
60 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) Virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP) is designed to eliminate a single point of failure in a statically routed network. VRRP Overview VRRP is designed to eliminate a single point of failure in a statically routed network. VRRP specifies a MASTER router that owns the next hop IP and MAC address for end stations on a local area network (LAN).
Figure 147. Basic VRRP Configuration VRRP Benefits With VRRP configured on a network, end-station connectivity to the network is not subject to a single point-of-failure. End-station connections to the network are redundant and are not dependent on internal gateway protocol (IGP) protocols to converge or update routing tables. VRRP Implementation Within a single VRRP group, up to 12 virtual IP addresses are supported.
NOTE: In a VLT environment, VRRP configuration acts as active-active and if route is not present in any of the VRRP nodes, the packet to the destination is dropped on that VRRP node. Table 91.
• NOTE: The interface must already have a primary IP address defined and be enabled, as shown in the second example. Delete a VRRP group. INTERFACE mode no vrrp-group vrid Examples of Configuring and Verifying VRRP The following examples how to configure VRRP. Dell(conf)#interface tengigabitethernet 1/1/1/1 Dell(conf-if-te-1/1/1/1)#vrrp-group 111 Dell(conf-if-te-1/1/1/1-vrid-111)# The following examples how to verify the VRRP configuration.
NOTE: Carefully following this procedure, otherwise you might introduce dual master switches issues. To migrate an IPv4 VRRP Group from VRRPv2 to VRRPv3: 1 Set the backup switches to VRRP version to both. Dell_backup_switch1(conf-if-te-1/1/1/1-vrid-100)#version both Dell_backup_switch2(conf-if-te-1/1/2/1-vrid-100)#version both 2 Set the master switch to VRRP protocol version 3. Dell_master_switch(conf-if-te-1/1/1/1-vrid-100)#version 3 3 Set the backup switches to version 3.
Examples of the Configuring and Verifying a Virtual IP Address The following example shows how to configure a virtual IP address. Dell(conf-if-te-1/1/1/1-vrid-111)#virtual-address 10.10.10.1 Dell(conf-if-te-1/1/1/1-vrid-111)#virtual-address 10.10.10.2 Dell(conf-if-te-1/1/1/1-vrid-111)#virtual-address 10.10.10.3 The following example shows how to verify a virtual IP address configuration. NOTE: In the following example, the primary IP address and the virtual IP addresses are on the same subnet.
• Configure the priority for the VRRP group. INTERFACE -VRID mode priority priority The range is from 1 to 255. The default is 100. Examples of the priority Command Dell(conf-if-te-1/1/2/1)#vrrp-group 111 Dell(conf-if-te-1/1/2/1-vrid-111)#priority 125 To verify the VRRP group priority, use the show vrrp command. Dellshow vrrp -----------------TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/1, VRID: 111, Net: 10.10.10.1 VRF: 0 default State: Master, Priority: 255, Master: 10.10.10.
Examples of the authentication-type Command The bold section shows the encryption type (encrypted) and the password. Dell(conf-if-te-1/1/1/1-vrid-111)#authentication-type ? Dell(conf-if-te-1/1/1/1-vrid-111)#authentication-type simple 7 force10 The following example shows verifying the VRRP authentication configuration using the show conf command. The bold section shows the encrypted password.
Changing the Advertisement Interval By default, the MASTER router transmits a VRRP advertisement to all members of the VRRP group every one second, indicating it is operational and is the MASTER router. If the VRRP group misses three consecutive advertisements, the election process begins and the BACKUP virtual router with the highest priority transitions to MASTER.
Track an Interface or Object You can set Dell Networking OS to monitor the state of any interface according to the virtual group. Each VRRP group can track up to 12 interfaces and up to 20 additional objects, which may affect the priority of the VRRP group. If the tracked interface goes down, the VRRP group’s priority decreases by a default value of 10 (also known as cost). If the tracked interface’s state goes up, the VRRP group’s priority increases by 10.
• (Optional) Display the configuration and the UP or DOWN state of tracked interfaces and objects in VRRP groups, including the time since the last change in an object’s state. EXEC mode or EXEC Privilege mode • show vrrp (Optional) Display the configuration of tracked objects in VRRP groups on a specified interface.
Tracking states for 2 resource Ids: 2 - Up IPv6 route, 2040::/64, priority-cost 20, 00:02:11 3 - Up IPv6 route, 2050::/64, priority-cost 30, 00:02:11 The following example shows verifying the VRRP configuration on an interface.
The default is 0. Sample Configurations Before you set up VRRP, review the following sample configurations. VRRP for an IPv4 Configuration The following configuration shows how to enable IPv4 VRRP. This example does not contain comprehensive directions and is intended to provide guidance for only a typical VRRP configuration. You can copy and paste from the example to your CLI. To support your own IP addresses, interfaces, names, and so on, be sure that you make the necessary changes.
Examples of Configuring VRRP for IPv4 and IPv6 The following example shows configuring VRRP for IPv4 Router 2. R2(conf)#interface tengigabitethernet 1/1/3/1 R2(conf-if-te-1/1/3/1)#ip address 10.1.1.1/24 R2(conf-if-te-1/1/3/1)#vrrp-group 99 R2(conf-if-te-1/1/3/1-vrid-99)#priority 200 R2(conf-if-te-1/1/3/1-vrid-99)#virtual 10.1.1.3 R2(conf-if-te-1/1/3/1-vrid-99)#no shut R2(conf-if-te-1/1/3/1)#show conf ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/3/1 ip address 10.1.1.
Figure 149. VRRP for an IPv6 Configuration NOTE: In a VRRP or VRRPv3 group, if two routers come up with the same priority and another router already has MASTER status, the router with master status continues to be MASTER even if one of two routers has a higher IP or IPv6 address. The following example shows configuring VRRP for IPv6 Router 2 and Router 3. Configure a virtual link local (fe80) address for each VRRPv3 group created for an interface.
R2(conf-if-te-1/1/1/1-vrid-10)#virtual-address fe80::10 R2(conf-if-te-1/1/1/1-vrid-10)#virtual-address 1::10 R2(conf-if-te-1/1/1/1-vrid-10)#no shutdown R2(conf-if-te-1/1/1/1)#show config interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/1 ipv6 address 1::1/64 vrrp-group 10 priority 100 virtual-address fe80::10 virtual-address 1::10 no shutdown R2(conf-if-te-1/1/1/1)#end R2#show vrrp -----------------TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/1, IPv6 VRID: 10, Version: 3, Net:fe80::201:e8ff:fe6a:c59f VRF: 0 default State: Master, Priority:
VRRP in a VRF: Non-VLAN Scenario The following example shows how to enable VRRP in a non-VLAN. The following example shows a typical use case in which you create three virtualized overlay networks by configuring three VRFs in two switches. The default gateway to reach the Internet in each VRF is a static route with the next hop being the virtual IP address configured in VRRP. In this scenario, a single VLAN is associated with each VRF.
Figure 150. VRRP in a VRF: Non-VLAN Example Example of Configuring VRRP in a VRF on Switch-1 (Non-VLAN) Switch-1 S1(conf)#ip vrf default-vrf 0 ! S1(conf)#ip vrf VRF-1 1 ! S1(conf)#ip vrf VRF-2 2 ! S1(conf)#ip vrf VRF-3 3 ! S1(conf)#interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/1 S1(conf-if-te-1/1/1/1)#ip vrf forwarding VRF-1 S1(conf-if-te-1/1/1/1)#ip address 10.10.1.5/24 S1(conf-if-te-1/1/1/1)#vrrp-group 11 % Info: The VRID used by the VRRP group 11 in VRF 1 will be 177.
% Info: The VRID used by the VRRP group 15 in VRF 3 will be 243. S1(conf-if-te-1/1/3/1-vrid-105)#priority 255 S1(conf-if-te-1/1/3/1-vrid-105)#virtual-address 20.1.1.5 S1(conf-if-te-1/1/3/1)#no shutdown Dell#show vrrp tengigabitethernet 1/1/8/1 -----------------TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/8/1, IPv4 VRID: 1, Version: 2, Net: 10.1.1.1 VRF: 0 default State: Master, Priority: 100, Master: 10.1.1.
This VLAN scenario often occurs in a service-provider network in which you configure VLAN tags for traffic from multiple customers on customer-premises equipment (CPE), and separate VRF instances associated with each VLAN are configured on the provider edge (PE) router in the point-of-presence (POP).
Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:01:01 Virtual IP address: 10.1.1.100 Authentication: (none) VRRP in VRF: Switch-2 VLAN Configuration Switch-2 S2(conf)#ip vrf VRF-1 1 ! S2(conf)#ip vrf VRF-2 2 ! S2(conf)#ip vrf VRF-3 3 ! S2(conf)#interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/1 S2(conf-if-te-1/1/1/1)#no ip address S2(conf-if-te-1/1/1/1)#switchport S2(conf-if-te-1/1/1/1)#no shutdown ! S2(conf-if-te-1/1/1/1)#interface vlan 100 S2(conf-if-vl-100)#ip vrf forwarding VRF-1 S2(conf-if-vl-100)#ip address 10.10.1.
00:00:5e:00:01:0a Virtual IP address: 20.1.1.100 Authentication: (none) Dell#show vrrp vrf vrf2 port-channel 1 -----------------Port-channel 1, IPv4 VRID: 1, Version: 2, Net: 10.1.1.1 VRF: 2 vrf2 State: Master, Priority: 100, Master: 10.1.1.1 (local) Hold Down: 0 sec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 1 sec Adv rcvd: 0, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 419, Gratuitous ARP sent: 1 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:01:01 Virtual IP address: 10.1.1.
Figure 151. VRRP for IPv6 Topology NOTE: This example does not contain comprehensive directions and is intended to provide guidance for only a typical VRRP configuration. You can copy and paste from the example to your CLI. Be sure you make the necessary changes to support your own IP addresses, interfaces, names, and so on.
NOTE: The virtual IPv6 address you configure should be the same as the IPv6 subnet to which the interface belongs.
Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:02:ff Virtual IP address: 10:1:1::255 fe80::255 Dell#show vrrp tengigabitethernet 1/1/8/1 TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/8/1, IPv6 VRID: 255, Version: 3, Net: fe80::201:e8ff:fe8a:e9ed VRF: 0 default State: Master, Priority: 110, Master: fe80::201:e8ff:fe8a:e9ed (local) Hold Down: 0 centisec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 100 centisec Accept Mode: FALSE, Master AdvInt: 100 centisec Adv rcvd: 0, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 120 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:02:ff Virtual IP address: 10:1:1
61 Debugging and Diagnostics This chapter describes debugging and diagnostics for the device. Offline Diagnostics The offline diagnostics test suite is useful for isolating faults and debugging hardware. The diagnostics tests are grouped into three levels: • • • Level 0 — Level 0 diagnostics check for the presence of various components and perform essential path verifications. In addition, Level 0 diagnostics verify the identification registers of the components on the board.
3 Start diagnostics on the unit. diag stack-unit stack-unit-number When the tests are complete, the system displays the following message and automatically reboots the unit. Dell#00:09:42 : Diagnostic test results are stored on file: flash:/TestReport-SU-1.txt Diags completed... Rebooting the system now!!! Mar 12 10:40:35: %S6000:0 %DIAGAGT-6-DA_DIAG_DONE: Diags finished on stack unit 1 Diagnostic results are printed to a file in the flash using the filename format TestReport-SU-.txt.
Example of the show interfaces transceiver Command Dell#show interfaces tengigabitethernet 1/1/2/1 transceiver QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP 1/2/1 1/2/1 1/2/1 1/2/1 1/2/1 1/2/1 1/2/1 1/2/1 1/2/1 1/2/1 1/2/1 1/2/1 1/2/1 1/2/1 1/2/1 1/2/1 1/2/1 1/2/1 1/2/1 1/2/1 Serial ID Base Fields Id = Ext Id = Connector = Transceiver Code = Encoding = Length(SFM) Km = Length(OM3) 2m = Length(OM2) 1m = Length(OM1) 1m = Length(Copper) 1m = Vendor Rev =
----------------------- --------------------------------------------Minor Minor Off Major Major Off Shutdown Bcm56960 100 99 105 104 110 -- Temperature Limits (deg C) ------------------------ --------------------------------------------Minor Minor Off Major Major Off Shutdown SwitchOn 47 46 50 49 NA -- Temperature Limits (deg C) ------------------------ --------------------------------------------Minor Minor Off Major Major Off Shutdown FP-GE 47 46 50 49 NA -- Temperature Limits (deg C) --------------------
Recognize an Under-Voltage Condition If the system detects an under-voltage condition, it sends an alarm. To recognize this condition, look for the following system message: . This message indicates that the specified card is not receiving enough power. In response, the system first shuts down Power over Ethernet (PoE). If the under-voltage condition persists, line cards are shut down, then the RPMs.
similar to the following displays: % Info: For the global pre-defined buffer profile to take effect, please save the config and reload the system. Dell Networking OS Behavior: After you configure buffer-profile global 1Q, the message displays during every bootup. Only one reboot is required for the configuration to take effect; afterward you may ignore this bootup message.
buffer packet-pointers • Apply the buffer profile to a line card. CONFIGURATION mode buffer fp-uplink linecard • Apply the buffer profile to a CSF to FP link. CONFIGURATION mode buffer csf linecard Examples of Viewing Buffer Information Dell Networking OS Behavior: If you attempt to apply a buffer profile to a non-existent port-pipe, Dell Networking OS displays the following message: %DIFFSERV-2-DSA_BUFF_CARVING_INVALID_PORT_SET: Invalid FP port-set 2 for linecard 2. Valid range of port-set is <0-1>.
The following example shows viewing the default buffer profile on an interface. Dell#show buffer-profile detail interface tengigabitethernet 1/1/1/1 Interface Te 1/1/1/1 Buffer-profile fsqueue-fp Dynamic buffer 1256.00 (Kilobytes) Queue# Dedicated Buffer Buffer Packets Kilobytes) 0 3.00 256 1 3.00 256 2 3.00 256 3 3.00 256 4 3.00 256 5 3.00 256 6 3.00 256 7 3.00 256 The following example shows viewing the default buffer profile on a linecard.
buffer-profile global [1Q|4Q] If the default buffer profile dynamic is active, Dell Networking OS displays an error message instructing you to remove the default configuration using the no buffer-profile global command. Sample Buffer Profile Configuration The two general types of network environments are sustained data transfers and voice/data. Dell Networking recommends a single-queue approach for data transfers.
--- Ingress Drops --Ingress Drops : 32992398774 IBP CBP Full Drops : 0 PortSTPnotFwd Drops : 0 IPv4 L3 Discards : 0 Policy Discards : 0 Packets dropped by FP : 0 (L2+L3) Drops : 0 Port bitmap zero Drops : 32992398774 Rx VLAN Drops : 0 --- Ingress MAC counters--Ingress FCSDrops : 0 Ingress MTUExceeds : 0 --- MMU Drops --Ingress MMU Drops : 0 Ingress Drops Bytes : 0 HOL DROPS(TOTAL) : 0 HOL DROPS on COS0 : 0 HOL DROPS on COS1 : 0 HOL DROPS on COS2 : 0 HOL DROPS on COS3 : 0 HOL DROPS on COS4 : 0 HOL DROPS on C
Dataplane Statistics The show hardware stack-unit cpu data-plane statistics command provides insight into the packet types coming to the CPU. The show hardware stack-unit cpu party-bus statistics command displays input and output statistics on the party bus, which carries inter-process communication traffic between CPUs. The command output in the following example has been augmented, providing detailed RX/ TX packet statistics on a per-queue basis.
1649566 packets, 1935316203 bytes 0 errors Display Stack Port Statistics The show hardware stack-unit stack-port command displays input and output statistics for a stack-port interface.
RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX 984 - 64 Byte Frame Counter 65 to 127 Byte Frame Counter 128 to 255 Byte Frame Counter 256 to 511 Byte Frame Counter 512 to 1023 Byte Frame Counter 1024 to 1518 Byte Frame Counter 1519 to 1522 Byte Good VLAN Frame Counter 1519 to 2047 Byte Frame Counter 2048 to 4095 Byte Frame Counter 4096 to 9216 Byt
TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX - PFC Frame Priority PFC Frame Priority PFC Frame Priority PFC Frame Priority PFC Frame Priority PFC Frame Priority PFC Frame Priority Debug Counter 0 Debug Counter 1 Debug Counter 2 Debug Counter 3 Debug Counter 4 Debug Counter 5 Debug Counter 6 Debug Counter 7 Debug Counter 8 Debug Counter 9 Debug Counter 10 Debug Counter 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Enabling Application Core Dumps Application core dumps are disabled b
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 -rwx -rwx -rwx -rwx -rwx -rwx -rwx -rwx -rwx -rwx -rwx -rwx -rwx -rwx -rwx -rwx -rwx -rwx 1525213 765783 784725 787785 797852 1552883 803356 1523099 1828006 161797 43275928 1810311 1812442 1810601 1800256 1798111 1887496 1913790 Jul Jul Jul Jul Jul Jul Jul Jul Aug Aug Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 10 28 30 10 10 10 10 10 23 23 2015 2015 2015 2015 2015 2015 2015 2015 2015 2015 2015 2015 2015 2015 2015 2015 2015 2015 21:10:2
tcpdump cp [capture-duration time | filter expression | max-file-count value | packet-count value | snap-length value | write-to path] Debugging and Diagnostics 987
62 Standards Compliance This chapter describes standards compliance for Dell Networking products. NOTE: Unless noted, when a standard cited here is listed as supported by the Dell Networking OS, the system also supports predecessor standards. One way to search for predecessor standards is to use the http://tools.ietf.org/ website. Click “Browse and search IETF documents,” enter an RFC number, and inspect the top of the resulting document for obsolescence citations to related RFCs.
SFF-8431 SFP+ Direct Attach Cable (10GSFP+Cu) MTU 12,000 bytes RFC and I-D Compliance Dell Networking OS supports the following standards. The standards are grouped by related protocol. The columns showing support by platform indicate which version of Dell Networking OS first supports the standard. General Internet Protocols The following table lists the Dell Networking OS support per platform for general internet protocols. Table 93.
General IPv4 Protocols The following table lists the Dell Networking OS support per platform for general IPv4 protocols. Table 94. General IPv4 Protocols R F C # Full Name Z-Series S-Series 79 Internet Protocol 1 7.6.1 79 Internet Control 2 Message Protocol 7.6.1 82 An Ethernet Address 6 Resolution Protocol 7.6.1 10 Using ARP to 27 Implement Transparent Subnet Gateways 7.6.1 10 DOMAIN NAMES 3 IMPLEMENTATION 5 AND SPECIFICATION (client) 7.6.
R F C # Full Name Z-Series S-Series 21 Dynamic Host 31 Configuration Protocol 7.6.1 23 Virtual Router 38 Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) 7.6.1 3 Using 31-Bit Prefixes 02 on IPv4 Point-to1 Point Links 7.7.1 3 DHCP Relay Agent 0 Information Option 46 7.8.1 3 0 6 9 7.8.1 VLAN Aggregation for Efficient IP Address Allocation 31 Protection Against a 28 Variant of the Tiny Fragment Attack 7.6.
RF C# Full Name Z-Series S-Series 246 4 Transmission of IPv6 Packets over Ethernet Networks 7.8.1 267 5 IPv6 Jumbograms 7.8.1 2711 IPv6 Router Alert Option 8.3.12.0 358 IPv6 Global 7 Unicast Address Format 7.8.1 400 IPv6 Scoped 7 Address Architecture 8.3.12.0 429 Internet 1 Protocol Version 6 (IPv6) Addressing Architecture 7.8.1 444 3 7.8.1 Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMPv6) for the IPv6 Specification 486 Neighbor 1 Discovery for IPv6 8.3.12.
Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) The following table lists the Dell Networking OS support per platform for BGP protocols. Table 96. Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) RFC# Full Name S-Series/Z-Series 1997 BGP ComAmtturnibituitees 7.8.1 2385 Protection of BGP Sessions via the TCP MD5 Signature Option 7.8.1 2439 BGP Route Flap Damping 7.8.1 2545 Use of BGP-4 Multiprotocol Extensions for IPv6 Inter-Domain Routing 2796 BGP Route Reflection: An Alternative to Full Mesh Internal BGP (IBGP) 7.8.
Intermediate System to Intermediate System (IS-IS) The following table lists the Dell Networking OS support per platform for IS-IS protocol. Table 98.
Multicast The following table lists the Dell Networking OS support per platform for Multicast protocol. Table 100. Multicast RFC# Full Name Z-Series S-Series 1112 Host Extensions for IP Multicasting 7.8.1 2236 Internet Group Management Protocol, Version 2 7.8.1 3376 Internet Group Management Protocol, Version 3 7.8.1 3569 An Overview of SourceSpecific Multicast (SSM) 7.8.
RFC# Full Name S4810 1850 OSPF Version 2 Management Information Base 7.6.1 1901 Introduction to Community-based SNMPv2 7.6.1 2011 SNMPv2 Management Information Base for the Internet Protocol using SMIv2 7.6.1 2012 SNMPv2 Management Information Base for the Transmission Control Protocol using SMIv2 7.6.1 2013 SNMPv2 Management Information Base for the User Datagram Protocol using SMIv2 7.6.1 2024 Definitions of Managed Objects for Data Link Switching using SMIv2 7.6.
RFC# Full Name S4810 2674 Definitions of Managed Objects for Bridges with Traffic 7.6.1 Classes, Multicast Filtering and Virtual LAN Extensions 2787 Definitions of Managed Objects for the Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol 7.6.1 2819 Remote Network Monitoring Management Information Base: Ethernet Statistics Table, Ethernet History Control Table, Ethernet History Table, Alarm Table, Event Table, Log Table 7.6.1 2863 The Interfaces Group MIB 7.6.
RFC# Full Name S4810 isisISAdjIPAddrTable isisISAdjProtSuppTable draft-ietf-netmod-interfaces-cfg-03 Defines a YANG data model for the configuration of network interfaces. Used in the Programmatic Interface RESTAPI feature. 9.2(0.0) IEEE 802.1AB Management Information Base module for LLDP configuration, statistics, local system data and remote systems data components. 7.7.1 IEEE 802.1AB The LLDP Management Information Base extension module for IEEE 802.
RFC# Full Name S4810 FORCE10-SYSTEM-COMPONENT-MIB Force10 System Component MIB (enables the user to view CAM usage information) 7.6.1 FORCE10-TC-MIB Force10 Textual Convention 7.6.1 FORCE10-TRAP-ALARM-MIB Force10 Trap Alarm MIB 7.6.1 MIB Location You can find Force10 MIBs under the Force10 MIBs subhead on the Documentation page of iSupport: https://www.force10networks.com/CSPortal20/KnowledgeBase/Documentation.
